Giao an tieng anh lop 11 chuan

Lesson plan grade 11 school year: 2013 - 2014

Date of preparing: 15/8/ 2012 period: 01

REVISIONA.OBJECTIVES: 1. Knowledge: By the end of this lesson, Ss can understand and use some tenses: Conditional sentence types 2,3 and pasive forms 2. Skill: practise doing exercise 3. Political thought: reviewB.TEACHING AIDS: 1. Teacher:textbooks , 2. Students: pens, … C. METHODS: T/Wh class, groupwork, pairwork D. CONTENTS:I. Organisation: (1’)II. Warm up: ( 2’) chattingIII. New lesson: (40’)

Teacher’s activities Time Students’activitiesSTEP 1: PRESENTATION1/ Conditional sentence types 2,3- Teacher gives examples and asks: “What tenses are used in the second and in the third conditional sentences?”

Ex: If I were a bird, I would be a while pigeon.(I’m sorry I can’t be a bird)If I had studied harder, I would have passed the exam.(I failed the exam, because I didn't study hard enough)- Teacher notes:+ If the "if" clause comes first, a comma is usually used. If the "if" clause comes second, there is no need for a comma.+ We use WERE for the verb TOBE in the second conditional sentence.2/ Passive forms :- Teacher gives example and asks students to write out the form of the passive

1. Break the glass into small pieces. V O-> The glass is broken into small pieces.- Teacher gives some more examples and asks students to give the specific

15’

Activity 1: Group work - Sts discuss the form, use of the first, second and the third conditional sentences.- Students answer the question: the simple present tense, the simple future, the past perfect and past future perfect tenses- The leader writes down on the board* The second conditional sentence:If clause Main clauseS + simple past tense

S + should/would/ could + infinitive

* The third conditional sentence:If clause Main clauseS + had + PP

S + would/ could/ might have + PP

- Sts give some more examples- Students work in pairsACTIVE S V O

PASSIVE S’ (to be V3) (byO’) Be + V3 (past participle)

1. Simple Present: Trương THPT Nguyễn Văn cừ. Ngô Sách Thiệu1


form.1. Active: Tom painted the chair. Passive: The chair was painted (by Tom).2. Active: Tom painted the chair carefully yesterday. Passive: The chair was carefully painted (by Tom) yesterday.3. Active: They dry the beans in the sun. Passive: The beans are dried in the sun.4. Active: They have turned on the lights Passive: The lights have been turned on.

STEP 2: PRACTICE:Exercise 1: Complete the sentences with the verbs in parentheses.1. There would be less crime if everyone (have) ......... a job.2. If I (not, go) ....... out so late last night, I (not be, punish) ..............3. I (meet) ...... my old friend in the party yesterday if I (not, leave) .......... so early.4.If all the factories (be, move) ..... out of the city centre, the air pollution (be) ....... less serious.5.- Nga, please answer the phone.- I (will) ....... if I (can) ...... . I’m in the bathroom.Exercise 2: Change these sentences into the passive1. People don’t use this dictionary very often-> This dictionary ………….2. They have found oil in the Antarctic (South Pole)-> Oil ........................................3. Someone gave Mary this present an hour ago.-> Mary ……………..-> This present ………….4. They will translate her new book into a number of foreign languages.-> Her new book ………..

10’

10’

Subject + am / is / are + V3

2. Simple pastSubject + was / were + V3

3. Simple future:Subject + will be + V3 - Students take notes

Activity 2: Pair work - Students do practice in pairsExpecting answer

1. had2. had not gone/ wouldn’t have been

punished3. would have met/ hadn’t left4. were moved/ would be5. would/ could

- Students work in pairs1. This dictionary isn’t used very often2. Oil has been found in the Antarctic3. Mary was given this present an hour ago(or) This present was given to Mary an hour ago4. Her new book will be translated into a number of foreign languages.5. I was told that our teacher was sick

work in pairs*keys:1. If I had much money, + I would buy a car.+ i would go around the world.+ i would buy a house…………………..

Trương THPT Nguyễn Văn cừ. Ngô Sách Thiệu2


5. They told me that our teacher was sick.-> I.......STEP 3: PRODUCTION- answer the questions :

1. what would you do if you had much money?

5’

IV/ Summary: (2’) - Summarize the main pointsV./ Home work: (2’) - prepare new lesson.

-------------------------------------------------------------------

Date of preparing: 15 /8 /2012 Period: 02 UNIT 1: FRIENDSHIP

LESON 1: READINGA.OBJECTIVES: 1. Knowledge: - Students know about the qualities of true friendship 2. Skill: Reading 3. Political thought: talk about friendshipB.TEACHING AIDS: 1. Teacher:textbook , cassette player , 2. Students: pens, … C. METHODS: T/Wh class, groupwork, pairwork D. CONTENTS:I. Organisation: (1’) II. Warm up: ( 5’) T focuses students on the picture in the textbook and asks students the following questions. Students ask and answer in groups - Who are in the picture? - What is the relationship between them? - Why do they gather here? - Do you have many friends? - How many of them are close to you? - Do you often gather like those in the picture? T checks their work by eliciting the answer from students.T asks students to work in pairs to read the poem in the textbook and answer the questions: 'What do you think of the friend in the poem?'T asks some students to give their opinion. III. New lesson: (35’)

Teacher’sactivities Time Students’activitiesSTEP 1: PRE – READING1./New words:- acquaintances (n): người quen- unselfishness (adj): không ích kỉ- constancy (n): sự kiên định- loyalty (n): lòng trung thành- sympathy(n): sự đồng cảm:

15’ - listen and repeat.- individuals read the words aloud- Copy down

Ss predict the sentences are true or false/



- quality (n) e.g.: kien nhanAsk Ss to read the new words *Checking by R.O.R2./ True or false prediction- Ask Ss to predict these sentances .

1. Good friendship must be a perfect symparthy between friends.

2. A friendship to be close and lasting, both the freinds must have some special qualities.

3. A friendship can be last long which is all give on one side and all take on the other

4. people who are not influenced by rumours can never be good friends.

5. Trust is each can feel safe when telling the other his secrets

STEP 2: WHILE – READING1. Checking prediction:Ask Ss to read the text and then check their predictioncall Ss to give answergive remark2. Multiple choiceAsk Ss to read the text again and then read the sum- up and choose the most adequately sums up the ideas of the whole passage.call Ss to give and answercorrect answerAnswering:Ss read the questions carefully, and underline the key wordThen read the passage and find the answerscall Ss to give answer

STEP 3: POST – READINGT asks students to work in groups of four and use the information they get from the text and their own knowledge to discuss the following question: 'Why do we need to have friends'? - T encourages sts to use their own words- T goes around to help sts.

15’

5’

- Sts give their answer. 1. T 2. T 3. F 4. F 5. T

- Sts read the text and do the task in groups.

Key:1. It is unselfishness. It tells us that a person who is concern only with his own interests and feelings cannot be a true friend.2. Because they take up an interest with enthusiasm but they are soon tired of it and they feel the attraction of some new object.3. It is loyalty. It tells us that the two friends must be loyal to each other and they must know each other so well that there can be no suspicions between them.4. Because if not, people cannot feel safe when telling the other their most intimate secrets.5. Because they cannot keep a secret either of their own or of other. 6. It is sympathy. It tells us that to be a true friend you must sympathize with your friend. Where there is no mutual sympathy between friends, there is no true friendship

Sts work in groups to talk about the importance of friends in life*suggestions: - share joy and sorrow - help when one is in difficulty. - encourage sb to overcome difficulties. - set a good example. .........................

IV/ Summary: (3’) - Summarize the main points



V./ Home work: (1’) - list the quality of a good friend-----------------------------------------------------------------

Date of preparing:.20/ 8/ 2012. Period: 03 UNIT 1: FRIENDSHIP

LESON 2: SPEAKINGA.OBJECTIVES: 1. Knowledge: - Students can develop their speaking skill by talking about a famous friend. 2. Skill: Speaking 3. Political thought: Talking about a famous friendB.TEACHING AIDS: 1. Teacher: textbook , cassette player , 2. Students: pens, … C. METHODS: T/Wh class, groupwork, pairwork D. CONTENTS:I. Organization: (1’)II. Warm up: ( 5’) Homework checking: - Ask one st to answer two questions concerning the previous lesson: + Why do we need to have friends? + What are the conditions of true friendship?*key: 1.because we can share everything. 2. + unselfishness ; constancy ; loyalty trust ; sympathy- Ask others to give comments.- Listen and give remarksIII. New lesson: (35’)

Teacher’sactivities Time Students’activitiesSTEP 1: PRE – SPEAKING=>Task1 :T asks Ss to open the booksSts do the exercise by using the “ useful language “ in page 16.-T may ask Ss to provide some adjectives/ expressions used to describe people appearance. T can also explain the words if necessary.Sts work in groupT goes around and helps them if necessaryT checks in front of classT makes model conversation with a stSts practice speaking in pairT goes around to check and helps them.T calls on some Ss to present their answers in front of the class.T gives feedback.Task 2 :

Task1 :Look at the the useful language and add two more words for each category :Height : medium, height, rather short, too tall ..Face : round, long – high cheek bones , a scarForehead : high, lowNose : long, straight, flat, turned-upHair : long medium length , straight, curly, wavy, bald, thinEyes : green, blue, brown, grayPants : flar , baggyAppearance : plain, attractive, well-dressed, casually- dressedMouth : heart-shaped, wide,



T asks Ss to do in pairs (one asks and other answers) to describe their friends by using some useful expressions.T can explain some useful expressions.T goes around to help them if necessary.T calls on some pairs to practice in front of class.

STEP 2: WHILE – SPEAKING Task 3: Role-play- Tell sts that they are going to work in pairs. One is a journalist and one is an interviewee. The journalist is interviewing the interviewee about a friend of his/ hers who has just won the first international prize in Mathematics.- Ask them to ask and answer questions based on the suggestions in the textbook.- Allow them to work in 10 minutes and move around to conduct the activity.

A. Making questions :1. What’s his name ? /Could you tell me his name ?2. What’s he like ? / What does he look like ? / Is he .?3. what is his date of birth? When was he born ?4. What’s his hobby?What does he do in his spare time ?5. Why is he so interested in math ?6. How long does it take him to study math ? How much time does he spend on math everyday?7. What made him so successful ?

STEP 3: POST – SPEAKING

T asks Ss to play a game ,called “guessing”call one Student to discrible a person in their class and then ask another to guess who is she/he?

generous, thin / full lipsChin : pointed , firm, weakBuild : thin, slender, muscular, plump, heavily built, overweight, fatAge : young, middle age, elderly, old, Task 2 :Useful expression :He is in his ……………He has got a ……face with …………He is of medium height .He wears his ……………………His hair is …………….* Model :T : Could you tell me something about your friend? What’s he like ?S: Oh, he is very friendly . He is the kind of person who is always willing to give help.T : What does he look like ?S : Tall and good-looking.B Model :A. Hello, I’m Tan, a journalist for Hoa Hoc Tro magazine.B : Hi : I’m Nam. Nice to meet you.A. I hear you are Minh’s closest friend. Could you give me some information about Minh ?B. Sure. No problem.A: Has Minh just won the first international price in mathermatics ?B: Yes, That’s right. He did a good job and we are so proud of him.A: So he has to work very hard on this subject? How much time does he spend on it everyday ?B: I’m not sure but he studies it nearly every night. Math is his favorite subject.A: Do you know why ?B: He always says it is so useful and interesting. Both his parents



are mathermatics teachers.A: Oh, I see … Thank for giving me time. ByeB: You’re welcome. Bye

- play a game- Sample: .I: he is fat and short. He has a square face and a broad forehead. His eyes are small but bright.J: I suppose he is intelligent.I: Yes, he is very intelligent, very studious and very humorous. I admire him a lot. .....who is he?.........

IV./ Summary: - Summarize the main pointsV./ Home work: - write a short paragraph to discrible your best friend - prepare next lesson

----------------------------------------------------------------------

Date of preparing:.20./.8./..2012 Period: 04 UNIT 1: FRIENDSHIP

LESON 3: LISTENINGA.OBJECTIVES: 1. Knowledge: - Ss know about some situations when people met and became best friends.. 2. Skill: Listening 3. Political thought: Talking about a famous friendB.TEACHING AIDS: 1. Teacher: textbook , cassette player , 2. Students: pens, notebooks, textbooks… C. METHODS: T/Wh class, groupwork, pairwork D. CONTENTS:I. Organization: (1’) II. Warm up: ( 2’) ChattingQuestions :1. Who is your best friend 2. How did you have to meet him or her ?3. How long have you know each other?4. What qualities do you admire in your best friend?Suggested answers: Qualities that we admire in our best are: caring, supportive, helpful, honest, good-nature, quick-witted, humorous, friendlyIII. New lesson: ( 40’)

Teacher’sactivities Time Students’activitiesSTEP 1: PRE – LISTENING1./New words: look at the words and read after T /the



- residential area (n):khu dân cư - sense of humor (n): make others laugh at funny things. - guitarist (n): the person who play the guitar - rough (adj): difficult, unpleasant- Ask Ss to read the new words- checking by R.O.R2./ True or False prediction- Ask Ss to read the statements page 18 and then predict them - Call Ss to give answer

STEP 2: WHILE – LISTENING1. Checking T/F statementsAsk Ss to listen carefully , and check predictioncall Ss to give correct answer

2. Gap – filling- T asks sts to listen to the tape once or twice and take notes.- Sts can note down the information.- Call Ss to give answergive mark

STEP 3: POST – LISTENING

T asks Ss to work in pairs and use the information the get from Task 1 and 2 to talk about how Minh has been Long's best friend and Ha has been Lan's best friend.T moves round to check the activities and to make sure that sts are working effectively.T asks one or two sts to present in front of the whole class.T checks and gives remarks

tape.Sts copy the words and phrases

- give prediction

Sts listen to their teacher.Sts work in pairs to read the statement.Sts listen and do the task*Expexted answer :Lan1 2 3 4 5 6F F T F T F

Long:1 2 3 4 5 6F F T T T F

listen and fill in the gap*key:

How and where they met

What they like about their friend

Lan - They used to live in a residential in Hanoi.- Lan went on a holiday to Doson and Ha went there to visit her.

- Ha is very friendly and helpful.- Ha is sociable. She's got many friends in Doson and she introduced Lan around

Long - They met in college.- Minh played the guitar and Long was a singer.- They worked together.

- Minh has a sense of humor.- Minh likes to go to plays and movies.- Minh is a good listener.- Minh is friendly and helpful.

- present in the fond of class



IV./ Summary: Summarize the main pointsV./ Home work: - write a short paragraph to describe your best friend - prepare next lesson

----------------------------------------------------------------------

Date of preparing:..... Period: 05 Unit 1: friendship

LESON 4: WRITINGA.OBJECTIVES: 1. Knowledge: - Students can write about a friend's personalities.. 2. Skill: Writing 3. Political thought: Talking about a famous friendB.TEACHING AIDS: 1. Teacher:textbook , pen, 2. Students: pens, notebooks, textbooks… C. METHODS: T/Wh class, groupwork, pairwork D. CONTENTS:I. Organization: (1”)II. Warm up: ( 5’) Can you describe your friend?III. New lesson: 35’

Teacher’sactivities Time Students’activitiesSTEP 1: PRE – WRITING- Ask Ss to answer these question by themselves.Who is your best friend?What does he / she look like?What kind of person he / she is?Why do you like him or her?

Guideline:* Brief introduction: Say who you are going to write about.* Detail : - Tell how you met him / her. - Describe what he / she looks like and what kind of person he /she is. - State what two of you have in common.* Summary : - Give the reason why you like him / her and what you expect from him / her.

Listen to the teacher carefully.

- Brainstorm and write some notes about one of their friends.Outline :Hãy nói xem ai là người mà bạn đang có ý định viết.- Of my friends at school, I like Viet Hoang best.- My best friend is Viet Hoang. He is a high school student at My Duc A High School.Bạn gặp cậu ấy / cô ấy như thế nào.- I met him / her at the school opening ceremony last month and we soon became friends.- I met him / her at the party last week and we soon became friends.Miêu tả hình dáng, tính cách của cậu ấy cô ấy như thế nào.- Tam is a handsome boy with a bright face and glasses.- Lan is a pretty girl with round eyes and a nice smile.



- Help them to arrange their ideas in a logical way.

STEP 2: WHILE – WRITING

- Ask sts to write a paragraph of about 80 words, basing on the outline they have just finished.- Let sts write in 10 minutes.- Move around to conduct the activity.

- He / She also has a friendly smile and he / she is very interesting to talk to.

- He / She seems to know about a lot of interesting topics: art, music, medicine, cuisine, ect.- He / She seems to excel others in many subjects.

- He / She is particularly interested in math, chemistry, and biology.- He / She is particularly gifted in painting and music.

Hãy nói xem hai bạn có điểm gì chung.- We have a lot of common interests. We enjoy talking about school subjects, playing sports, and taking part in school clubs.- We have a lot of common interests: school subjects, sports, music, . . .Nêu lý do tại sao bạn quý cậu ấy / cô ấy. Bạn mong muốn gì từ người bạn của mình.- I like her because whenever I have problems, he / she is the first person to help. I really expect she's my true friendship to last through times.- I like the way she is and I really expect she is my true friend through times.

- Sample writing: I have some friends at school, and I love them all. Among them, Viet Hoang is the person I like best.I met him at the school opening ceremony last month and we soon became friends. Hoang is 17 years old and is a handsome boy with short dark hair and a kind-hearted face. He is also has a friendly smile and he is very interesting to talk to because he seems to know a lot about a lot of interesting topics: friendship, art, music, fashion, medicine, cuisine.



STEP 3: POST – WRITING

- Get feedback by asking two sts to write their paragraphs on the board.- Ask some other sts to give remarks.- Check and give the correct answer.- If there is enough time, T can have sts exchange their writing among sts within a group so that they can check their friend's work and give remarks

Over the years, we have been friends through good times and bad times with each other. And we have a lot of same interests. We enjoy talking about school subjects, playing sports, and taking part in good school clubs. I like Viet Hoang simply because whenever I have problems, he is the first person to help. I really expect our true friendship to last through timess

IV./ Summary: (2’) - Summarize the main pointsV./ Home work: (2’) - write a short paragraph to discrible your best friend - prepare next lesson

-------------------------------------------------------------------

Date of preparing:..... Period: 06 UNIT 1: FRIENDSHIPLESON 5: LANGUAGE FOCUS

A.OBJECTIVES: 1. Knowledge: - Students know how to pronounce the sound /dЗ/ and /tζ/ correctly.

- Students revise to-infinitive and bare infinitive.. 2. Skill: Speaking + Writing 3. Political thought: Talking about a famous friendB.TEACHING AIDS: 1. Teacher:textbook , pen, 2. Students: pens, notebooks, textbooks… C. METHODS: T/Wh class, groupwork, pairwork D. CONTENTS:I. Organization: (1’) II. Warm up: (( 3’) Arrangement:Arrangement: The/ changed/ in the church/ the picture/ of the village/ children.-T writes the words or phrases on the board-Ask Ss to arrange the words or phrases in a correct sentence.-Sts remark the common sound of the word groups. - T calls on some Ss to answer.- T gives feedback and correct answer.Expected answer: The children changed the picture in the church of the village.

- T asks Ss to read the common sounds: / t∫/ and /dʒ/ that the words containing.

-T lets sts read the sound/ t∫/ and /dʒ/ / twiceT lets sts repeat the sentenceT leads the lessonIII. New lesson

Teacher’sactivities Time Students’activitiesI. PRONUNCIATION1. presentation

- One st reads his/her writing aloud in front of the whole class.



Write two sounds on the board and pronounce them clearly twice, then ask sts to repeat.- Tell sts how to pronounce these sounds accurately.

/dʒ/: a voiced sound / t∫/ : a voiceless sound- Ask them to look at the textbook, listen and repeat.

/dʒ/ and / t∫/ jam children joke changeable January cheese ............................................

- Then ask sts to work in pairs to read the words again so that they can check for each other.2. practice- Ask sts to look at sentences in page 19 in the book.- Ask them to work in pairs to read the sentences and then find out the words

containing sound //dʒ/ and / t∫/ .- Ask them to work in 2 minutes.- Move around to conduct the activity.- Check and give the correct answers.- Ask some sts to read these sentences aloud.- Listen and give remarks.II. GRAMMAR1. Presentation:a). To infinitive:- What do you get up early every morning for? - I get up early to walk.- Oh, I like to walk ,too. But I have a lot of work to do.- But today the weather is too bad for me to walk. +. “To- inf “ is used :* to indicate the purpose :Ex: I get up early to walk.* as a modifier to replace a relative clauseEx: I have a lot of work to do ( which I have to do)* as an object of a verb

- Give remarks.- Listen to the teacher.

- Write down two sounds.- Listen to the teacher and repeat.- Look at the book , listen and repeat.

/dʒ/ and / t∫/ jam children joke changeable January cheese ............................................- Read these words in pairs and check for their partners.

- Read the sentences.

- Listen to the teacher

- Read the examples and tell the whole class their ideas.+ Uses:- After a noun to modify it- In structures: 1. S + V + too + adj / adv + to-infinitive 2. It + V + adj + to-infinitive- Listen to the teacher and take note.

- Give examples.

- Some sts report.b) Exercise 1 :Expected answer :1.who wants something to eat?2.I have some letters to write.3.I am ( was ) delightful to hear the news.



Ex: I like to walk.* as an subjectEx: It is healthful to walk every morning.* in idiomatic expression :Ex: The weather is too bad for me to walk today.b). Bare infinitive:* let/ make + O + bare-infEx: They make me feel disappointed.* following :had better , would rather, perceptive verbs ( see, smell, feel, watch…)Ex : You had better stay at home tonight.

2. Practice. + Exercise 1:- Ask sts to look at Ex1 and to do the task individually and then compare their answers with other sts.- Move round to conduct the activity.- Ask some sts to report.

- Listen and give remarks.

+ Exercise 2:- Ask sts to do Ex 2 individually and then share the answers with their friends.- Move round to help if necessary.- Ask two sts to write their answers on the board.- Check and give remarks.

3. ProductionMistake identifying and correctingShe noticed him to leave the party without saying goodbyeI made Lan to waitoutside for half an hourI think we should let her to try aginPeter is too tired finishing the last lap of the raceThis is the ideal place build our own house- let Ss check with their partner- call on some SS to give the answer

4.My mother has some shopping to do.5.you always have too much to talk about.6.It’s lovely to see you again.7.It is (was) too cold to go out.8.I am (was ) happy to know that you have passed the exam.- Listen and correct their work if necessary.- Listen to the T and take note.- Two sts write their answers on the board:Exercise 2 : Sentence transformation:Expected answer :1. The police watched them get out of the car.2. They let him write a letter to his wife.3. I heared them talk in the next room.4. the custom officer made him open the briefcase.5. The boy saw the cat jump through the window.6. Do you think the company will make him pay some extra money?7. I felt the animal move toward me.8. do you think her parents will let him go for a picnic?

*Key:1. to leave -> leave (notice sb/st + inf)2. to wait -> wait ( make sb/st + inf)3. to try -> try(let sb do st)4. finishing -> to finish ( adj +to inf)5.build -> to build

IV./ Summary: - Summarise the main pointsV./ Home work: - prepare next lesson

--------------------------------------------------------------------



Date of preparing: ………………. Period: 07 UNIT 2: PERSONAL EXPERIENCE

LESON 1: READINGA.OBJECTIVES: 1. Knowledge: Sts know about a girl's most embarrassing experience... 2. Skill: Reading 3. Political thought: Talking about embarrassing experience...B.TEACHING AIDS: 1. Teacher:textbook , pen, 2. Students: pens, notebooks, textbooks… C. METHODS: T/Wh class, groupwork, pairwork D. CONTENTS:I. Organisation: (1’) II. Warm up : ( 7’) Ordering picture- Ask Ss to look at the picture carefullyT asks sts to work in pairs to order the given pictures in the correct order. T asks some groups to give their answerIII. New lesson: (35’)

Teacher’sactivities Time Students’activitiesSTEP 1: PRE – READING+ New words: - a wad of (phr): cuộn tiền - glance at (v): liếc nhìn - be busy+V ing : mải mê, say sưa - make a fuss: (phr): làm ầm lên - sneaky (a): lén lút - scream(v): la hét - floppy (adj): soft and flexible: mũ mềm- Ask Ss to read the newwords- checking by gap – filling ( task 1.p. 24)

STEP 2: WHILE – READING Task 3: Answering the questions - T asks S to read the questions carefully in pairs. T makes sure they understand the questions - T asks S to read the text carefully again and work in pairs to answer the given questions. Sts may need to underline the clues that help them give their answers. - T goes around to help sts. - T asks some pairs to ask and answer the questions. - T correct their mistakes (if any)

7’

8’

10’

Sts copy the words on board.

Sts listen and repeat.Some individuals read the words aloud

T asks some pairs to ask and answer the questions*key:1. A red floppy cotton hat.2. To buy the hat for herself.3. A wad of dollar notes exactly like the ones her father had given her.4. She didn't like to make a fuss.5. She bought the hat with it..

work in groups and discussNotes :+ put up a notice on the school board



STEP 3: POST – READING- T asks sts to work in groups of four to discuss the following question: what did you do if you were her?” -T encourages sts to use their imagination-T goes around to help sts.- T asks the representative of some groups to present in front of the class

10’ + get on the same bus the next day and look for the boy to return the money to him + do nothing+ keep it secret+ ask her father for advice…………………

IV./ Summary: ( 1’) - Summarise the main pointsV./ Home work: (1’) - prepare next lesson

---------------------------------------------------------------------

Date of preparing: …........../........./...2012 Period: 08 UNIT 2 : PERSONAL EXPERIENCES

LESSON 2: SPEAKINGA.OBJECTIVES: 1. Knowledge: - Students can talk about a past experience. 2. Skill: Speaking 3. Political thought: Talking about a past experience...B.TEACHING AIDS: 1. Teacher:textbook , pen, 2. Students: pens, notebooks, textbooks… C. METHODS: T/Wh class, groupwork, pairwork D. CONTENTS:I. Organisation: (1’) II. Revision . Homework checkimg: ( 5 mins)

Teacher’sactivities Students’activitiesT asks sts to answer some questions Sts answer Others remark and correctQuestions:1. What did the girl wish to have when she was in grade 9?2. Who gave her money on her birthday ?3. Why did she decide to take the money from the boy’s bag?4. What did she do with the money?5. What did she discover when she came back ?

Expected answer :1. She wished to have a floppy cotton hat.2. Her father3. Because she thought that the boy had stolen her money.4. She bought the pretty hat of her dream.5. She discovered her money on the table

III. New lesson

Teacher’sactivities Time Students’activitiesSTEP 1: PRE - SPEAKING.+ Task 1: Matching.Match the things you might have done or - Work in pairs to do the task.



experienced in column A and their effects on your life in column B.A B1. Seaking English to a native English speaker.2. being seriously ill3. traveling to other parts of the country4. failing an exam.5. talking to a famous pop star.

a. makes you love your country moreb. teaches you a lesson and makes you work harderc. makes you appreciate your health mored. makes you feel more interested in learning English e. changes your attitude to pop stars.

..- Ask sts to work in pairs to match the things in box A with corresponding effects in box B.- Move round to check the activity and to help if necessary.- Ask some pairs to answer.- Listen and give remarks.

+ Task 2: Rearrange a dialogue.- Introduce the situation and ask sts to read through the sentences.- Ask them to rearrange the sentences into a meaningful dialogue.- Ask sts to share their answer with a partner and then practise the dialogue.- Ask two pairs to report.- Listen and give remarks.

STEP 2: WHILE - SPEAKING+ Task 3: Making dialogues- Ask sts to underline some questions in task 2 which is used to ask about past experiences.

- Introduce some useful structures:+ Have you ever .........?+ How did it happen?+ When did it happen?+ How did the experience affect you?

- Some sts present.Expected answer :1.d 2.c 3.a 4.b 5.e A:How do you feel when you meet a famous film star?B: It makes me excited

- Listen to the teacher.

- Listen to the T.

- Work individually to rearrange the dialogue.- Practise the dialogue in pairs.- Some sts report.1 - b ; 2 - d ; 3 - h ; 4 - a ; 5 - e ; 6 - g ; 7 - c ; 8 - f.

- Underline the questions.- One st reports:+ Have you ever spoken English to a native speaker?+ How did you meet her?+ What did you talk about?+ How did the experience affect you?- Listen to the T.



- Ask sts to look again at the topics in Task 1 as a suggestion and then work in pairs to make similar dialogues to the dialogue in Task 2.- Allow them to work in 10 minutes and move around to conduct the activity.STEP 3: POST - SPEAKING- Ask some pairs to make dialogues in front of the class. - Listen and give remarks.

- Work in pairs to think of a topic or to choose one topic in Task 1, and then make a dialogue.


------------------------------------------------------------

Date of preparing: ……./…./ 2012 Period: 09 UNIT 2 : PERSONAL EXPERIENCES

LESON 3: LISTENINGA.OBJECTIVES: 1. Knowledge: - Sts know about a person's most unforgettable experience. 2. Skill:Listening 3. Political thought: Talking about embarrassing experience...B.TEACHING AIDS: 1. Teacher:textbook , pen, 2. Students: pens, notebooks, textbooks… C. METHODS: T/Wh class, groupwork, pairwork D. CONTENTS:I. Organisation: (1’) II. Warm up: (3’)T asks sts to work in pairs to look at the picture in the textbook and say what is happening in the picture. T may give some suggested questions - What and who can you see in the picture? - What are the people doing? - What is happening to the house? - Have you ever seen a fire with your own eyes?T moves around to help sts.T asks some pairs to present and gives remarks III. New lesson: (35’)

Teacher’sactivities Time Students’activitiesSTEP 1: PRE – LISTENING1./New words: - memorable (adj): ghi nhớ. - replace (v): thay thế - embrace (v): ôm ấp- protect (v): bảo vệ- terrified (a): sợ hãi-escape (v):trốn thoát

Sts look at the words and read after T /the tape.Sts copy the words and phrases.



- scream(v): hét Before teaching these words, T helps Ss to pronounce them correctly. T may want to play the tape or model first and then ask Ss to repeat after the tape or after him/her in chorus and individually Cheeking by R.O.R2./ T/F prediction- Ask Ss to predict the statements in the textbook are true or false?- call Ss to give their answers

STEP 2: WHILE – LISTENING1. Check prediction-- Before Ss listen and do the task, T gets them to read through the statements to understand them and underline key words. For example, the key words in the first statements are “Christina” and businesswoman”.- T checks with the whole class and asks them to guess what the unforgetable experience the girl is going to tell might be(a fire).- T plays the tape (or reads the tapescript) once for Ss to listen and do the rask.

2/.Gap – filling- Before doing task 2, T asks Ss to study the text carefully for the missing information they need to fill and guess the answers. T might also want to remind Ss that while listening they need to focus on this information and write the answers down in note forms, not full sentences.- After playing the tape, T gets Ss to give the answers. T provides correct answers if necessary. If many Ss can’t complete the task , T might want to let Ss listen one more time and pause at the answers fir them to catch.STEP 3: POST – LISTENINGT asks sts to work in group and use the information the get from Task 1 and 2 and their own knowledge to discuss Christina's thought: 'Family is more important than things'.T moves round to check the activities and

Sts listen and repeat.Sts read the words in pairs and correct each other’s mistakes.Some individuals read the words aloud

Ss give prediction

Listen and check predictionGive correct answers*key: 1. T 2. F (13 years old) 3. F(in the kitchen) 4. F (she was sleeping) 5. T

Sts discuss in groups.

Sts listen and do the task.Sts compare their answers.Sts check their answerKey : 1- small 2- everything 3- family 4- replaced 5- took 6- appreciate



to make sure that sts are working effectively.T asks one or two sts to present in front of the whole class.T checks and gives remarks

Work in groups of 4Present their own opinion.


--------------------------------------------------------------------------

Date of preparing:…………. Period: 10 UNIT 2 : PERSONAL EXPERIENCES

LESON 4: WRITINGA.OBJECTIVES: 1. Knowledge: - Students can write the first draft of a personal letter about a past experience. 2. Skill: Writing 3. Political thought: Talking about embarrassing experience...B.TEACHING AIDS: 1. Teacher: textbook , pen, 2. Students: pens, notebooks, textbooks… C. METHODS: T/Wh class, groupwork, pairwork D. CONTENTS:I. Organisation: (1’)II. Warm up: (7’) A quiz about writing personal letters(To remind Ss of the rules of writing personal letters in English)- T asks Ss if they have ever written a personal letter in English and then announces the Quiz game and the rule. For example: “I’m going to divide the class into 2 big groups . Then I’m going to read out some questions about the rules of writing personal letters in English. You need to give your responses as quickly as possible. For each question, if your answer is quicker and correct, you get one point for your group. Then we will add up the points for each group. Which one has more points will be the winner”.- T divides the class into 2 big groups: A and B.- T reads out the questions and leads the game.The QuizHow many parts does a personal letter normally have ?What are these parts ?What do we normally write in the Salutation ?What do we normally write in the Closing ?Where do we normally sign the letter ?- T gets Ss to add up the points for each group and announces the winner.Answers: 5 partsThe Heading, the Salutation (Greeting), the Body, the Closing and the SignatureWe normally write “Dear” or “Hello/Hi” etc. plus the name of the person we are writing to and a comma at the end.



We normally write something like “Sincerely”, “yours”, “Love”,”Cheer”, “Best wishes”, “See you soon” etc. and after that we put a comma.Our signature normally goes under the Closing.

III. New lesson: (35’)

Teacher’sactivities Time Students’activitiesSTEP 1: PRE – WRITING- Ask Ss to answer these question by themselves.Have you ever been in an unexpected situation?How did it happen?

Guidline:* Brief introduction:- Give the reason why you write the letter.* Detail : - State what the problem was. - Describe how the problem happened. - Describe your feeling at the time.* Summary : - State what you learn from the situation

- Help them to arrange their ideas in a logical way.

STEP 2: WHILE – WRITING- Ask sts to write a paragraph of about 80 words, basing on the outline they have just finished.- Let sts write in 10 minutes.- Move around to conduct the activity.

- Listen to the teacher carefully.

- Brainstorm and write some notes about one of their friends.Outline :Nêu lý do viết thư:- I'm going to tell you one of the most embarrassing experiences that has happened in my life.- I'm writing to tell you one of my most embarrassing experiences.Hãy nói xem điều gì đã xảy ra:- I was invited to a party of one of my close friends, but I forgot to take her the present.- I was invited to a big party but I left my gift at home.Miêu tả sự việc:- On hurrying to the party, I forgot taking the gift with me.- I was absorbed in choosing my clothes, I forgot taking the gift with me.Miêu tả cảm giác của mình lúc đó:- I felt very embarrassed at that time.- I felt so embarrassed that I couldn't say anything.Bạn rút ra được bài học gì sau sự việc ấy:- I must be careful and well-prepared before going to a party.- I must considerate when doing something.- Sample writing: Thank you so much for your letter. I'm writing to tell you one of my most embarrassing experiences in my life.Last week, I was invited to a birthady party of one of my close friends, Fiona. I was excited about going there. I went to a gift shop and chose



STEP 3: POST – WRITING- Get feedback by asking two sts to write their paragraphs on the board.- Ask some other sts to give remarks.- Check and give the correct answer.- If there is enough time, T can have sts exchange their writing among sts within a group so that they can check their friend's work and give remarks

a lovely present for her. Then I ran home and put the present on the corner of the desk. The time for the party was coming, so I got dressed and hurried to Fiona's house. On getting there, I saw some of my friends standing at the door giving Fiona cards, flowers, and gifts. I didn't notice that I hadn't brought the present with me. When Fiona called me, I realized that I forgot one big thing. "Oh, my god. I don't take my gift with me. What should I do?" Some of my friends looked at me with a little surprise, so I felt very embarrassed and couldn't say anything. Finally, I tried to keep calm and told her that I had forgotten the present at home and I would send her later. You know I have never been in a situation like that. You can imagine how I felt at that time.Since then I have learned that I must be very careful and well-prepared before going to a party.Your friend,.


-------------------------------------------------------------------------

Date of preparing:...../......./..... Period: 11 UNIT 2 : PERSONAL EXPERIENCES

LESON 5: LANGUAGE FOCUSA.OBJECTIVES: 1. Knowledge: - Students know how to pronounce the sound /m/,/n/ and /ŋ/correctly.- Students revise some verb tenses. 2. Skills: - speaking + writing 3. Political thought: Talking about embarrassing experience...B.TEACHING AIDS: 1. Teacher: textbook , pen, 2. Students: pens, notebooks, textbooks… C. METHODS: T/Wh class, groupwork, pairwork D. CONTENTS:I. Organisation: (1’)II. Revision: noIII. New lesson: (40’)



Teacher’sactivities Time Students’activitiesI. PRONUNCIATIONIntroduce three sounds /m/, /n/ and /ŋ/ and help sts to practise these sounds.1).Write three sounds on the board and pronounce them clearly twice, then ask sts to repeat. /m/ /n/ /ŋ/ may nose wrong make nine running summer money bringing ............................

- Tell sts how to pronounce these sounds accurately.- Ask them to look at the textbook, listen and repeat.

- Then ask sts to work in pairs to read the words again so that they can check for each other.- Move around to help .- Ask two sts to read again and give remarks.2.). Ask sts to look at sentences in page 29 in the book.- Ask them to work in pairs to read the sentences and then find out the words containing sound /m/, sound /n/ and sound /ŋ/ .- Ask them to work in 2 minutes.- Move around to conduct the activity.- Ask one st to report and other sts to give remarks.- Check and give the correct answers.- Ask some sts to read these sentences aloud.- Listen and give remarks.

II./ GRAMMAR1. presentation- Revise some present tenses and some past tenses and have sts do Ex1, Ex2 and EX3.a. Revising some present tenses:- Tell sts that present tenses can be used to retell a story happening in the past to make the story more immediate and more vivid.

- Listen to the teacher.- Write down two sounds.- Listen to the teacher and repeat.- Look at the book , listen and repeat.

- Read these words in pairs and check for their partners.

- Look at the book and work in pairs.- Answers: /m/ /n/ /ŋ/ morning Avenue meeting remember Northend King meeting afternoon singing ................................ - Read the sentences.

- Listen to the T.

- Listen and correct their work if necessary.

- Read the examples and tell the whole class their ideas.+ The past simple:Form: (+) S + V-ed/ V(irregular) .. (-) S + did not + V ........ (?) Did + S + V ............?Use: an event/ activity happened at one particular time in the past.+ The past progressive:Form: (+) S + was/were + V-ing..... (-) S + was/ were + not + V-ing ... (?) Was/ Were + S + V-ing ........?Use: An event/ activity was in progress at a particular time in the past.+ The past perfect:Form: (+) S + had + PII ................. (-) S + had + not + PII ........ (?) Had + S + PII ...............?Use: An event/ activity took place and



b. Revising some past tenses- Give some examples:e.g.: - I met an Englishman in THD Street last week. - They were playing games when their father came home. - She had already known the news by the time I phoned her.- Ask sts to tell the T the forms and the uses of these tenses.- Ask sts to give examples.2.practice - Ask sts to do exercise 1+ Exercise 1:- Ask sts to look at Ex1 and to do the task individually and then compare their answers with other sts.- Move round to conduct the activity.- Ask some sts to report.


- Ask them to do exercise 2.+ Exercise 2:- Ask sts to do Ex 2 individually and then share the answers with their friends.- As the time is limited, ask sts to do 4 sentences only- Move round to help if necessary.- Ask some sts to report their answers.- Check and give remarks.3. production+ Exercise 3:- Ask sts to do Ex3 individually and then share the answers with their friends.- As the time is limited, ask sts to do 4 sentences only- Move round to help if necessary.- Ask some sts to report their answers.- Check and give remarks.

was completed before another activity or time in the past.

Do the task and then some sts - Do exercise 1 individually.- Some sts report.Expected answer :1. invites 2. sets 3. gets 4. waves 5. promises 6. carries 7. contains 8. has baked9. is 10. is shining 11. are singing 12. is

Expected answer :1. broke, was playing2. wrote, was3. was working, broke4. started, were walking5. told , were having6. didn’t listen, was thinking7. phoned , didn’t answer, were doing8. wasn’t wearing , didn’t notice, was driving

- Do the task and then some sts report.Expected answer :1. had eaten, arrived 2. found, had taken 3. got , had closed 4. got , had left 5. got, had arrived6. paid, had phoned7.went ,said, hadn’t arrived8. had looked , asked , cost


------------------------------------------------------------------------------



Date of preparing: ……../……../ 2012 Period: 12REVISION

A.OBJECTIVES: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to revise vocabulary and grammar of unit 2 2. Skills: practice doing exercises 3. Political thought: Talking about a partyB.TEACHING AIDS: 1. Teacher: lesson plan ,textbook , pen, 2. Students: pens, notebooks, textbooks… C. METHODS: T/Wh class, groupwork, pairwork D. CONTENTS:I. Organisation: (1’)

Class Date of teaching absent

II. Revision: Test 15 minutes Choose the correct answer.1. After Jessica ____ her degree, she intends to work in her father's company.

a. will finish b. finishes c. finished d. is finishing2. As you ________ your car at the moment, can I borrow it?

a. don't use b. didn't use c. aren't using d. haven't used3. When she saw a snake at her feet, she ________.

a. screamed b. was screaming c. had screamed d. screams4. When he realised that I ________ at him, he ________ away.

a. looked - was turning b. was looking - turnedc. was looking - was turning d. looked - turned

5. I ___ the new Harry Potter book now, so you can borrow my copy if you like.a. finish b. am finishing c. have finished d. had finished

6. I was sure that I ________ him before.a. met b. had met c. have met d. was meeting

7. Before I started the car, all of the passengers ________ their seat belts.a. will buckle b. had buckled c. was buckling d. have buckled

8. The minute I got the news about Sue I ________ my parents.a. phoned b. was phoning c. had phoned d. have phoned

III.New lesson: Teacher’sactivities Time Students’actibvitiesI: VOCABULARYComplete each of the sentences with the appropriate word from the box. Make changes if necessary:embarrass personal idol excite imaginememory embrace sneak fuss experience A lot of teenagers make Bi Rain their

10’

work in groups of 4do the task*key:1. idol.2. experienced3. embarrassment.4. personally



…….The task needs the skills of a suitably ……. engineer.She smiled to hide her slight …….I …… prefer Pizza to hamburgers.The romantic evening cruise will be a memorial experience.They left quietly, without …...They were locked in a passionate …. on the station platform.I haven't got a picture of this so you'll just have to use your -------.

II: GRAMMAR1. PRESENTATION:. Revising some past tenses+ The past simple:Form: (+) S + V-ed/ V(irregular) .. (-) S + did not + V ........ (?) Did + S + V ............?Use: an event/ activity happened at one particular time in the past.+ The past progressive:Form: (+) S + was/were + V-ing..... (-) S + was/ were + not + V-ing ... (?) Was/ Were + S + V-ing ........?Use: An event/ activity was in progress at a particular time in the past.+ The past perfect:Form: (+) S + had + PII ................. (-) S + had + not + PII ........ (?) Had + S + PII ...............?Use: An event/ activity took place and was completed before another activity or time in the past.2.PRACTICE:Complete the passage with the correct verb form.(1) ________ (you/ ever/ be) in a cable car? Well I have. Last February, I (2) __ (go) on a ski strip to Switzerland. What a trip! The first morning, I (3) ___(get) into a cable car. I (4) ___-(want) to go to the top of the mountain and (5) __(ski). The cable car (6) __ (start) up the mountain. I (7) ___(look) down, and it was so beautiful. Then there (8) ___(be) terrible noise. Suddenly the car (9) ___ (stop). It

5’

7’

5. experience6. fuss7. embrace8. imagination

listen to the teachertell the whole classmake example


1. Have you ever been 2. went 3. got (4. wanted 5. ski. 6. started 7. looked 8. was 9. stopped 10. didn’t move



(10) ____ (not move), and there was quiet everywhere. 3. PRODUCTIONChoose the correct answer.1. When she saw a snake at her feet, she

________.a. screamed b. was screaming

c. had screamed d. screams2. When he realised that I ________ at

him, he ________ away.a. looked - was turning b. was looking - turnedc. was looking - was turning

d. looked - turned3. I ___ the new Harry Potter book now,

so you can borrow my copy if you like.a. finish b. am finishing c. have finished d. had finished

4. I was sure that I ________ him before.a. met b. had met c. have met d. was meeting

5. Before I started the car, all of the passengers ________ their seat belts.a. will buckle b. had buckled c. was buckling d. have buckled

5’

- work in dividually- do the task*Key:

1. a. screamed 2. b. was looking - turned 3c. have finished 4.b. had met 5. b. had buckled

IV./ Summary: ( 2’)- Summarise the main pointsV./ Home work: (2’) - prepare next lessonE. Evaluation:Time:…………………………………………………………………………………Contents:…………………………………………………………………………….Methods:……………………………………………………………………………Result:……………………………………………………………………………….



Date of preparing: …………………… Period: 13UNIT 3: A PARTY

LESON 1: READINGA.OBJECTIVES: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to:

- Develop such reading-micro skills scanning for specific ideas, and identifying and correcting false statements.- Use the information they have read to discuss celebrations in their culture.

2. Skills: Reading 3. Political thought: Talking about a partyB.TEACHING AIDS: 1. Teacher: lesson plan ,textbook , pen, 2. Students: pens, notebooks, textbooks… C. METHODS: T/Wh class, groupwork, pairwork D. CONTENTS:I. Organisation:( (1’)


II. Warm up: (8’)- T gets Ss to work in pairs and try to make sense of the pictures on page 32. Then T gets them to answer the questions on this page.- T calls on some Ss to answer the questions. T should ask Ss to give reasons for their answers.- T checks with the class and asks Ss to guess what they are going to read about.Suggested answers:1. The people in the first picture might belong to a family. The young woman and the young man might be the parents and the 3 kids might be their children.The people in the second picture might belong a family, too. The old lady and the old man who are standing might be the parents. The woman and the man who are sitting in front might be their son and daughter in law. The boy and the girl might be their grandchildren.



2. The people in the first picture are celebrating a birthday(the little girl is blowing out the candles). And the people in the second picture are celebrating a wedding anniversary(the words on the wall read “50th anniversary).III./ Nrew lesson

Teacher’sactivities Time Students’actibvitiesSTEP 1: PRE – READING1./New words:+ Mark(v): + Milestone(n): an important event or stage in one’s life+ Lasting(a): continuing a long time+ Golden anniversary/jubilee: celebration of the 50th wedding anniversary+ Silver anniversary/jubilee: celebration of the 25th wedding anniversary+Diamond anniversary/jubilee: celebration of the 60th wedding anniversary- Before teaching these words, T helps Ss to pronounce them correctly. T may want to model first and then ask Ss to repeat after him/her.- Checking by R.O.RSTEP 2: WHILE – READING=>Task 1+ First , Ss should skim the seven statemments to understand them . As Ss do this they underline the key words to decide what information they need to find in the text For erxample , the key word is “song ” for the first statement and cake for second one .+ Then they should go back to the passage and locate the key words in the passge .+ Then they should read around the key words carefully to find the answer .- T get Ss to check their answers with a peer .- T calls on some Ss to write their answers on the board and ask them to explain their choices.- T checks the answers with the whole class.=> Task 2: T gets Ss to read through all the 7 questionsin TASK2 and identify the key words in each question. For example, in question 1, these might be “Lisa’s family

7’

5’

Sts listen to their T, work in groups to write down the words.

Sts copy the words on board.

*KEY:Birthday Wedding

1. people sing a song

V

2. People eat cake

V V

3. people receive cards and gifts from friends and relatives

V V

4. people joke about their ages

V

5. people remember their wedding days

V

6. people go out to dinner

V

7. people blow out candles, one for each year

V V

- Work in pairs

Answer:



and friends”, and “8th birthday”. In question 2, these might be “make cakes and ice-creams” and “birthday” etc.- Now T instructs Ss to go back to the passage and locate these words. Ss should read around these words carefully to find the answers to the questions.- Then T gets Ss to check their answers with a friend.- T calls on some Ss to present and explain their answers.- T gives feedback and correct answers.

STEP 3: POST – READING*take a survey:

Name 1. Where do you prefer to celebrate your birthday, at home or in the restaurant?2. Do your parents celebrate their wedding anniversaries?3. Are you going to celebrate your wedding anniversaries in the future? Why or why not?

- T gives corrective feedback

10’

8’

1. eighth >sevenths (line 1, paragraph 1, part A)

2. makes > ears (line 2, para 3,part A)

3. foods > presents (line 3, para 3, part A)

4. anniversaries > ages (line 4, para 4, part A)

5. months > years(line 2, para 1, part B)

6. 5th > 50th (line 2, para 3, part B)7. silver > golden(line 5, para 3,

part B)

Sts work in groups to talk about where to celebrate their birthday party

IV./ Summary: (2’) Summarise the main pointsV./ Home work: - T asks Ss to write a paragraph about how Vietnamese people celebrate their birthdays or wedding anniversaries, based on the text they read in class. - prepare next lessonE. Evaluation:Time:…………………………………………………………………………………Contents:…………………………………………………………………………….Methods:……………………………………………………………………………Result:……………………………………………………………………………….



Date of preparing:...../......./..... Period: 14UNIT 3: A PARTY

LESON 2: SPEAKINGA.OBJECTIVES: 1. Knowledge: - Students can develop their speaking skill by talking about parties and how to plan parties. 2. Skills: Speaking 3. Political thought: Talking about a partyB.TEACHING AIDS: 1. Teacher: lesson plan ,textbook , pen, 2. Students: pens, notebooks, textbooks… C. METHODS: T/Wh class, groupwork, pairwork D. CONTENTS:I. Organisation: (1’)


II. Warm up: (5’)Teacher’sactivities Students’actibvities

T asks Ss if they liked the parties and why to lead to the topic-SS answer the questionsQuestions: 1. Do you like the parties? Why?2. Have you ever been to a party?3.Whose party was it?4. On what occasion?5. Where was it?-T leads to new lesson

- answer the questions1. yes. Because it makes me happy2. yes .i have3. my friend.4. In her birthday party5. At her home

Lead -inHave you ever been invited to one of these parties?How was it organized?In our speaking lesson today, we talk about parties and how to plan them

III./ Nrew lesson: Teacher’sactivities Time Students’actibvitiesSTEP 1: PRESENTATION 15’ Activity 1:



1. Pre-teaching vocabulary:+.house-warming party: tiệc nhà mới+ .farewell party: tiệc chia tay-Ask Ss to give the Vietnamese meaning of the words / phrases2. Activity 1: Discussion“What do you think of when you want to plan a party?”

• outline- date and time - Place:- Guests:- Activities- Foods and drinks

(* ) note: verb: + be going to ← + present continuous( be + Ving)

* structure:← we are going to ......← we are planning........← we intend + Ving.......

* inviting:E.g: Would you like to come ...?We would love to have you ...We welcome your presence...Please do come ...It’s our pleasure to invite you ...You don’t know what you’ll miss out on if you don’t come. Etc.

STEP 2: PRACTICEActivity 2: role - play- T puts Ss in pairs and gets them to tell each other about the parties they have been to , based on the outlines they have made - Students can use the language:.STEP 3: PRODUCTION

Discussion “In your opinion, what is your ideal party? What is it like?”

15’

5’

Suggested answers:These are the first steps in planning a party:- Choose a place to hold the party (at home or away?)- Set the number of guests (who to invite)- Determine how much you can spend (budget)- Decide food and drink you want to serve at the party.- Send invitation cards (Give the time, date, address, derections, your phone number for RSVPs)- Plan plenty of short games- Have extra treats (someone unexpected might show up)Note: RSVP = Please reply

Activity 2:+ We are planning a party. Let’s talk about what each of us will do to prepare for it.+ Let’s have a discussion about our party next Saturday.+ Why don’t we have a surprise party?+ Why don’t we hire the ground floor of a bar and we could get the band in?+ Why don’t we make our own food?+ Shall we have some music?+ How about . . . . . . ?+ That’s a nice ideaExample:We are going to hve a weman’s day party We are planning to invite all female students in ourclassand all teachers in ourschool

- listen ss present their own idea

IV./ Summary: Summarise the main pointsV./ Home work: - Ss write a paragraph about a party they have been to. - prepare next lessonE. Evaluation:Time:…………………………………………………………………………………Contents:…………………………………………………………………………….Trương THPT Nguyễn Văn cừ. Ngô Sách Thiệu31


Methods:……………………………………………………………………………Result:……………………………………………………………………………….

Date of preparing:...../......./..... Period: 15UNIT 3: A PARTY

LESON 3:LISTENINGA.OBJECTIVES: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to develop such listening micro-skills as intensive listening for specific information 2. Skills: Listening 3. Political thought: listen to Mai’s birthday party.B.TEACHING AIDS: 1. Teacher: lesson plan ,textbook , pen, 2. Students: pens, notebooks, textbooks… C. METHODS: T/Wh class, groupwork, pairwork D. CONTENTS:I. Organisation: (1’)


II. Warm up: (7’)Teacher’sactivities Students’actibvities

WARM UP- T divides the class into groups of 10 and introduces the game: The groups should generate as many words related to birthdays and birthday parties as possible in 5 minutes.- T divides the board into as many sections as the number of groups is. When time is up, T calls on the presentative of each group to come to the board and write their list. Then T gets the whole class to count. Each correct word gets one point. Which group has more points wins the game.

- work in group

Suggestion words: Age, balloon, birthday, blow out, cake, candle, cards, candy, cookies, chocolate, confetti, decorations, gift/present, icing, flowers, fun, party, song, etc.

In today’s listening lesson, you’ll listen to a passage about Mai’s birthday party

III./ Nrew lesson: (35’)Teacher’sactivities Time Students’actibvities



STEP 1: PRE – LISTENING1./New words: - turn (v):e.g. I will turn 30 on my next birthday. - gather (v): to come together in one place - clap one's hands (v): (demonstrate) - help onself to st(v):to serve omeself with food/drinks - icing (n): the cream layer on the cake- Ask Ss to repeat after the tape or after him/ her in chorus and individually.- Checking by R.O.R2./ T/F prediction- Ask Ss to predict the statements are true or false- call Ss to write their predict on the board

STEP 2: WHILE – LISTENING1./ Check prediction- T asks sts to have a look at the statements and read them in pairs. T makes sure they understand the statements. T asks sts to pay attention to the key word in each statement- T asks sts to listen to the tape/T twice and tick the box to indicate if the statements are true or false. T may underline the words/ phrases that indicate false information- T asks sts to compare their answer in pairs.- T checks sts’ answer.

2./ Answering the questions- T asks sts to work in pairs and read questions given inthe textbook. T makes sure they understand the questions. Sts discuss the information needed to answer the questions with each other and try to answer them.- T asks sts to listen to the talk once or twice and answer the questions. Sts are advised to note down necessary information.- T asks sts to compare their answers. - T checks sts’ answer by playing the tape/ read the dialogue once again, stop where

5’

5’

10’

10’

- Sts copy the words and phrases.

- Sts listen and repeat.- Sts read the words in pairs and correct each other’s mistakes.- Some individuals read the words aloud

- Sts look at the words and read after the tape.

- Give prediction

*Answers:1. F(the party began at about 3 in

the afternoon)2. F(over 20)3. F(at 4:30 they cut the cake)4. T(the party ended at about 6)5. F(other kids left, only one

stayed to help)

- Sts read the questions and discuss in pairs.

- Sts listen and do the task.*Key :1- She was 162- Because it is noisy and expensive3- Soft drinks and biscuits 4- At about 4:305- It was beautifully decorated with pink and white icing with 16 colourful candle in the middle 6- they clapped their hands eagerly and sang 'Happy birthday 7- At about 6 in the evening.

- Work in pairs- Role playCARD AAsk your friend about Mai’s birthday. Ask about:

CARD BTell your friend about Mai’s birthday party. Use the following



necessary and conduct the correction

STEP 3: POST – LISTENING

- T puts Ss in pairs and introduces the task: “Supposed that Mai is your common friend. Yesterday was her birthday but one of you couldn’t come. Now you ask the other person about Mai’s party”.- T distributes the following handouts for Ss to do the role play..- T calls on some pairs to perform the role play in front of the class..

5’

- Place where the party was held- When it began and ended- Who came- What you did thereAdd more questions if you like

information:- It was held at Mai’s place.- It lasted about 3 hours (3-6 p.m)- About 20 guests came.- Mai opened gifts, you played chess, then Mai cut cakeAdd more information as you like

IV./ Summary: (1’)- Summarise the main pointsV./ Home work: (1’) - prepare next lessonE. Evaluation:Time:…………………………………………………………………………………Contents:…………………………………………………………………………….Methods:……………………………………………………………………………Result:……………………………………………………………………………….

Date of preparing:...../......./..... Period: 16UNIT 3: A PARTYLESON 4:WRITING

A.OBJECTIVES: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to :

- Define the format and structure of an informal letter of invitation - Write an informal letter of invitation

2. Skills: Writing 3. Political thought: Talking about a partyB.TEACHING AIDS: 1. Teacher: lesson plan ,textbook , pen, 2. Students: pens, notebooks, textbooks… C. METHODS: T/Wh class, groupwork, pairwork D. CONTENTS:I. Organisation: (1’)




II. Warm up: (7’)chatting

Teacher’sactivities Students’actibvities1. On what occasions are parties held?

2. what kinfd of clothes do people often wear?3. what kind of presents do people often bring to

1. Birthday , graduation , wedding , anniversary, moving to a new house , family gathering Christmas , New Year , etc2. Formal : dresses , high- heel shoes for women ; suits and ties for men .Informal : anything can do : jeans , T shirt , skirts , etc3. Anything can do : books , CDs , flowers , scaves , ties , paperweights , pens bags , hats , etc

III.New lesson (35’)

Teacher’sactivities Time Students’actibvities STEP 1: PRE – WRITING=> Task 2(5m)- Ask Ss to read the letter carefully.-T gets Ss to do the task individually by put the words / phrases in the gap - compare their answers with a partner-T calls on some Ss to give the answers and write them on the board

STEP 2: WHILE – WRITING- Get Ss to read task 3 => Activity 1: work out the questions- T gives some suggestions for Ss to write:+ Party: birthday party, farewell party, house warming party…..+Where: at home, in a restaurant, outdoor,……..+When: during the day, in the evening………+ Guests: friends, classmates, relatives…….+ Activities: singing, playing games……+ Foods and Drinks: cakes, wine, beer, soft drinks, fruits, fruits juice………..=>Activity 2: writing - Get Ss to write their letters in 10 minutes, based on the outlines they have

5’

10’

- do the task individuallyAnswer : 1 at my house 2 to come 3 . refreshments 4 to cook 5 . winners 6 . by Monday

- Whole class take notes

=Task 3: work individuallySuggested writingDear Nam,



produced-Ask Ss to get in pairs, exchange their letters and correct eachother- T goes around and offer help

STEP 3: POST – WRITING

-T chooses one letter and reads it to the class.-Then T elicits corrective feedback from the class and give final comments afterwards-T should draw Ss’attention to the format of the letter, the organization of ideas and language use.

10’

10’

It’ll be my birthday next Saturday. I’d like to invite you to come to the party, which will be at my house probably at 4 p.m. I intend to invite about 10 people , so it will more easily . I will order some pizzas and and buy snacks and fruit. Howver, you might want to bring some drinks to be shared. There will be dancing and karaoke competition . So there will be a lot of funCan you come to join us?Hope to see you then. Best wishes, Lan

IV./ Summary: Summarise the main pointsV./ Home work: - prepare next lessonE. Evaluation:Time:…………………………………………………………………………………Contents:…………………………………………………………………………….Methods:……………………………………………………………………………Result:……………………………………………………………………………….

Date of preparing:...../......./.2012 Period: 17UNIT 3: A PARTY

LESSON 5: LAGUAGE FOCUSA.OBJECTIVES: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to :

- Students know how to pronounce the sound /l/,/r/ and /h/correctly.- Students revise infinitive and gerund - active and passive form.

2. Skills: doing exercise 3. Political thought: practice doing exerciseB.TEACHING AIDS: 1. Teacher: lesson plan ,textbook , pen, 2. Students: pens, notebooks, textbooks… C. METHODS: T/Wh class, groupwork, pairwork D. CONTENTS:I. Organisation: (1’)


II. Warm – up: (2’)



- Look at the pictures and how do you say them in English?

House leaf radio/ h/ /l / /r/

III. New lesson: 40’

Teacher's activities Time Students' activitiesI./ PRONUNCIATIONIntroduce three sounds /l/, /r/ and /h/ and help sts to practise these sounds.1. Listen and repeat :- Write three sounds on the board and pronounce them clearly twice, then ask sts to repeat. /l/ /r/ /h/ lunch pretty hit lovely Europe house lemonade parent holiday jelly really hospital ............................- Tell sts how to pronounce these sounds accurately.- Ask them to look at the textbook, listen and repeat.- Then ask sts to work in pairs to read the words again so that they can check for each other.- Move around to help ..2. practice - Ask sts to look at sentences in page 39 in the book.- Ask them to work in 2 minutes.- Move around to conduct the activity.- Check and give the correct answers.- Ask some sts to read these sentences aloud.II. GRAMMARStep 1: presetation:1.Revising some patterns with infinitive and gerund+ Pattern 1: S + V + to-infinitive .....Vs: agree, decide, demand, fail, hope,

7’

10’

- One st reads his/her writing aloud in front of the whole class.- Give remarks.- Listen to the teacher.

- Write down two sounds.- Listen to the teacher and repeat.- Look at the book , listen and repeat. /l/ /r/ /h/ lunch pretty hit lovely Europe house lemonade parent holiday jelly really hospital ............................- Read these words in pairs and check for their partners.

- Look at the book and work in pairs.- Answers: /l/ /r/ /h/ hello really hello Allen pretty Harry lunch librarian horrible ................................ - Read the sentences.

- Listen to the T and take note.



mean, refuse, pretend, start, volunteer.e.g: The boy decided to tell the truth.+ Pattern 2: S + V + V-ing ......Vs: admit, advise, delay, consider, forget, propose, risk, like, dislike, keep.e.g: She keeps saying about her achievements, which annoys other people.2. Introduce some passive patterns with infinitive and gerund.+ infinitive: Active: S + V + to- infinitive + O Passive: S + V + to be + PII(+ by O)+gerund: Active: S + V + V-ing + OPassive: S + V + being + PII ( + by O)- Ask sts to give some more examples.

Step 2: practice- Ask sts to do exercise 1+ Exercise 1:- Ask sts to look at Ex1 and to do the task individually and then compare their answers with other sts.- Move round to conduct the activity.- Ask some sts to report.- Listen and give remarks.- Ask sts to give more examples.- Ask them to do exercise 2.+ Exercise 2:- Ask sts to do Ex 2 individually and then share the answers with their friends.- Move round to help if necessary.- Ask some sts to report their answers.- Check and give remarks.+ Exercise 3:- Ask sts to do Ex 2 individually and then share the answers with their friends.- Move round to help if necessary.- Ask some sts to report their answers.- Check and give remarks.

Step 3: production- T divides the class into small groups of 4. Then T introduces the task “A Celebrity Interview”: “

7’

7’

10’

- Do exercise 1 individually.- Some sts report.1. having 2. getting3. to tell 4. practising5. to see.- Listen and correct their work if necessary.

- Listen carefully and take note.

- Give more examples.

*Exercise 2:- Do the task and then some sts report.Answer: 1. b 2. a 3. b 4. b 5. a

- Do exercise 3: individually.- Some sts report.Answer: 1. d 2. c 3. b 4. b 5. c

Model questions:What do you like/love doing ?What do you hate doing ?What do plan to do in the future ?What award do you hope to achieve in this year’s competition ?What do you think you need to do to achieve your objectives/ make yourdream come true ?



- T distributes the worksheets to Ss. Then T guides how to ask interview questions and answer them and reminds Ss to use infinitive and gerund when completing the tasks.- T gets Ss to work in groups, then goes around and offers help.- T gives final comments and provides correction if necessary.

- work in small groupWorksheet for the celebrityName:LikesDislikesFuture plan

Worksheet for the reportersLikesDislikesFuture plan

IV./ Summary: (1’) Summarise the main pointsV./ Home work: (1’) - prepare next lessonE. Evaluation:Time:…………………………………………………………………………………Contents:…………………………………………………………………………….Methods:……………………………………………………………………………Result:……………………………………………………………………………….Date of preparing:...../......./..... Period: 18

REVISIONA.OBJECTIVES: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to : Revision unit 3 2. Skills: practice dong exercise 3. Political thought: revision grammar, vocabularyB.TEACHING AIDS: 1. Teacher: lesson plan ,textbook , pen, 2. Students: pens, notebooks, textbooks… C. METHODS: T/Wh class, groupwork, pairwork D. CONTENTS:I. Organisation: (1’)


II. Warm – up: (4’) Chatting: - ask Ss some question .

1. What do you like/love doing ?2. What do you hate doing ?3. What do plan to do in the future ?• key: 1.i love playing chess2. i hate doing my homework .3. i plan to be a teacher.

III. New lesson:( 35’)Teacher’sactivities Time Students’actibvitiesI: VOCABULARY 10’



Complete each of the sentences with the appropriate word from the box. Make changes if necessary:The golden anniversary:; anniversary; blew out; Gift; celebrate ; cards

1. When they finished singing , Liza .............. the candles on the cake.

2. A date that is an exact of years after the date of important event is a(n)........

3. People call the 50th wedding anniversary the..............

4. Most married couples in the U.S ..............wedding anniversary each year.

5. When the guest comes to a party, she/he often gives a...............for the host

II: GRAMMARSTEP 1. PRESENTATION:. Introduce some passive patterns with infinitive and gerund.+ infinitive: Active: S + V + to- infinitive + O Passive: S + V + to be + PII(+ by O)+gerund: Active: S + V + V-ing + OPassive: S + V + being + PII ( + by O)+ Use: to emphasise the action/event rather than the agent

STEP 2.PRACTICE:+ Task 1: choose the best answer - work in pair- choose the best answer to complete the sentence1. the Tin opener seemed ……..for left-handed people.A. to desing B. to be designingC. to be designed D. being designed2. i narrowly avoided………. Down by the bus as it came round the corner.A. running B. to runC. to be run D. being run3. he denied……….any money by his company.

10’

10’

- Work in groups- Exchange their answer- Correct

*Key:1. Blew out 2.Anniversary 3.Golden anniversary4.celabrate 5. gift

- listen to the teachertell the whole classmake example


+ Exercise 1:1. to be designed2. being run3. being paid4. being taken5. to being given



A. paying B. being paidC.to be paid D. to pay4. the children enjoy……to the zoo.A. to be taken B. being takenC. to take D. taking5. On her birthday , the girl is looking forward….a gift.A. to be given B. to giveC. to being given D. to be giving

STEP 3. PRODUCTION- work in pair - ask and answer the questions.

1. What do you think of the book?2. What do you hate doing ?3. would you mind helping me to

cook?

5’

- work in dividually- do the task*Key:1. oh. Excellent. It is worth

reading.2. i hate wearing uniform3. no.

IV./ Summary: (1’) Summarise the main pointsV./ Home work: (1’) - prepare next lessonE. Evaluation:Time:…………………………………………………………………………………Contents:…………………………………………………………………………….Methods:……………………………………………………………………………Result:……………………………………………………………………………….



Date of preparing:...../......./..... Period: 19TEST YOURSELF A


- Test themselves by completing every exercises 2. Skills: Writing + Speaking 3. Political thought: Talking about a partyB.TEACHING AIDS:



1. Teacher: lesson plan ,textbook , pen, 2. Students: pens, notebooks, textbooks… C. METHODS: T/Wh class, groupwork, pairwork D. CONTENTS:I. Organisation: (1’)


II. Warm – up: no III./New lesson: (40’)Teacher’sactivities time Students’activities I./LISTENING-T reads twice.-Ss listen to the teacher and complete the sentences.- compare their answer with their partner- call Ss to give answer II. READING:T gets Ss to read through all the 5 questions in book and identify the key words in each question. For example, in question 1, these might be “why”, and “not an ordinary celebrations”. ……- Now T instructs Ss to go back to the passage and locate these words. Ss should read around these words carefully to find the answers to the questions.- Then T gets Ss to check their answers with a friend.- T calls on some Ss to present and explain their answers.- T gives feedback and correct answers.

III. GRAMMAR AND PRONUNCIATIONa) listen and put a tick () in the right box.-Ask Ss to do it first.-Then T corrects it..

10’

10’

7’

- Ss listen to the teacher and complete the sentences

*Answers:1.A 4.D2.D 5.C3.B

- Work in pairs- Key:1. because they hadn’t been childless

for 10 years after they were mairried.

2. To take some photographs of a happy family

3. The boy was dressed in a smart, brand new outfit and looked like a little prince

4. Because he was interested in the toys

5. He felt that it was delightful and looked forward to the next day to have the films developed

← - listen and tick← -*Key:

a) 1.nine 3.matching. 2.hour 4.jam.b) 1.to see. 2.to be 3.to phone 4.pay. 5.to be met. 6.to be appointed- write about yourbirthday party-present in front of the class.

Dear Nam,



IV. WRITING.-Ask Ss to write about their birthday party.

15’ I am having a birthdayparty on Saturday ,Octuber 29th at my house at 7p.m. Would you like to come?. I intend to invite about 10 people , so it will be more easily . I will order some pizzas and and buy snacks and fruit. Howver, you might want to bring some drinks to be shared. There will be dancing and karaoke competition . I hope you will come and join the fun. Best wishes, Lan

IV./ Summary: - Summarise the main pointsV./ Home work: - prepare next lessonE. EVELUATION:Time:…………………………………………………………………………………Contents:…………………………………………………………………………….Methods:……………………………………………………………………………Result:……………………………………………………………………………….

Date of preparing:...../......./..... Period: 20TEST 45 MUNITES


- evanluate what they have gained in unit 1+2+3 2. Skills: listening +reading +Writing + use of laguage 3. Political thought: do the test themselves.B.TEACHING AIDS: 1. Teacher: testing papers 2. Students: pens, C. METHODS: individually D. CONTENTS:I. Organisation: (1’)

Class Date of teaching absence11A1 5/ 1011A2 5/1011A3 9/10

II. Warm – up: no III./New lesson: * MATRIX:

Cấp độNhận biết Thông hiểu

Vận dụng cộngCấp độ thấp Cấp độ cao



chủ đềI. Listening (Friendship)

-Listen and choose the correct answer

số câu:: số điểm: Tỉ lệ %:

6 0,5 30 %

6 3 30 %

II.Pronunciation

/t∫/ ,/ dЗ/,/h/ , /n/,


40,2510%

4110%

III.Vocabulary and Grammar and speaking

-Word to express experice, personlities- speaking

-infinitive- gerund-past simple & past perfect-passive infinitive/ gerund


30,206 %

70,2014 %

10 2,0 20%

3. Reading(A party)

- Read the paragrap and choose the best answer.

- Read the paragrap and choose the best answer.


30,412%

20,48%

5 2,0 20%

4. Writing( A party)

-write a letter of invitation to a party within 80-120 words


50,420%

5220%

Tổng số câu: Tổng số điểm: Tỉ lệ %:

165.858 %

92.222 %

5220%

3010100 %

TEST 45 MINUTESName………………….....................class……………………….Trương THPT Nguyễn Văn cừ. Ngô Sách Thiệu45


I./ LISTENING (3.0) Nghe và chọn đáp án đúng nhất để hoàn thành câu.1. Her best friend is ..........

a. Na b. Ha c.Nga d. Huong2. They .......................in Nguyen Cong Tru Residential Area in Hanoi.

a. Have been lived b. used to live c. Would live d. lived3. Her family moved to Hai Phong in ………………….

a. 1995 b. 1999 c. 1985 d. 1958 4. It took ……………. For her to get Doson. a. 15 minutes b. 20minutes c. 45 minutes d. 40 minutes

5. She first started to get to know her when…………………………….a. I was going on a two day trip to Do Sonb. I was on holiday to Hanoi.c. I lived in Hanoid. Her family moved to Hai Phong.

6. They have been best friend ………………………a. Since Lan’s trip to Doson.b. Since Lan’s moved to Hai Phong.c. Since last year.d. Since 1985

II./ PRONUNCIATION (1pt)Chọn từ gạch chân có cách phát âm khác so với các từ còn lại

1. A. never B. night C.ink D.next2. A. honesty B. house C. hat D. horrible3. A. change B. children C. machine D. church4. A. guitarist B. passenger C. generous D. Village

III./ GRAMMAR, VOCABULARY, SPEAKING (2.0pts)Chọn đáp án đúng nhất để hòan thành mỗi câu1.He is a(n).......man. He always help people without thinking of his own benefit

a. unselfish b. generous c. friendly d. honest 2. The boy glanced at me and turned away. a. knocked b. Pointed c. Looked d. arrived3.I think yourmother should let you ............your own mind.

a. make up b. to make up c. making up d. made up4. - : What time will you be back?

- : O h, I expect................... back some time around nine a. come b. came c. to come d. coming5. I expect ………. at the airport by my uncle. a. to meet b. to be met c. met d. being met6. The children enjoy……to the zoo. a. to be taken b. being taken c. to take d. taking7. I think your mother should let you……. Your own mind. a. make up b. to make up c. making up d. made up8. I want .................. volleyball. I hope ................for the team.

a. to play/ to be chosen b. to play/ to choose c. playing/ being chosen . d. to play/ choosing

9. Just keep on.................what you like. a. do b. did c. doing d. done

10. Before I ______ for that job, I ________ my parents for advice.a. applied / had asked c. had applied / asked



b. applied / asked d. have applied / asked

IV./READING (2.0 pts) Read the passage carefully, then choose the correct answer.Going to party can be fun and enjoyable. If you are invited to a party, do call your host up early to inform him! her of whether you are going. If you want to bring someone who has not been invited along with you, you should ask for permission first. Remember to dress appropriately for theparty. You will stick out like a sore thumb if you are dressed formally whereas everyone else is in T-shirt and jeans. If you are not sure what to wear, do ask your host. During the party you may perhaps like to help your host by offering to serve drinks or wash the dishes. Your host would certainly appreciate these efforts. If you happen to be in a party you do not know anyone, do not try to monopolize the host's attention. This is inconsiderate since yourhost has many people to attend to and can not spend all his/ her time with you. Instead, learn to mingle with others at the party. You could try breaking the ice by introducing yourself to someone who is friendly-looking.Before you leave the party, remember to thank your host first. If you have the time, you could even offer to help your host clean up the place. 1. If you are invited to a party, you should ________.a. take someone with you b. ask for your parents' permission firstc. bring a small gift d. call to confirm your arrival 2. According to the passage, if you are dressed differently from everybody at the party, _________.a. you will make people notice you b. people may be attached to youc. you will feel uncomfortable d. you shouldn't pay attention to your clothes3. What should you do if you are in a party?a. Talk to your host as much as possible.b. Move around and. talk to other guests.c. Try to break the ice up.d. Just make friends with friendly-looking people.4. The phrase 'break the ice' means ________.a. make friends b. attract people's attentionc. make people feel more relaxed d. establish a relationship5. Which of the following is not true according to the passage?a. You shouldn't bring someone who hasn't been invited along with you to a party.b. You should help your host with the wash-up or clean-up.c. You shouldn't be very clearly different from everyone at the party.d. You shouldn't leave without showing your gratitude to your host.

V./ WRITING (2.0) Viết thư mời You are going to hold a party. You want to invite your classmates to the party. Write a letter of invitation to Huong ( about 80 words – 120 words)



IV/ Summary: V/ Homework; Prepare new lessonE/ EvaluationTime:…………………………………………………………………………………Contents:…………………………………………………………………………….Methods:……………………………………………………………………………Result:……………………………………………………………………………….

Date of preparing:..4./..10/ 2012 Period: 21UNIT4 : VOLUNTEER WORK

LESSON 1: READINGA.OBJECTIVES: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to : - Know about volunteer work well 2. Skills: reading + Speaking 3. Political thought: Talking about volunteer work in USA.B.TEACHING AIDS: 1. Teacher: lesson plan ,textbook , pen, 2. Students: pens, notebooks, textbooks… C. METHODS: T/Wh class, groupwork, pairwork D. CONTENTS:I. Organisation: (1’)


II. Warm – up:T divides the class into 2 big groups and draws each of them a gallows on the board.

Team A Team B



- T explains to Ss that they are going to play a “Hangman” game. The rule is that T gives a secret word and the groups will take turn to guess it by telling what letters they think there are in this word. If Ss choose a letter that appears on oe more times in the secret word, the letters and their positions will be revealed and Ss can keep on guessing the next letter. On the other hand, if Ss guess a letter that isn’t in the secret word, them a piece of man being hanged will be added to the gallows and they will lose their turn to the other groups. Ss will get one point for each letter they can guess correctly. When the game is over, T will count how many points each group has collected and the group with more points will win the game.- T leads the game, and in this lesson, the secret word is “volunteer”. T draws the same number of dashes as the number of letters in this word. For this word, T’d need 9 dashes like this:_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _- The activity will lead to the lesson naturally.

III./New lesson

Teacher’s activities time Students’ activitiesSTEP 1: PRE – READING1./New words:+ volunteer ( v): to do smth :Tình nguyện + volunteer (n ): tình nguyện viên + voluntary ( adj ): có tinh tình nguyện + voluntarily ( adv ): sự tình nguyện + the aged = the old: người già + participate in (v) = take part in: tham gia + remote = far away xa xôi- Ask sts to read the words after T. - Ask some sts to read the word again- Checking by R.O.R2./Opening question.- T asks the whole class to look at the picture on page 46 and asks them some questions:+ What is the old woman doing in the picture ?+ What does this mean by “Little Moments Big Magic”?+ What does the picture tell you ?- T asks Ss to work in pairs to read the short poem/saying on page 46 and

- Practice reading the new words.- Listen and repeat.- Some individuals read the words aloud

- Look at the pictures and answer the questions.* Suggested answers+ The old woman is teaching the boy to read+ The phrase means that your little contribution and help may lead to significant results/may greatly change a person’s life.+ The picture tells me that everyone, no matter what they are young or old, can do volunteer work

- Listen to their T, work in groups to discuss the meaning of the poem..



answer the question and discuss its meaning.- T calls on some Ss to present their opinion. STEP 2: WHILE - READINGTask 1:Filling each blank with an appropriate form of the word “volunteer”.: Volunteer(v/n), voluntary, voluntarily-Ask Ss to read through the sentences in task 1 carefully and identify the part of speech of the words.- Ask Ss to do the task individually and exchange their answers with others Ss.- Call on some Ss to give the answers in front of the class.

Task 2: Choosing the best answers from A, B, C, D..- Ask S to read the statements carefully in pairs. T makes sure they understand the statements.- Ask S to read the text carefully and work in pairs. – Ask Ss to underline the clues that help them give their answers.- Go around to help Ss.- Ask some pairs to give their answers. T correct their mistakes (if any) Task 3: Answering the questions- Ask S to read the questions carefully and underline the key words in each questions.- Ask S to work individually , then discuss their answers with a partner.- Call on some ss to write the answers on board.- Feedback and give correct answers: STEP 3: POST - READINGDiscussing and talking about the volunteer work..- Ask Ss to work in groups of four to discuss the following question: Why do people do volunteer work?- Ask S to work in groups to discuss the

- Read the sentences and do the task .- Exchange their answers- Give their answer*Answers: 1- voluntary 2- voluntarily 3- volunteers 4- volunteered

- Read the sentences.- Read the text and do the task orally.*Answers: 1. A 2. D 3. B 4. D 5. B

- Work in pairs to answer the questions.

*Key:1. They read books to the people there, play games with them or listen to their problems. 2. They give care and comfort to them and help them to over come their difficulties. 3. They volunteer to work in remote or mountainous areas.

- Work in groups to talk about the volunteer work.- Some sts present.



above question.- Go around to help sts.- Ask the representative of some groups to present in front of the class.

IV./ Summary: - Summarise the main pointsV./ Home work: - learn by heart all of the new words and do the extra activity as homework. - prepare next lessonE. EVELUATION:Time:…………………………………………………………………………………Contents:…………………………………………………………………………….Methods:……………………………………………………………………………Result:……………………………………………………………………………….



Date of preparing:...../......./..... Period: 22UNIT 4: VOLUNTEER WORK

LESSON 2: SPEAKINGA.OBJECTIVES: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to :

- talk about different kinds of activities related to volunteer work. 2. Skills: Speaking 3. Political thought: Talking about volunteer worksB.TEACHING AIDS: 1. Teacher: lesson plan ,textbook , pen, 2. Students: pens, notebooks, textbooks… C. METHODS: T/Wh class, groupwork, pairwork D. CONTENTS:I. Organisation (1’)

Class Date of teaching absence

II. Warm – up: matching (5’)

1 2

3

5

4 6

Taking care of children Teaching

Growing rice

Cleaning upDirecting the traffic

Visiting handicapped children

III./New lesson:(35’)Teacher’s activities time Students’ activitiesSTEP 1: PRE - SPEAKING=>TASK 1Instruction: You are required to decide which of the following activities are volunteer works.- T asks Ss to work in pairs to decide which of the activities in the book are volunteer works. Ss should also explain why a certain activity is not volunteer work.- T calls some Ss to give their answers ands for comments from other Ss.- T elicits other volunteer activities from Ss.

- Read the activities.

- Discuss in pairs.*Suggested answers:1.The activities which are not volunteer work: taking part in an excursion and participating in an English speaking club. + Reason: You take part in these activities for yourself, not to help other people.



STEP 2: WHILE - SPEAKING=>TASK 2Instruction : You are goimg to make conversations based on the given suggestions.- Before Ss do the task, T asks them to read the model conversation onpage 50. Then Ss read the list of volunteer activities and the exact things related to them.- T can elicit or explain some words quickly:+War invalid:thương binh+Martyr: (n) liệt sĩ+Intersection : ngã ba, ngã tư- T gets across to Ss that one activity in the first column can go with several activities in the 2nd column. T may require Ss to match each activity on the left with corresponding activities on the right.*Suggested answers:

Helping people in mountainous areas

- Teaching the children to read and write- Give them money

Help old and sick people

- Cleaning up their houses- Doing their shopping - Cooking meals

Helping disadvantaged or handicapped children

- Teaching the children to read and write- Listening to their problems - Playing games with them.- Taking them to places on interest

Taking care of war invalids and the families of martyrs

- Listening to their problems- cleaning up their houses.- Doing their shopping- Cooking meals

Taking part in - Directing vehicles

2. Some other volunteer activities: taking part in environmental conservation activities, donating blood, directing traffic, guiding foreign sports teams around when they go to Vietnam to compete...

- Work in pairs to read the dialogue.- Some pairs stand up to read the dialogue aloud.- Study the table and make similar dialogues in pairs.- Some pairs report:S1: What kind of voluteer work are you participating in?S2: We are helping old and sick people.S1: What exactly are you doing?S2: We are listening to their problems, cleaning up their houses, doing their shopping and cooking meals for them.S1: Do you enjoy the work?S2: Yes, I like helping people and I want to ease their life. ..............................................- Listen to the T and say out their ideas.

- Listen to the T and take note.

- Work in goups to discuss.

- Some sts present in front of the class.

- Try to make their reports interesting.

- Listen to the T carefully.



directing the traffic ar the intersections- Helping old people and young children to cross the road

- T may design a handout for this activity to help Ss talk more naturally and to lead to the next task. Ss may choose one or more activities to talk about , and they change the role after one activity.

- After Ss have finished T calls on some pairs to act out their conversation.- T elicits feedback from the class and gives final comments.STEP 3: POST - SPEAKING=>TASK 3Instruction: Now you work in groups to talk anout a kind of volunteer work your partner in the previous task do to help other people.- Before Ss do the task, T may ask Ss to read through the example in the book. T encourages Ss to use transition signals such as also, besides, moreover, etc. to make their talk more coherent.- Now Ss work in groups to talk about one activity their partner takes part in. \- T goes around to observe and collect typical errors.- T calls on some Ss to talk about the activity they take part in- T elicits feedback from the class and gives final comments.

- Ask them to read the information in the table and then work in pairs again to make similar dialogues to the model.- Allow them to work in 5 minutes.- Move round to help if necessary.- Ask some pairs to report.


- Suggest some more ideas by giving some questions: + When do you do volunteer work? + How often do you do it? ...............................................................Mai usually takes part in directing the traffic. She directs vehicles at the intersections. Besides, she helps old people and young children to cross the road. She enjoys the work very much because she likes helping people.

IV./ Summary: - Summarise the main pointsV./ Home work - prepare next lessonE. EVELUATION:Time:…………………………………………………………………………………Contents:…………………………………………………………………………….Methods:……………………………………………………………………………Result:……………………………………………………………………………….

Date of preparing:...../......./..... Period: 23



UNIT 4: VOLUNTEER WORKLESSON 3: LISTENING


- Sts know about Spring School in Ho Chi Minh City.. 2. Skills: Listening 3. Political thought: Talking about volunteer worksB.TEACHING AIDS: 1. Teacher: lesson plan ,textbook , pen, 2. Students: pens, notebooks, textbooks… C. METHODS: T/Wh class, groupwork, pairwork D. CONTENTS:I. Organisation: (1’)


II. Revision: no III. New lesson:Teacher’s activities Time Students’ activitiesSTEP1: PRE - LISTENING.1./New lesson:

• Fund-raising activies: ho¹t ®émg g©y quü

• Donation(n): vËt/tiÒn quyªn gãp

• Informal school: trêng häc kh«ng chÝnh thèng

• Organization for Education Development: tæ chøc ph¸t triÓn gi¸o dôc

• Co-operate(v): hîp t¸c• Disadvantaged children:

trÎ em thiÖt thßi• Co-ordinate(v): phèi hîp.• Sponsor(n): nhµ tµi trî

- Ask Ss to read the words in pairs.- Ask some sts to read the words again.- Ask S to look at the words in the book and read after T / the tape.- checking by R.O.R2./ Discussing the questions- T asks Ss to read through the Qs and choices on page 51 and makes sure understand all them.- T asks Ss to discuss the Qs in pairs.

8’

7’

- Copy the words and phrases.

- Listen and repeat.- Read the words in pairs and correct each other’s mistakes.- Some individuals read the words aloud

- Look at the words and read after T /the tape.

- Listen to their teacher.

- Work in pairs to read the statement.

- Listen and do the task.



- T calls on some Ss to report on their partner’s answers.STEP 2: WHILE – LISTENING

Task 1: GAP -FILLING: You are going to listen to a passage about Spring school, a special school in Ho Chi Minh City. - Ask Ss to have a look at the statements and read them in pairs and makes sure they understand the statements. - Ask sts to pay attention to the key word in each statement- Ask Ss to compare their answer in pairs.- Check sts’ answer.- Play the tape once again, stop the tape where necessary and conduct the correction.

Task 2: Answering questions - Ask Ss to work in pairs and read questions given in the textbook and makes sure they understand the questions. Sts discuss the information needed to answer the questions with each other and try to answer them.- Ask sts to listen to the talk once or twice and answer the questions. Sts are advised to note down necessary information.- Ask Ss to compare their answers. - Check sts’ answer by playing the tape/ read the dialogue once again, stop where necessary and conduct the correction.

STEP 3: POST - LISTENING- Ask Ss to work in group and use the suggestions to talk about Spring School .- Goes round to check the activities and to make sure that Ss are working effectively.- Ask one or two Ss to present in front of the whole class.- Check and give remarks.

7’

10’

10’

- Compare their answers- Give the answers.Answer: 1.informal 2. 30 street children 3. 250 children 4. 1998 5. volunteers, June

- Read the questions and discuss in pairs- Compare their answers.- Check their answer.Suggested answers : 1- It provides classes to disadvantaged children in Ho Chi Minh City. 2- Dance, theatre, singing and folk music classes were set up in 1999. 3- Because they need money to continue their English and Performance Arts classes. 4- They dance, sing, sing and play music at one of the largest hotels in Ho Chi Minh City. 5- Because they need help to contact sponsors and expand the school activities- work in groups to summarise the story about Spring School, using the suggestions. Each group member has to take notes of the discussion.- present their summary..

IV./ Summary: ( 1’) - Summarise the main pointsV./ Home work (1’) - prepare next lessonE. EVELUATION:Time:…………………………………………………………………………………Contents:…………………………………………………………………………….Methods:……………………………………………………………………………Result:……………………………………………………………………………….




LESSON 4: WRITINGA.OBJECTIVES: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to : - write a thank-you letter to a donor to acknowledge the donor’s contribution 2. Skills: Writing



3. Political thought: Talking about volunteer worksB.TEACHING AIDS: 1. Teacher: lesson plan ,textbook , pen,handouts 2. Students: pens, notebooks, textbooks… C. METHODS: T/Wh class, groupwork, pairwork D. CONTENTS:I. Organisation: (1’)


II. Warm up : Quiz – A formal letter ( 5’)(To remind Ss of some rules of writing formal letters in English)- T prepares a handout with a quiz about writing formal letters in E. The quiz consists of several incomplete statements. Ss work in groups to complete these statements as quickly as possible. The group with the quickest and most correct answers will be the winner.

Quiz1. You write your address in ...................................of the letter.2. The address of the receiver should be written on ..................,

starting below our address.3. You can write ................on the right or the left on the line after

the address you are writing to4. When letter starts Dear Sir/Madam, you end it with ..................5. When the letter starts Dear Dr Smith, you end it with ...............6. It is not a good idea to use ..........................such as I’m or

can’t

Answers: 1. the top left – hand corner 2. the left 3. the date 4. Yours sincerely 5. Yours sincerely 6. contractionsIII. New lesson : Teacher's activities time Students' activitiesSTEP1: PRE - WRITING1.New words:+ 'grateful for : (adj):rất vui lòng để.+ g'ratitude (n): rất biết ơn+ re'ceipt (n-count): hóa đơn+ co'operate with sb (v): hợp tác cùng coope'ration (n)- Read the words again and asks sts to repeat.- Ask some sts to read the words again.-Checking by R.O.R2.Underlining the sentences- Ask sts to study the letter and underline the sentences that express the

5’

10’

- Listen to the T.

- Copy the words and phrases. Listen and repeat.Some individuals read the words aloud

- Read the letter and do the task.

-- Some sts report.Answers:* The opening of the letter: sentence 1* The donated amount: sentence 1* The way(s) the money is used:sentence



points listed in the textbook.- Ask some sts to present their ideas.

STEP 2: WHILE - WRITING

+Task 2:- Ask sts to imagine that they have just received a donation of one million dong from one of the local organizations to build your school library.- Ask sts to write a letter expressing gratitude, basing on the outline they have just finished.- Suggest that sts refer to the sample letter to write.- Let sts write in 10 minutes.- Ask two sts to write on the board.- Move around to conduct the activity.

STEP 3: POST - WRITING- Ask some other sts to give remarks on the letters on the board.- Check and give the correct answer.- If there is enough time, T can have sts exchange their writing among sts within a group so that they can check their friend's work and give remarks.

15’

7’

2* The way the receipt is issued: sentence 3 * The gratitude to the donor: sentence 4* The closing of the letter: Yours faithfully

- Listen to the T.+amount: one million dong +sponsor: one of a local organisation+purpose : build your shool library+ receiver: acknowledge* Sample writing:9 Chuong Duong streetHoan Kiem DistrictHanoi 30 May 2007Dear Sir/ Madam.I’m very happy to have received a donation of one million dong from your company . Your contribution will make it possible for us to build our school library. A good library can help the Ss very much in their studying. We will issue a receipt as soon as possible.Once again thank you very much for your kindness. We hope to receive more assistance and cooperation from your company in the future.I look forward to hearing from you soon.Yours faithfully, Le thi Thanh

IV./ Summary: (1’) - Summarise the main pointsV./ Home work: (1’) - rewrite an formal letter - prepare next lessonE. EVELUATION:Time:…………………………………………………………………………………Contents:…………………………………………………………………………….Methods:……………………………………………………………………………Result:……………………………………………………………………………….


LESSON 5: LANGUAGE FOCUS 1A.OBJECTIVES: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to :

- Students know how to pronounce the sound /w/ and /j/correctly. - Students learn about: - Gerund



2. Skills: Writing+ listening 3. Political thought: Talking about volunteer worksB.TEACHING AIDS: 1. Teacher: lesson plan ,textbook , pen,handouts 2. Students: pens, notebooks, textbooks… C. METHODS: T/Wh class, groupwork, pairwork D. CONTENTS:I. Organisation: (1’)


II. Revision. NoIII. New lesson

. Teacher's activities Time Students' activitiesI. PRONUNCIATION- Introduce two sounds /w/and /j/ - Teacher models the two sounds+/w/: we, west.+/j/: yes; use1. Listen and repeat- Write two sounds on the board and pronounce them clearly twice, then ask sts to repeat. /w/ /j/ we yes west yellow wine young wheel years ............................- Tell sts how to pronounce these sounds accurately.- Ask them to look at the textbook, listen and repeat.- Ask two sts to read again and give remarks.2. practice- Ask sts to look at sentences in page 53 in the book.- Ask them to work in pairs to read the sentences and then find out the words containing sound /w/ and sound /j/.- Ask some sts to read these sentences aloud.- Listen and give remarks.II. GRAMMARStep1: presentation:

10’

10’

- Write down two sounds.- Listen to the teacher and repeat.- Look at the book , listen and repeat.


- Look at the book and work in pairs.- Answers: /w/ / j/ went York walk University railway yesterday ................................ - Read the sentences.

- Listen to the T and take note.- Give some examples



1. Gerund and Present participle.+ Gerund: -A gerund is a noun made from a verb by adding ‘-ing’. The gerund always has the same function as a noun *A gerund goes: + after prepositions: for; to; without; from; of…. +after some verbs: mind; To look forward to, to give up, t “ bo be for/ against, to take to, to put off, to keep on:+ as the complement of the verb “ to be”- Example:* She is good at learning E* They are keen on windsurfing*: her favorite hobby is reading- Ask some sts to give mor e examples- Ask sts to give some more examples.- Ask sts to do exercise 12. Present participle .- The present participle of most verbs has the form V-ing and is used in the following ways+ as part of the continuous form of a verb+ after verbs of movement/position in the pattern:verb+present participle+ verb + object+present participle+ as an adject+. verb + time/money expression+present participleexample:- I spend 2 hours doing this exercise- Don’t waste time playing computer games+ Catch/find + object+ present participle+ to replace a sentence or part of a sentence or part of a sentenceexample: Singing to himself, he walked down the road

Step 2: practice:+ Exercise 1:- Ask sts to look at Ex1 and to do the

15’


- Give more examples.-

Listen and take notes.

- Give some examples.

- Do exercise 1 individually.- Some sts report.Answers:1. hearing 2. bending 3. behaving 4. meeting 5. spending 6. waiting 7. starting



first four sentences individually and then compare their answers with other sts.- Move round to conduct the activity.- Ask some sts to report.- Listen and give remarks.+ Exercise 2- Ask Ss to do exercise 2 in pairs- Ask them to compare answers with another pair- Call on some Ss to go to the board to write their answers- Ask the other Ss to feedback and give correct answersStep 3: production:- Rewrite the sentences beginning with an appropriate participle (present,)1. When she saw the dog coming

towards her, she quickly crossed the road.

2. As I don't have a credit card, I found it difficult to book an airline ticket over the phone.

3. Keith spent a lot of time filling in job application forms because he was unemployed.

4. Because I was walking quickly, I soon caught up with her.

7’

- Listen and correct their work if necessary.- Do exercise 2 individually.- Some sts report.Answers:

1. burning/rising 2. reading 3. lying 4. shopping 5. preparing 6. trying 7. modernizing

- work in groups- some present in front of class*key:

1. Seeing the dog coming towards her, she quickly crossed the road.

2. Not having a credit card, I found it difficult to book…

3. Being unemployed, Keith spent a lot of time filling in job application forms.

4. Walking quickly, I soon caught up with her.

IV./ Summary: (1’) - Summarise the main points

V./ Home work: (1’) - prepare next lessonE. EVELUATION:Time:…………………………………………………………………………………Contents:…………………………………………………………………………….Methods:……………………………………………………………………………Result:……………………………………………………………………………….


UNIT 4: VOLUNTEER WORKLESSON 6: LANGUAGE FOCUS 2


- Students learn about: - Perfect gerund and perfect participle.



2. Skills: doing exercise 3. Political thought: practice doing exerciseB.TEACHING AIDS: 1. Teacher: lesson plan ,textbook , pen,handouts 2. Students: pens, notebooks, textbooks… C. METHODS: T/Wh class, groupwork, pairwork D. CONTENTS:I. Organisation: (1’)


II. Revision. (7’)? Rewrite the sentences beginning with present participle .1. He had spent his childhood in Oslo so he knew the city well.

=> Having spent his childhood in Oslo, he knew the city well.2. The fruit was expensive because it was imported. => Being imported, the fruit was expensive.3. We has spent nearly all our money so we couldn't afford to stay at a hotel. => Having spent nearly all our money, we couldn’t afford to stay at a hotel.4. As we didn't want to offend him, we said nothing about his paintings. => Not wanting to offend him, we said nothing about his paintings.

III./ Newlesson:

Teacher's activities Time Students' activitiesSTEP 1: PRESENTATION1. Perfect gerund: is used as the Objective of a sentence e.g: She admitted having stolen my wallet.+Form: having + PII2. Perfect participle+ Perfect participle: is used with adverbial meaning and emphasizes the first action is complete before the second one starts e.g: Having taken off his shoes, Ray walked into the a house -form: having+PII STEP 2: PRACTICE:+ Exercise 3:- Ask sts to do Ex 3 individually but because of the time limit, ask them to do the first three sentences only.- Then ask them to share the answers with their friends.- Move round to help if necessary.

15’

10’


- Give more examples.- Listen and take notes.

- Give more examples.- Listen and take notes.

- Read the task and then do it.

- Share their answers with their friends. - Listen and correct their work if necessaryAnswers :



- Ask some sts to report their answers.- Check and give remarks.

STEP 3: PRODUCTION- Rewrite the sentences replacing

the italic part with a present participle or perfect participle.

1. She was talking to her friend and forgot every thing around her.

2. Since she watch the new everyday we know what is going on in the world.

3. They are vegetarlians and don’t eat meat.

4. The boy asked his mother’s permission and then went out to play

5. As he drung to much, he didn’t drive home himself

15’

1 . having 4 . Having tied 2 . Having been 5 . Having read 3 . having been 6. having taken .

- Ask ss to work in pairs and rewrite- Exchange their answer

*key:1. Talking to her friend,.......2. Watching the new everyday,....3. Being vegetarlian,......4. Having asked his mother ‘s

permission,.....5. Having drung to much,...

IV./ Summary: - Summarise the main pointsV./ Home work: - prepare next lessonE. EVELUATION:Time:…………………………………………………………………………………Contents:…………………………………………………………………………….Methods:……………………………………………………………………………Result:……………………………………………………………………………….

Date of preparing:...../......./..... Period: 27TEST CORRECTION

A.OBJECTIVES: 1. Knowledge: After the lesson, Ss will be able to know about the common mistakes and their knowledge , from that they will know how to improve their knowledge of English



2. Skills: Speaking +reading + writing 3. Political thought: .know how to improve their knowledge of EnglishB.TEACHING AIDS: 1. Teacher:textbook ,poster.... 2. Students: pens, … C. METHODS: T/Wh class, groupwork, pairwork D.CONTENTS:I. Organisation: (1’)


II. Revision : TEST 15 MINUTES Choose the correct alternatives. Sometimes both are possible1. He insisted to pay / on paying for the meal.2. The interviewer started off to ask/ by asking me why I wanted the job.3. What am I going to do? I forgot bringing / to bring my calculus text, and I need it for

the review today.4. I can clearly recall him saying/ his saving that he was meeting 'Sarah at eight o'clock.5. Mrs Gates appreciated serving/ being served breakfast in bed when she wasn't

feeling well.6. You'd better save / to save some money for a rainy day. You can't count on rescueing/

being rescued by your parents every time you get into financial difficult.7. Waiting/ Having wai ted six months for the washing machine being delivered/ to be

delivered, I decided to cancel/ cancelling the order.8. By telephoning / In telephoning every hour, she managed to speak / speaking to the

doctor.

III. New lesson Teacher's activities Time Students' activitiesI./ LISTENING : (2.0): 0,4/ each - Ask Ss to listen and correct answer - Call Ss to write - T stops at the answer

II./ PRONUNCIATION (1.0) : 0,25/ each- Circle the word with the italic consonant sound different from that of the others in each group III/GRAMMAR, VOCABULARY, SPEAKING (2.5)Choose the correct answer

1. A2. A3. D

5’

5’

5’

- listen and correct answer • key:

1. B2. B3. C4. B5. B

- Part II. 1. C2. A3. C4. A

Part III.1. A2. A3. D4. A



4. A5. C6. B7. A8. B9. B10.A

IV./READING (2.5) . Read and choose the best answer

V./ WRITING (2.0)Correct their writing

5’

7’

5. C6. B7. A8. B9. B10.A

Part IV1. D2. C3. A4. A5. C

Part VDear Huong,

We are having a birthday party this Saturday evening at 7 p.m and my family and I would love to invite you to join us.

Most of our classmates have invited, too. There will be a lot of special foods that my mother is going to cook . Of Course, there will be dancing & some games. Please let me know if you need me to pick you up.

Cheers,

Tung

IV./ Summary: (1’) - Summarise the main pointsV./ Home work: (1’) - prepare next lessonE. EVELUATION:Time:…………………………………………………………………………………Contents:…………………………………………………………………………….Methods:……………………………………………………………………………Result:……………………………………………………………………………….

Date of preparing:...../......./..... Period: 28UNIT 6: COMPETITIONS

LESSON 1: READINGA.OBJECTIVES: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to :

- Develop such reading micro-skills as scanning for specific ideas and identifying meaning in context.



- Use the information they have read to discuss the related topic 2. Skills: Reading 3. Political thought: Talking about competitionsB.TEACHING AIDS: 1. Teacher: lesson plan ,textbook , pen,handouts 2. Students: pens, notebooks, textbooks… C. METHODS: T/Wh class, groupwork, pairwork D. CONTENTS:I. Organisation: (1’)


II. Warm – up: (5’)

* MATCHING: Match the pictures with the appropriate names.

Sao Mai Singing Contest Olympic Games The Magic Hat

London Marathon Road to Mount OlympiaWho is a Millionaire?

1. 2. 3.

6. 4. 5.

*Answers: 1. Who is a millionaire1. Quiz “Road to Mount Olypia”2. London Marathon3. Sao Mai Television singing contest4. The Magic Hat5. Olypic games

III. New lesson:Teacher’s activities Time Students’ activities



STEP 1: PRE – READING1. New words; + stimulate (a ):Khuyến khích +sponsor ( v ) It is sponsored by LG. + representative (n: người đaị diện) + observe (v ): quan sát + worksheet ( n ): a piece of paper with questions or exercises on: phiếu thi- Ask sts to read the words after T. - Ask some sts to read the word again- Checking by R.O.R2.Opening questions- T introduces the topic of the lesson and gets Ss to work in pairs and answer the questions on page 67 .- T calls on some Ss to answer the questions . T should ask Ss to give reasons for their answers . T helps Ss to express their ideas .- T elicits comments from the class asks Ss to guess what they are going to read about STEP 2: WHILE - READING=> Task 2:.Complete the table- Write the table on board and ask Ss to read the passage and fill in the information they have read from the text.Name of the competitionParticipantsOrganized byAimSponsored byCompetition’s rulesAwardsWinner

=>Task 3 : Completing the sentences- Ask Ss to read the paragraph 3 again and complete the sentences.- Ask Ss to skim the 4 questions and underline the key words to find the information in the text.- Tell Ss to check the answers with a friend.- Call on some Ss to write the answers on board.- Give the correct answers:

5’

5’

15’

7’


- Some sts answer the questions.- Look at the pictures and answer the questions

- Look at the table and listen to the T.. Then fill in the table with the information they have read.- Read the sentences and do the task .- Some Ss answer in front of the class.1. The representatives of three classes of the speaker’s school took part in the annual final English Competition last Saturday. 2. Its aim was to stimulate the spirit of learning English among students. 3. The Student’s Parent Society sponsored the competition.4. They had to complete five activities in all. On completion of each activity, they had to answer the questions in the worksheets within two minutes.5. They had to observe and score the students’ performance. Maximum score for each activity was 15. At the end of the competition they would announce the total score of each group. The group that got the highest score would be the winner. 6. The winner would be awarded a set of CDs for studying English and an Oxford Advanced Learner’s Dictionary.



STEP 3: POST – READING

- Read the poem aloud and ask Ss to repeat each line after T.- Ask Ss to practice reciting the poem in the group.- Go around and offer help.- Call on some Ss to read the poem and then translate the poem into Vietnamese.

*ANSWER:Suggested translation:Bạn có thích ngắm bầu trời đêm tốiKhi sao trời tỏa sáng long lanhCó thích không nhưng buổi sớm màu xanhNgắm mây trôi lẳng lơ trời phiêu lãngTôi thich lắm nắng sớm mai mùa hạTỏa nhiều nắng Theo bước chân taThich những khi cuộn mình nghe mưa lạnhLộp bộp rơi trên o của hiên nhà

5'- Read the text and do the task in pairs.

- Exchange their answers- Give their answer in front of the class.*Answer:1..... to recite / complete the poem because he could not remember the last sentence. 2.... became the winner of the competition. 3...... 60 points. 4....... “ For me the important thing was our participation in the competition and the enjoyment we had from it”.

- Read the poem after the T.- Work in group to read the poem and translate the poem into Vietnamese. - Some Ss present in front of the class

IV./ Summary: (1’) - Summarise the main pointsV./ Home work: (1’) - do task 1(p68) - prepare next lessonE. EVELUATION:Time:…………………………………………………………………………………Contents:…………………………………………………………………………….Methods:……………………………………………………………………………Result:……………………………………………………………………………….

Date of preparing:...../......./..... Period: 29UNIT 6: COMPETITIONS

LESSON 2: SPEAKING



A.OBJECTIVES: 1. Knowledge By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to:

- Ask for and give information about types of competitions.- Talk about a competition or contest

2. Skills: Speaking 3. Political thought: Talking about competitionsB.TEACHING AIDS: 1. Teacher: lesson plan ,textbook , pen,handouts 2. Students: pens, notebooks, textbooks… C. METHODS: T/Wh class, groupwork, pairwork D. CONTENTS:I. Organisation: (1’)


II. Warm – up: (5’) Handouts: General knowledge quiz- T delivers the handouts in which have the questions for Ss to choose the correct answers.1.Which language has the most native speaker?a. Bengali b. English c. Mandarin Chinese d. Spainish2. What is the largest country(by area) in the world that has a land border with only one other country?a. Australia b.Canada c. India d. United States3. In which country will the 2008 Olympic Games held?a. China b. Germany c. Greece d. United States4. In which country is Mount Everest?a. Tibet b. Nepal c. Findland d. Switzeland5. Which continent has the biggest population?a. Africa b. Europe c. America d. Asia answer: 1. c 2. b 3. a 4. b 5. d 6. b 7. c 8.a 9. b 10. dIII. New leson:

Teacher’s activities Time Students’ activitiesSTEP 1: PRE - SPEAKING Task 1: Put a tick- Give Ss handout: Which competitions or contests do you like or dislike? Put a tick in the right column. Compare your answers with your partner. Competitions Like DislikeGeneral knowledge QuizEnglish CompetitionArt competition ( painting, drawing, Sculpture....)Poetry Reading/ Reciting Competition

7’

- Work individually .- Some Ss give answers in front of the class.



Singing ContestAthletics Meeting ( running, Jumping ...)

- Ask sts to work individually and compare the answers with a partner.- Explain or elicit the meanings of the new words.- Move around to help sts if necessary.- Ask Ss to report their STEP 2: WHILE - SPEAKING=> Task 2: Making a dialogue.- Ask sts to work in pairs to read the sample dialogue aloud.- Elicit the structures that are used for asking for opinions and giving opinions . Write these structures on the board: Asking for opinion: What do you think about ...? How do you feel about ...? What’s your opinion about ...?Giving opinions: I think ... is/ are good/ fun / great/ wonderful/ perfect/...- work in pairs to make similar conversations.- Move round to help if necessary.- Ask some pairs to report.- Listen and give remarks.STEP 3: POST - SPEAKING=> Task 3: retell the competition which you have joined.- work in groups and choose a famous TV game / or competition / contest to talk about. - Ask Ss to use the questions in the book:- Go around to offer help.- -call Ss to present.- Listen and give remarks

20’

10’

- Work in pairs to read the dialogue.- Some pairs stand up to read the dialogue aloud.

EX:A: what do you think of the English competition?B: oh. It’s interesting. It ‘s good time to practice my English

- Listen to the T and take notes- Work in pairs to do the task.- Some sts present in front of the class.

- Work in groups to do the task.- Listen to the T carefully.- Some Ss present.Last week we enjoined a competition…………………

IV./ Summary: (1’) - Summarise the main pointsV./ Home work: (1’) - prepare next lessonE. EVELUATION:Time:…………………………………………………………………………………Contents:…………………………………………………………………………….Methods:……………………………………………………………………………Result:……………………………………………………………………………….Date of preparing: / / 2012 Period: 30

UNIT 6: COMPETITIONSLESSON 3: LISTENING

A.OBJECTIVES:



1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to:- Ss know about the Boston Marathon in the USA

2. Skills: Listening 3. Political thought: Talking about competitionsB.TEACHING AIDS: 1. Teacher: lesson plan ,textbook , pen,handouts, tape 2. Students: pens, notebooks, textbooks… C. METHODS: T/Wh class, groupwork, pairwork D. CONTENTS:I. Organisation: (1’)


II. Warm – up: (3’)- Ask Ss to look at the pictures in the textbook and answer the questions : What can you see in the picture? What event is it? - When do you think the Boston Marathon might take place ? Who can participate in it ?

- Introduce the new leson.III. New leson: Teacher’s activities Time Students’ activitiesSTEP 1: PRE - LISTENING.1.New words . + association(n): liên hợp đoàn thể + race (n ):cuộc đua + clock (v ):ghi được ( thêi gian ) + official (adj):chính thức - Read the words / plays the tape again and ask sts to repeat..- Checking by R.O.R2.T/F prediction- Ask Ss to prediction the sentences are true or false-- T runs through the sentences- Ask sts to guess the answer to each question and then tell them they need to listen attentively to check if their guesses are confirmedSTEP 2: WHILE – LISTENING1./Checking predictionInstruction: You are going to listen about the Boston Marathon. And check our prediction- Ask Ss to listen to the tape/T twice and tick the box to indicate if the statements are true or false. T may underline the words/ phrases that indicate false information.- Ask Ss to compare their answer in pairs.- Check sts’ answer.

5’

3’

1’

- Copy the words and phrases.- Listen and repeat.- Some individuals read the words aloud

- Listen to their teacher.- predict the sentences

- Listen and check prediction.- Compare their answers- Give the answers.Answer: 1. T 2. T3. F (2 hours 50 minutes and 10 seconds) 4. F (1967) 5. T6. F ( pass through 13 towns and ends in centre of



- Play the tape once again, stop the tape where necessary and conduct the correction.2./ Answering the questions

- Ask Ss to work in pairs and read questions given in the textbook and makes sure they understand the questions. Sts discuss the information needed to answer the questions with each other and try to answer them.- Ask sts to listen to the talk once or twice and answer the questions. Sts are advised to note down necessary information.- Ask Ss to compare their answers. - Check sts’ answer by playing the tape/ read the dialogue once again, stop where necessary and conduct the correction.

STEP 3: POST - LISTENING - Ask Ss to work in group and prepare a short biography of a famous Vietnam runner- Ask Ss to talk about one of them.- Go round to check the activities and to make sure that sts are working effectively.- Ask one or two sts to present in front of the whole class.- Check and give remarks.

15’

5’

Bostron)

- Read the questions and discuss in pairs.

- Listen and do the task.

- Compare their answers.- Check their answer.Suggested answers : 1- New York. 2- In 1972 3- There were 8 women. 4- 6164 runners

- Practice talking in groups.

- One/ two sts present.


Date of preparing: / / 2012 Period: 31UNIT 6: COMPETITIONS

LESSON 4: WRITINGA.OBJECTIVES: 1. Knowledge :the end of the lesson,Ss will able to: Write a letter to reply to the



request of information. 2. Skills: Writing 3. Political thought: write a famal letterB.TEACHING AIDS: 1. Teacher: lesson plan ,textbook , pen,handouts, 2. Students: pens, notebooks, textbooks… C. METHODS: T/Wh class, groupwork, pairwork I. Organisation: (1’)


II. Warm – up: (3’) Teacher's activities Students' activities

- look at the picture p.72 and tell the class :

1. what are they doing?2. have you ever taken part in an English

competition like this?3. do you like the cometition?

1. they are speaking English2. yes. I have / no. i haven’t3. yes , i do.

III. New lesson: Teacher's activities time Students' activitiesSTEP 1: PRE –WRITING1./New words:+ par'ticipant (n): people who take part in an activity+ 'entry (n): a piece of work or the answers to a set of questions, which you complete in order to take part in the competition.- pro'cedure (n):the way of doing sth.- 'venue (for an event or activity): the place where it will happen. - Read the words again and asks sts to repeat.- Ask sts to read the words in pairs.- Checking by R.O.R2. Answering the questions- Introduce the letter and ask sts to read through the letter.- Ask sts to read the letter and then answer the following questions:1. What is the requirement for the people who want to participate in the English Speaking Competition?2. What did Thu Trang want to know?- Allow them to work in 4 minutes.- Ask some sts to present their ideas.3. Introduce the situation clearly.

5’

5’

5’

Listen and repeat.- Read the words in pairs and correct each other’s mistakes.Some individuals read the words aloud

- Read the letter and answer the questions. Some sts report.1. The competition is for those who are interested in practising English with native speakers.2. She wanted to know : the number of participants, entry procedures, venue, date and time, and the phone number/ e-mail of the Language Centre.




- Ask them to study the given details.- Remind sts that this is a kind of formal letter included the following parts:+ Address of the sender.+ Date+ Beginning: Thank Thu Trang for the letter and welcome to the competition.+ Content: Provide needed information.+ Ending+ Signature.

STEP 2: WHILE - WRITING- Ask sts to write a letter to respond to Thu Trang's letter, using the given details.- Let sts write in 12 minutes.- Ask two sts to write on the board.- Move around to conduct the activity.

STEP 3: POST - WRITING.- T chooses one or two letters and reads it / them to the class.- Then T elicits corrective feedback from the class and gives final comments afterwards. T should draw Ss’ attention to the format of the letter, the organisation of ideas and language use..

12’

6

- Do the writing task.*SampleEnglish for the world106 Tran Hung Dao St, Hoan Kiem District, Hanoi

October 18, 2007Dear Thu Trang,Thank you for your interest in our English Speaking Competition. Here is the information that you request.Date and time: 8:30p.m, October 25, 2006Venue: 106 Tran Hung DaoNumber of participants: 25Entry procedure: Candidates fill an application form to participate.We encourage you to apply to participate by 4 p.m, October 20. Because this year we limit the number of participants to only 25, applications submitted late will not be considered. For further information, please contact me on 9838188 or email me at [email protected] wish you good luck at the contest and look forward to seeing you there.Best regardsKate johnsonSecretary


Date of preparing:...../......./........ Period: 32UNIT 6: COMPETITIONS

LESSON 5: LANGUAGE FOCUSA.OBJECTIVES: 1. Knowledge : - Students know how to pronounce sounds /tr/, /dr/and /tw/correctly.


mailto:[email protected]


- Students learn about: - Reported speech with gerund 2. Skills: Practise doing exercise 3. Political thought: practisingB.TEACHING AIDS: 1. Teacher: lesson plan ,textbook , pen,handouts, tape 2. Students: pens, notebooks, textbooks… C. METHODS: T/Wh class, groupwork, pairwork D. CONTENTS:I. Organisation: (1’)


II. Revision: NoIII. New lesson: Teacher's activities Time Students' activitiesI. PRONUNCIATION- Introduce sounds /tr/, /dr/ and /tw/ and help sts to practise these sounds.1. Listen and repeat:- Write three sounds on the board and pronounce them clearly twice, then ask sts to repeat. /tr/ /dr/ /tw/ traffic drive twelve troops dreadful twenty trourses drink twin ............................- Tell sts how to pronounce these sounds accurately.- Ask them to look at the textbook, listen and repeat.- Ask two sts to read again and give remarks.2. practice Ask sts to look at sentences in page 73 in the book.- Ask them to work in pairs to read the sentences and then find out the words containing sounds /tr/, /dr/ and sound /tw/.- Ask some sts to read these sentences aloud.- Listen and give remarks.

II. GRAMMAR( Reported speech with gerund.)Step 1: Presentation


- Write down three sounds.- Listen to the teacher and repeat.- Look at the book , listen and repeat.

- Look at the book and work in pairs.

- Answers: /tr/ /dr/ /tw/ travelling driving twinkletrain dress twice ................................ - Read the sentences.

- Read these examples.

-" There is another way to change



Sorry, I’m late

She apologised for being late

- If necessary, T reviews reported speech with gerund+ Form: Verb + (O) + Preposition +(NOT) V-ing(*)+ Meaning and use: We usually use a gerund structure to report thanking, apologies, accusations, and so on. We don’t use “say” in this structure.- Ask sts to look at some examples on the board:e.g: 1. " Sorry. I'm late," my student told me. => My student apologised for being late. 2. " Don't forget to buy some milk, Andy," said Clare. => Clare reminded Andy of buying some milk.- Ask sts to give remarks on the way of using reported speech in the above examples.Step 2: Practice- Ask sts to give some more examples.- Ask sts to do exercise 1+ Exercise 1:- Ask sts to look at Ex1 and to do the task individually and then compare their answers with other sts.- Move round to conduct the activity.- Ask some sts to report.

- Listen and give remarks.+ Exercise 2:- Ask sts to do Ex 2 individually but because of the time limit, ask them to do the first four sentences only.- Then ask them to share the answers with their friends.- Move round to help if necessary.- Ask two sts to write the answers on the board.

directed speech into indirected speech by using reporting verbs and gerund.

- Give some examples

- Do exercise 1 individually.

- Some sts report.Answer:

1. John congratulated us on passing our exam.

2. Mary apologised for not phoning me earlier.

3. Peter insisted on driving Linda to the station.

4. The teacher accused the boy of not paying attention to what he had said.

5. Bod has always dreamed of being rich.

6. I warned Ann against staying at the hotel near the airport.

7. Her mother prevented Jane from going out that night.

8. Miss White thanked Jack for visiting her.

- Listen and correct their work if necessary.

- Do the task individually.- Share their ideas with their friends.- Two sts write the answers on the board.

1. Tom insisted on paying for the meal.

2. Mr and Mrs Smith looked forward to meeting their chidren soon.

3. The boy denied breaking the window of the woman’s house.

4. The policeman stopped the customer from leaving the shop.

5. The thief admitted stealing



Step 3: production- work in pairs. - Report these sentences. Make any

necessary changes to verb tense, pronouns, etc.

1. 'I'd buy the big tin if 1 were you,' said the grocer.

2. 'Here are the car keys. You'd better wait in the car,' he said to her.

.3. 'Why didn't you tell me about that

yesterday, Peter?' Jane asked.

Mrs Brown’s car.6. Ann suggested having a party

the next Saturday.7. John and his wife were

thinking of buying the house.*pair work:

1. The grocer advised me to buy a big tin. .

2. He gave her the car keys and advised her to wait in the car

3. Jane asked Peter why he hadn't told/ didn't tell her about that the day before


Date of preparing:...../......./..... Period: 33REVISION

A.OBJECTIVES: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to : Revise unit 6 2. Skills: practice dong exercise



3. Political thought: revise grammar, vocabularyB.TEACHING AIDS: 1. Teacher: lesson plan ,textbook , pen, 2. Students: pens, notebooks, textbooks… C. METHODS: T/Wh class, groupwork, pairwork D. CONTENTS:I. Organisation: (1’)


II. Warm – up: noIII. New lesson: Teacher's activities Time Students' activitiesA.VOCABUALRY1./Complete these sentences with one appropriate word from the box. representatives score reciting spirit awarded worksheets

sponsored participate rules announced1. The competition's aim was to

stimulate the …….of learning English among students.

2. The competition was ……….. by the Students' Parents Society.

3. The English teacher explained the competition’s ………. to the students.

4. You will have to answer the questions on the ………within two minutes.

5. A maximum ………. for each activity is 15 points.

6. The winner will be …………a set of CDs.

7. Time was up and the judges ………. the results.

8. To …….. in the contest, you have to work in groups of three.

9. The final competition included the …………. of three classes.

10.He had difficulty ………… the poem in front of the judges.

- completeB. GRAMMAR:1. presentation-Rewiew reported speech using a to- infinitive or gerund.+ Form:

10’ - Ask ss to do the exercise- Check the answer

*key:1. spirit2. sponsored3. rules4. worksheets5. score6. awarded7. announced8. participate9. representatives10.reciting

- retell the reported speech , using a to – infinitive and gerund.



S+ Verb + (O) + Preposition +(NOT) V-ing(*)+ Meaning and use: We usually use a gerund structure to report thanking, apologies, accusations, and so on. We don’t use “say” in this structure.2. practiceExercise 1: Complete the sentences to report what was said, using a to-infinitive or an- ing form of a verb.1. 'You'd better look for a new job,

Andrew.' Jane advised ………. 2. 'It was nice of you to invite me to

your birthday party. Thanks very much.'

Mike thanked …………3. 'I'll pay for the meal.'

Sarah insisted ………………….4. 'Perhaps we can go to Paris for

the weekend.'Neil suggested

………………………….5. 'I'm sorry I couldn't come to visit

you last summer.'Kate apologized ……………

6. 'We'll organize the Christmas party.'

They promised …………….7. 'I hear you won the championship.

Congratulations!'Dane congratulated …………….

8. 'You're selfish.'Jane accused ……….

3. production:- answer the questions- T correct the answer.

1. What do you say when you was late?

2. what do you say when your friend visited you

- do the exercise

1. Jane advised Andrew to look for a new job.

2. Mike thanked me/ us for inviting him to my I our birthday party.

3. Sarah insisted on paying for the meal.

4. Neil suggested going to Paris for the weekend.

5. Kate apologized (to me/ tis) for not coming to visit me/ us last summer

6. They promised to organize the Christmas party

7. Dane congratulated me on winning the championship

8. Jane accused me of being selfish

- *key:1. I apologized for coming late.2. I thanked him for visiting me.




Date of preparing:...../......./........ Period: 34

TEST YOUR SELF BA.OBJECTIVES: 1. Knowledge : - Students know how to pronounce sounds /tr/, /dr/and /tw/correctly.

- Students learn about: - Reported speech with gerund 2. Skills: Practice doing exercises 3. Political thought: test theirselvesB.TEACHING AIDS: 1. Teacher: lesson plan ,textbook , pen,handouts, tape 2. Students: pens, notebooks, textbooks… C. METHODS: T/Wh class, groupwork, pairwork D. CONTENTS:I. Organisation: (1’)


II. Warmmer : noIII. New lesson:Teacher’s activities Time Students’activitiesI./LISTENINGListen and choose the best answer A,B,C or D.

- Before listening T runs through the statements

- Play tape two times for Ss listening

- Call Ss to give answer- Checking answer

II./READING- Ask Ss to read the questions

carefully. And then underline the key words.

- Read the text to find out the answer

- Call Ss to give answer- Check the answer

III./ GRAMMAR AND PRONUNCIATION

- Listen and tick in the right box, pay attention to the pronunciation of the underline words

IV./WRITING

- Work in groups and list the ideas of the writing

8’

9’

10’

15’

- Listen and give answer*Keys:

1.A 2. B 3.D 4.C 5.B

- Work in groups - Exchange the answer

*key:1.D2.B3.B4.C5.C

- Listen and tick *key:1. play2. drive3.twice4.proud



- Write the first draft- T corrects the mistakes

- Work in groups

*Sample:I enjoy watching TV and often speand one or two hours watching it everyday. I sometimes speand more time watching it at weekends. One of my favorite programs is “Road to Mount Olympia” it is always on from 10 o’clock to 11 o’clock on VTV3 on Sundays. I like watching it because the three competitions on each show are very intelligent. They are all advanced students from different schools. They have to answer several questions about general knowledge of natural and social sciences. Many questions are challenging for me. I am interested in watching it but I don’t think I am able to take part in the programme.


Date of preparing:...../......./........ Period: 35TEST 45 MINUTES

A.OBJECTIVES: 1. Knowledge A.OBJECTIVES: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to :

- evanluate what they have gained in unit 4 + 6 2. Skills: listening +reading +Writing + use of laguage 3. Political thought: do the test themselves.B.TEACHING AIDS: 1. Teacher: lesson plan ,textbook , pen,handouts, tape 2. Students: pens, notebooks, textbooks… C. METHODS: T/Wh class, groupwork, pairwork D. CONTENTS:I. Organisation: (1’)


II. Revision:III. New lesson: *MATRIX



Cấp độ

chủ đềNhận biết Thông hiểu

Vận dụng cộngCấp độ thấp Cấp độ cao

I. Listening Volunteer works

Listen about a passage of competition and fill in the

blankssố câu:: số điểm: Tỉ lệ %:

50,6

30%

53

30%

II.Pronunciation /Tw/ ,/j/,/w/ ,/ tr/,


40,2510%

41

10%III.Vocabulary and Grammar and speaking

-Word to talk about

competition, volunteers

work.

- perfect gerund and participle

- reported speech


30,26 %

70,2

14 %

102.0

20%

IV. Reading(Volunteer work)

-Read the paragraph

and answer the questions

- Read the paragrap

and answer the question


40.4

16%

10.44%

52.0

20%V. WritingReported speech

Choose the correct answer

-RewriteThe

sentencessố câu:: số điểm: Tỉ lệ %:

20.5

10%

20,5

10%

42

20%Tổng số câu: Tổng số điểm: Tỉ lệ %:

187.2

72 %

81.8

18%

21

10%

2810

100 %

SỞ GD & ĐT QUẢNG NINH ĐỀ KIỂM 45 phút.TRƯỜNG THPT QUẢNG LA NĂM HỌC: 2012 – 2013 MÔN HỌC: TIẾNG ANH KHỐI 11I. LISTENING: (3.0) Nge và chọn đáp án đúng nhất để hòan thành mỗi câuTrương THPT Nguyễn Văn cừ. Ngô Sách Thiệu83


1. . Spring school provides classes to…………..in Ho Chi Minh city .a. the poor b. the sick c. disadvantaged children

2. . ……………..classes were set up in 1999.a. dance, theatre,singing,and folk music b. theater and singing c.dance and singing

3. Children participate in fund-raising performances because……… a. they like music and dancing. b. they need money to continue their classes. c. they have nothing to do.4. They dance, sing and play music ………….

a. at one of the largest hotels in Ho chi Minh city. b. in the theater in Ho chi Minh city. c. at their school.5. Foreign volunteers are needed because………..

a. the school needs help to organize their fund – raising. b. the school needs to contact sponsors and help to expand the school activities. c. the school needs help to organize its events.

II-PRONUNCIATION (1pt)Chọn từ gạch chân có cách phát âm khác so với các từ còn lại

1. A. growth B. although C. third D. earth2. A. twin B. twenty C.twice D. two3. A. yellow B young C. years D. way4. A. wheel B. now C. wet D.sweet

III/ GRAMMAR, VOCABULARY, SPEAKING (2.0 pts)Chọn đáp án đúng nhất để hòan thành mỗi câu1.The transition from school to work does not happen smoothly to everyone. A. without difficulties B. full of troubles C. plenty of challenges D. with problems2. They had a really good chance of winning the national___________

A. compete B. competition C. competitor D. competitive3. The doctor advised him ......................... and to take up some sport.

A. stop smoke B. stop smoking C. to stop smoking D. to stop to smoke4. " Why don't we invite our neighbours ? " my sister said.

A. We didn't invite our neighbours because my sister didn't want it.B. My sister suggested inviting our neighboursC. My sis ter refused to invite our neighbours

D. My sister avoided inviting our neighbours5. I wouldn't..................of going to a party I hadn't been invited to.

A. dream B. intend C. depend D. rely6. He was accused of _________his ship two months ago.

A. to desert B. desert C. be deserted D. having deserted7. I warned An ______________ staying at the hotel near the airport.

A. for B. from C. away D. against8. _______ that he was poor, I offered to pay his fare.

A. Know B. Having known C. To know D. Knew9. Schools need ______ to help children to read and write.

A. volunteers B. pioneers C. engineers D. innovators

10. “You won the competition. Congratularion”Trương THPT Nguyễn Văn cừ. Ngô Sách Thiệu84


A. Mary congratulated me with winning the competition.B. Mary congratulated me about winning the competitionC. Mary congratulated me on winning the competition D. Mary congratulated me at winning the competition

IV.READING: (2.0) Đọc đoạn văn và trả lời câu hỏi Some high school students take part in helping disadvantaged or handicapped

children. They give care and comfort to them and help them to overcome their

difficulties. Young college and university students participate in helping the people who

have suffered badly in wars or natural disasters. During summer vacations, they

volunteer to work in remote or mountainous areas to provide education for children.

Volunteers believe that some of the happiest people in the world are those who help to

bring happiness to others.

1. What do some high school students do as volunteers?

2. What do they give to disadvantaged or handicapped children and help them to do?

3. Who are helped by young college and university students ?

4. Where do students volunteer to work during summer vacations?

5. What do volunteers believe ?

V. WRITING : (2.0) A. Chuyển các câu sau sang lời nói gian tiếp

1. 'It was nice of you to invite me to your birthday party. Thanks very much.'→ Mike thanked .................................................................................................

2. , 'I must have made a mistake in the calculations." Mr Forest admitted ....................................................

B. Chọn đáp đúng1. “You won the competition. Congratularions !” Mary said.

A. Mary congratulated me with winning the competition.B. Mary congratulated me about winning the competitionC. Mary congratulated me on winning the competition D. Mary congratulated me at winning the competition

2. " Why don't we invite our neighbours ? " my sister said.A. We didn't invite our neighbours because my sister didn't want it.B. My sister suggested inviting our neighboursC. My sis ter refused to invite our neighbours

D. My sister avoided inviting our neighboursIV./ Summary: V./ Home work: (1’) - prepare next lessonE. EVELUATION:Time:…………………………………………………………………………………Contents:…………………………………………………………………………….Methods:……………………………………………………………………………Result:……………………………………………………………………………….



Date of preparing:...../......./........ Period: 36UNIT 7 WORLD POPULATION

LESSON 1: READINGA.OBJECTIVES: 1. Knowledge : - Develop such reading micro-skills as scanning for specific ideas and guessing meaning in context. - Use the information they have read to discuss the topic 2. Skills: Reading about world population 3. Political thought: know about world population B.TEACHING AIDS: 1. Teacher: lesson plan ,textbook , pen,handouts, 2. Students: pens, notebooks, textbooks… C. METHODS: T/Wh class, groupwork, pairwork D. CONTENTS:I. Organisation: (1’)


II.Warm - up: Discussing the pictures (7’)

Teacher’sactivities Students’activitiesAsk Ss to look the pictures on page 80 then answer the questions:1. Where can you find these scenes?

2. What does each of the pictures tell you?3. Do you think that the larger in population a country is, the stronger it is? Why/ why not.?

- work in pairs*key: 1) we can find these scenes in the rural areas where aren’y developed.2) the first picture is about a poor crowded family and the second one is about a street market in a countryside.3. No. i don’t think so. I think the economy and policy in a country which decide the strong.

III. New lessonTeacher’s activities Time Students’ activitiesSTEP 1: PRE – READING1.New words:- To double : t¨ng gÊp ®«i - increase(v ) : t¨ng .>< decrease(v)- Birth control methods : C¸c biÖn ph¸p h¹n chÕ sinh ®Î - Family planning : KÕ ho¹ch ho¸ gia ®×nh - to raise animal (ph.): nuôi

7’ - Listen to their T and take notes.




đọng vật- figure (n) : con số- resources (n): nguồi tài nguyên- Ask sts to read the words after T. - Ask some sts to read the word again- Check ing by matching Task 1 : T/ F Statements.- Ask Ss to read through the sentences. and predict these stetments are true or false.1.......... The world population has been increasing faster and faster.2. ............ People predict that the worldpopulation will increase over 10 billions by 2015.3. ............. Our resources are unlimited4. ............ Only 20 % of the earth’s land can be used for farming and another 10 % of the earth’s land can be used for raising animals.5. ............ The international organizationshave been trying to do something todecrease the population of the world.STEP 2: WHILE – READING Task 1 : Checking prediction.- Ask Ss to read the text and check the answer .- Call on some Ss to give the answers in front of the class.- Give the correct answers: Task 2: - Ask S to read the questions carefully and underline the key words in each questions.- Ask S to work individually , then discuss their answers with a partner.- Call on some ss to write the answers on board.- Feedback and give correct answers: STEP 3: POST -READING- Ask Ss to discuss in groups 1. Do you think that VN is overpopulated?2. Which problems do we have when we are overpopulated? - Go around and offer help.- Call on some Ss to give the answers in

9’

9’

10’

Ss predict the sentences are true or false

- read the passege again and tick T/F- calll ss to give answer

*key:*key:

1. T2. F (7 billion)3. F ( limited)4. F (10% / 20%)5. T

- Read the sentences and do the task .*Keys:1. The population of the world in 10,000 B.C. was 10 million; in 1750 it was 625 million; in 1850 it was 1300 million; in 1950 it was 2510 million; in 1985 it was 4760 million; in 2000 it was 6.6 billion. 2. By the year 2015, the world of the world is expected to be over 7 billion. 3. Some scientists say it can, but others say it can’t. 4. No they don’t.5. Because they know of no safe way to have fewer children

- Discuss in groups and find out the asnwers.suggested answers: 1. yes. Exactly.

2. problems: - Poor living condition.

+Low living standards.+Shortage of school/hospital /teache r/doctor /nurses.+lack of food.+Unemployment+Social evils.+Illiteracy.



front of the classIV./ Summary: (1’) - Summarise the main pointsV./ Home work: (1’) - prepare next lesson.E. EVELUATION:Time:…………………………………………………………………………………Contents:…………………………………………………………………………….Methods:……………………………………………………………………………Result:………………………………………………………………………………. Date of preparing:...../......./........ Period: 37

UNIT 7 WORLD POPULATIONLESSON 2: SPEAKING

A.OBJECTIVES:1. Knowledge : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to talk about the problems of overpopulation and offer solutions to these problems.2. Skill: speaking3. Political thought: understand the problems of overpopulation and offer solutions.B.TEACHING AIDS:1. Teacher: lesson plan ,textbook , pen,handouts, 2. Students: pens, notebooks, textbooks… C. METHODS: T/Wh class, groupwork, pairwork D. CONTENTS:I. Organisation: (1’)


II. Warm - up: (5’)Teacher’s activities Students’activities

TASK 1:Ordering the causes of population explosion

- Before letting Ss do the task, T asks them to read through the causes provided on page 83. T makes sure that Ss understand these statements.- T gets Ss to work in pairs to order the causes and reminds them to explain their order.- T calls on some pairs to present their order and asks other pairs if they agree or disagree with their friends’ answers.

- Work individually .and oder- Some Ss give answers in front of the class

III.New lesson:Teacher’s activities time Students’ activitiesSTEP 1: PRE - SPEAKING1.New words: + awreness: hiểu biết+ Reward and punishment policy: chÝnh s¸ch thëng ph¹t + exercise (v): thùc thi / ¸p dông

5’- Listen and copy - repeat

- Listen to the T.- Copy the words and phrases.


Lesson plan grade 11 school year: 2013 - 2014 + carry out (v ): tiÕn hµnh

- Ask Ss to repeat - Call Ss to read individually- Checking by R.&R

STEP 2: WHILE – SPEAKING1. Task 2: make a list-Ask Ss to read the useful language in the book and match the words/ phrases on the left with the words on the right. Ask sts to work in pairs to do the task.- Allow them to work in 5 minutes.- Move round to help if necessary.- Ask some pairs to report.- Give comments and corrective feedback.- Listen and give remarks.2. Task 3: work in groups- Ask Ss to read Useful language.- Ask sts to work in groups of 3-4 to do the task. - Go around to offer help.- Call on some Ss to present their ideas.- Feedback and give final comments. STEP 3: POST – SPEAKING TASK 4- T reminds Ss that now they are going to give a short presentation of the problems of population explosion and the solutions to them.- T encourages Ss to use connectors to make their presentation coherent. + first / firstly, second, next+ also, besides, moreover, in addition, furthermore, + the first problem is that ...../ the next solution is that ....+ on the one hand, on the other hand, however, but ...- work in group to perform the task, T goes around to observe and provide help when necessary. T may also collect Ss’ typical mistakes and errors.

7’

15’

10’

- Work in pairs to do the task.- Some pairs stand up to present.* Suggested answers:+ Poor living condition + low living standard + not enough food + lack / shortage of schools / hospitals / teachers / doctors and nurses. + unemployment + social evils

+ Illiteracy- Listen to the T and take notes- Work in groups to do the task.* Suggested answers:A: Which solutions can you find for those problems?B: I think we should Raise the people’s living standard.

+ raise an awareness of the problems of overpopulation+ raise the people’s living standard+ exercise / implement reward and punishment policy+ carry out population education program / family planning program+ use birth control methods

- Work in groups to do the task.- Listen to the T carefully.- Some Ss present.Example:Nowadays, many countries are facing up to overpopulation-serious problem.+ The first one is shortage of food as well as low living standards. + The second one is poor living conditions.………………………………………

To solve these problem. + Firstly, We should carry out family planning programs, birth control methods. + Secondly, we exercise reward and punishment policies.…………………………………………



IV./ Summary: (1’) - Summarise the main pointsV./ Home work: (1’) - prepare next lesson.E. EVELUATION:Time:…………………………………………………………………………………Contents:…………………………………………………………………………….Methods:……………………………………………………………………………Result:………………………………………………………………………………. Date of preparing:...../......./........ Period: 38

UNIT 7 WORLD POPULATIONLESSON 3: LISTENING

A.OBJECTIVES:1. Knowledge : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to know problems of overpopulation and solutions well.2. Skill: listening3. Political thought: better at talking about the problems of overpopulation and offer solutions B.TEACHING AIDS: 1. Teacher: lesson plan ,textbook , pen,handouts, 2. Students: pens, notebooks, textbooks… C. METHODS: T/Wh class, groupwork, pairwork D. CONTENTS:I. Organisation:( 1’)

II.Warm up: (5’)Teacher’s activities Students’activities

- work in pairs: 1. which countries have the largest

population?2. What continient has the largest

population?

- Key: 1. brazil ; chine ; india; the USA;

indonesia….2. latin America

III.New lesson:Teacher’s activities Time Students’ activitiesSTEP 1: BEFORE YOU LISTEN1./New words:+)Latin America : Ch©u Mü Latinh +)the population growth rates: Tû lÖ t¨ng d©n sè +)Rank (n,v) : the position , : thø h¹ng ,XÕp h¹ng+)Fall (n) : decrease : sù gi¶m +)Generation (n ) : all the people who were born

5’ - Listen and copy - repeat

- Listen to the T.- Copy the words and phrases.

Trương THPT Nguyễn Văn cừ. Ngô Sách Thiệu


90

Lesson plan grade 11 school year: 2013 - 2014at about the same time : thÕ hÖ - Read the words / plays the tape again and ask sts to repeat.- Ask S to look at the words in the book and read after T *Checking by slap the board

STEP 2: WHILE YOU LISTEN Task 1: Multiple choice- Ask Ss to read the sentences carefully and guess the answer to each question and then tell them they need to listen attentively to check if their guesses are confirmed.- Check sts’ answer.- Play the tape once again, stop the tape where necessary and conduct the correction.

Task 2: Answering the questions- Ask Ss to work in pairs and read questions given in the textbook and makes sure they understand the questions. Sts discuss the information needed to answer the questions with each other and try to answer them.- Ask sts to listen to the talk once or twice and answer the questions. - Check sts’ answer by playing the tape/ read the dialogue once again, stop where necessary and conduct the correction.- call ss to ask and answer the questions.

STEP 3: AFTER YOU LISTEN- Ask Ss to work in group to orally summarize the main ideas - Give Ss some cues + world population today + world population by 2010 + problems caused by population explosion + solution to the problems- Ask one or two sts to present in front of the whole class.- Check and give remarks.

9’

15’

8’

- Read the questions and find out the information they need.- Listen and do the task.*Answer: 1. A 2. D 3. C 4. D 5. A 6. C

- Read the questions and answer the questions in pairs.- Check their answer.Suggested answers : 1- It will be over 7 billion. 2- The population growth rates in some parts of the world are not the same. 3- This is due to the improvement of the living conditions and medical care. 4- They are shortage of foods , lack of hospitals and schools, illiteracy and poor living conditions. 5. The experts offered 4 solutions. They are: + to educate people and make them aware of the danger of having more children. + to provide safe, inexpensive birth-control methods. + to strictly implement a family planning policy + to exercise strict and fair reward and punishment policies.



IV./ Summary: (1’) - Summarise the main pointsV./ Home work: (1’) - prepare next lesson.E. EVELUATION:Time:…………………………………………………………………………………Contents:…………………………………………………………………………….Methods:……………………………………………………………………………Result:……………………………………………………………………………….


LESSON 4: WRITINGA.OBJECTIVES:1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to read and describe the information in a chart.2. Skill :Writing3. Political thought: describe the the distribution of world population in a pie chartB.TEACHING AIDS: 1. Teacher: lesson plan ,textbook , pen,handouts, 2. Students: pens, notebooks, textbooks… C. METHODS: T/Wh class, groupwork, pairwork D. CONTENTS:I. Organisation:

II./Warm – Up: Competition – Pie chart drawing - T prepares a handout with a table of information . T divides the class into small groups of 4 students and asks Ss to work in groups to tranfer the table into a pie chart . The group with the quickest and most correct answer will be the winner The table shows the number of Ss in a class who achieved each grade Grade Number of studentsDistinction 5 Merit 8Pass 9Fail 2

Suggested Answer Student Grades Fail 8 % Distinction 21 %

Pass 38 %

Merit 33 %Trương THPT Nguyễn Văn cừ. Ngô Sách Thiệu


92


III.New lesson:Teacher’s activities Time Students’ activitiesSTEP 1: PRE – WRITINGT prepares a handout with a description of a pie chart . T asks to work in pairs to discuss the organization and other characteristics of the description . T writes the following questions on the board :1 . How many parts are there in the description ? What are they ?2 . What does the first part tell you ?3 . What information does the second part give you ?4 . What language items should you pay attention to in the second part ? Underline them .5 . What does the last part tell you ?

Dried Other 5 % Uses of Apples,USA 3 % Frozen 2% Canned Fresh Fruit 12 % 60 % Juice 18 %

The graph shows the chief of the apple crop in the US . Overall , the bulk of the harvest in either eaten fresh or made into juice .The biggest sline of the pie – chart is taken up by fresh fruit . About 60% of the crop is eaten fresh . This is three time as much as the next use , which is for juice . Less than 20% of apples in the US are turned into apple juice . A further 12% is canned , and a total of 5 % is either frozen or dried . Other remaining uses , such as apple vinegar , accout for just 5% of the crop .It’s clear that although a small amount of apple are processed onto frozen , dried or canned products most of the crop is sold straight from the tree

- T elicists the answers from the whole

- Listen to the Teacher- Take notes

- Answer the questions

- key:1. The pie chart shows the

distribution of the wold population by rebion

2. more than half of the world’s population lives in South and East Asia

3. South Asia is the biggest region , making up 32% of the world population

4. Oceania is the least populated region with the smallest percentage of 2%.



class , focusing on the remarkable characteristics of the decription* Useful languages- it can be seen that- distributed unevenly- account for … percent- more than double the population of………………………………………….STEP 2: WHILE – WRITING- Before Ss descibe the pie chart on page 86 , T asks them to work in pairs to analyse the chart , focusing on the following questions :+ What does the pie chart show ?+ Which region has the biggest/ smallest population ?+ Where does most of the wold population live ?- T checks the answers with the whole class - Then Ss work individual to wtite the description of the pie chart , using the sentence given in the book to bigin their description .- T goes aroud to observe and offer help

STEP 3: POST – WRITING- T asks Ss to exchange their writing with another student for peer correction.- T goes aroud and collects mistakes and errors .- T collects some writing for quick feedback - T writes Ss typical erronrs on the board and elicits self and peer correction . - Finally , T provides general comments on the writings

- Work in groups of 4 - Prepare for writing

* Sample writing

The pie chart shows the distribution of the wold population by rebion . Overall , more than half of the world’s population lives in South and East Asia .South Asia is the biggest region , making up 32% of the world population . The second largest area is East Asia with 6% less than South Asia . Europe ranks third with 15% . Coming next is Africa with 11% . Together , Latin America and North America have 14% of the wold population . Finally , Oceania is the least populated region with the smallest percentage of 2%.As can be seen , the greatest concentration of the world’s population is in Asia , with Europe far behind .





LESSON 5: LANGUAGE FOCUS 1A.OBJECTIVES: 1. Knowledge : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to - Distinguish the clusters / kl / , /gl / , /kr/ , /gr / and /kw / - Pronouce the words and dialogue cotaining these clusters correctly - Use coditional sentences types 1 , 2 and 3 2. Skills:Writing + listening 3. Political thought: doing exerciseB.TEACHING AIDS: 1. Teacher: lesson plan ,textbook , pen,handouts, 2. Students: pens, notebooks, textbooks… C. METHODS: T/Wh class, groupwork, pairwork D. CONTENTS:

I. Organisation:

II. Warm – Up:- look at the picture and find out the pronunciation

Queen glass ice –cream glassIII.New lesson:Teacher’s activities Time Students’ activitiesI/ PRONUNCIATION1./Listen and repeat- T models the clusters / kl/, /gl/ ,/gr/ ,and /kw/ for a few times and explains how to produre /k/ first and then quickly switch



95


on to listen - T plays the tape once for Ss to hear the words containign these clusters . - T asks Ss to read the words in each column out loud in chorus for a few more times. Then T calls on some Ss to read the words out loud. 2./ practice- T asks Ss to work in pairs and take turn to read aloud the given dialogue on page 87.- T goes around to listen and takes notes of the typical errors- T calls on some Ss to read the dialogue again and provides corrective feedback. II/GRAMMAR1 . Revision of condotional sentences STEP 1: PRESENTATION - T elicits the from and use of coditional sentences (type 1, 2 and 3 ) from Ss . If necessary T may give Ss the following handout Type Form Use 1 If +

simple present , will future

In these sentences , the times is the present or future and the situation is real . They refer to a possible condition and its probable result Example :+ If find her address , I’ll send her an invitation

2 If + simple past , would + infinitive

- not true in present Example :+ If I were 18 again I would go on a round the world tour . (I’m not 18 , in fact I’m 45 )

3 If +past prefect , would have + P2

- not true in the past .Exmple :+ If I had studied , I would have passed the exams

STEP 2: PRACTICE


- Write down two sounds.- Listen to the teacher and repeat.- Look at the book , listen and repeat. - Read these words in pairs and check for their partners.

- Look at the book and work in pairs.- Read the sentences.

- Listen to the T.

- Do exercise 1 individually.- Some sts report.1 . would drive 4 . will take 2 . could 5 . closed 3 , is 6. Willcome - Listen and correct their work if necessary.



Execise 1 - T asks Ss to do exercise 1 individual and then compare their answers with another student .- T calls on some Ss to read out their answers .- T give correct answers :Exercise 2 - T asks Ss to do exercise 2 in pair and then compare answers with another pair .- T calls on some Ss to go the board to write their answers .- T asks other Ss to feedbak and gives correct answers :STEP 3: PRODUCTIONUsing the given information, make conditional sentences. Use if.1. If i have a lot of money,…………2. If i studied hard, ……………………3. If it hadn’t rained yesterday ,………..

Read the examples and tell the whole class their ideas.

- Do the task and then some sts report. 1 . had been told 2 . hard realised 3 . wouldn’t have been 4.Would have bought 5 . had studied

- work in groups- write conditional types 1,2,3start with …..



UNIT 7 WORLD POPULATIONLESSON 6: LANGUAGE FOCUS 2

A.OBJECTIVES: 1. Knowledge : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to - Use conditional sentances in reported speech appropriately 2. Skills: practicing 3. Political thought: like doing exxerciseB.TEACHING AIDS: 1. Teacher: lesson plan ,textbook , pen,handouts, 2. Students: pens, notebooks, textbooks… C. METHODS: T/Wh class, groupwork, pairwork D. CONTENTS:

I. Organisation:



97


II/ Revision (5’) . Rewrite the sentences using conditional types,2,34. Carol didn’t answer the phone because she was studying.

If Carol hadn't been studying she would have answered the phone.5. I feel better now because you talked to me about my problems yesterday.

I wouldn't fee] better now if you hadn't talked to me about my problems yesterday.6. Because I don't have enough free time, I can't help my mother with the housework.

If I had more free time I could help my mother with the housework.7. Rita is exhausted today because she didn't get any sleep last night.

Rita wouldn't be exhausted today if she had gotten some sleep last night.8. I don't want them to be upset, so I've decided not to tell them what happened.

They would be upset if I told them what happened.III. New lesson: Teacher’s activities Time Students’ activitiesSTEP 1: PRESENTATION Conditional in reported speech

- T elicits the comments from Ss and makes clear that + Coditional type 1 : we must change as usual (changes of verb tenses ,pronouns , adverbs of time and place ...)+ Conditional type 2 and 3 : we do not change the verb tenses , but we follow the rules to change pronouns , adverbs of time and place ...STEP 2: PRACTICEExrcise 3 change the following conditional sentences into reported speech - T asks Ss to do exrcise individual . Ss have to change the conditional sentences into reported

9’

- listen and copy

- make example

- Do the task and then some sts report.*Keys:1 . The man said to to her (that ) he would come to see her if he had time 2 . He asked her what she would say if someone stepped on er feet .3 . They said to me (that ) if it didn’t rain they would go out with me .4 . The man asked the woman what she would do if she were


TYPECONDITIONAL

IN DIRECT SPEECH

CONDITIONAL IN INDIRECT

SPEECH

1

If clause

S + V/ V-s/es S + V-ed/ V2

Main clause

S + will/ can+ V-inf

S + would /could+ V-inf

2

If clause

S + V-ed/ V2 S + V-ed/ V2

Main clause

S + would/ could + V-inf

S + would/ could + V-inf

3

If clause

S + had + P.P S + had + P.P

Main clause

S + would /could + have + P.P

S + would / could + have + P.P


speech .- T asks them to compare answers with another student .- T calls on some Ss to go to the boad to write their sentences Exercise 4: turn these sentences into direct speech1. Tom said to me that if he had spare time , he

would go fishing with me2. the teacher told us that if it rained the following

day, we wouldn’t go for picnic3. his parents said that if he didn’t study harder, he

would fail the exam4. Peter said that if you went to the party, you would

have a lot of fun5. my sister said that if I needed help , she would be

willing to help me with the difficult exercisesWork individually*key:

1. Tom said to me, ”If I have spare time, I will go fishing with you”.2. The teacher told us, “If it rains tomorrow, we can’t go for a picnic.”3. “Unless you study harder, you will fail the exam”, said his parents.4. “If she goes to the party, she will have a lot of fun.”, said Peter.5. “If you need help, I will be willing to help you with the difficult exercises”, my sister said.

STEP 3: PRODUCTION- call Ss to recall the form and the meaning of indirected speech.

10’

10’

billionaire .5 . The man said to me (that ) if I had asked him he would have lent me his motorbike .6 . The man said to his daughter (that ) they would be very disappointed if she did not come .7 The boy said to the girl (that ) ha was sure they would understand if she explained the situation to them




Date of preparing:...../......./..... Period: 42REVISION

A.OBJECTIVES: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to : Revision unit 7 2. Skills: practice dong exercise 3. Political thought: revision grammar, vocabularyB.TEACHING AIDS: 1. Teacher: lesson plan ,textbook , pen, 2. Students: pens, notebooks, textbooks… C. METHODS: T/Wh class, groupwork, pairwork D. CONTENTS:I. Organisation:

II.Revision : Test 15 munitesChoose the one word or phrase - a, b, c, or d - that best completes the sentences.1. ______ more information, please telephone our main office.

a. If you will need b. Should you needc. You should need d. If you needed

2. It's time governments ______ something to limit population growth.a. do b. did c. have done d. will do

3. I'd really like to do accounting. If only I ______ so poor at maths.a. am not b. weren't c. hadn't been d. wouldn't be

4. She wouldn't have gone to university ______.a. if her parents had insisted c. unless her parents had insistedb. were her parents not insisted d. only if her parents hadn't insisted

5. John said if he ______ any money he me a drink. a. has - will buy b. had - would have boughtc. has had - would buy d. had had - would have bought



100


6. If it ______ more humid in the desert of the Southwest, the hot temperature would be unbearable.a. is b. would be c. were d. had been

7. If it keeps on raining, the basketball game ought ______.a. to postpone b. to be postponed c. postpone d. be postponed

8. Only if you get the theater early ______ a chance to get a ticket for tonight's performance.a. you will have b. have c. you have d. will you have

9. If she ______ sick, she would have gone out with me to the party.a. hasn't been b. wasn't c. weren't d. hadn't been

10.______ been diverted, they would have arrived early.a. Had the plane not b. Hadn't the planec. The plane had not d. The plane not had

III.New lesson

Teacher’s activities Time Students’ activitiesA. VOCABULARYExercise 1: Complete each of the sentences with the correct form of the verb in the box.

increase expect decrease reach limit

raise control populate support freeze

1. North America was once widely ….by Native American tribes.

2. The world's population is …..to be over 7 billion by 2010.

3. The population has ……from 1.2 million to 1.8 million.

4. Parents should……. what their kids watch on television.

5. The number of new students ……from 210 to 160 this year.

6. The role that women could play was socially ….

- call Ss to write thr corect answer .B: GRAMMAR:

1. conditional types 1,2,3- call Ss to recall - write the form.2. Practice

Exercise 1: Underline the best answers.1. If you have left/ left home before I get

there, I will/ would meet you at the airport.

- read the sentences- complete the sentences*Key:1. populated2. expected3. increased4. control5. decreased6. limitted.

- Recall the conditional types 1,2,3- reported speech.

- work in dividually*key:

1. have left / will 2. would / left



2. How will/ would your father react if you leave/ left school?

3. If you will go/ go to England next month, you will/ must drive on the left.

4. Were/ Was I your doctor, I'd insist that you stop smoking.

5. You may/ might be sorry if you spend/ spent all your money.

6. Will/ Can I use your computer, if I am/ were careful?

7. Will/ Would people be able to fly if they have/ had feathers instead of hair?

8. If anyone should/ might call, would you please take a message?

Exercise 2: Put the verb into the correct form.

1. If the earth suddenly .(stop) spinning we all …..(fly) off it.

2. If you ……….(smoke) in a non-smoking compartment the other passengers …..(object).

3. …… (your parents/ not/ be) proud if they could see you now?

4. If she ……….(not/ fail) one of her final exams she wouldn't have had to spend part of the summer in college.

5. I’ll lend you War and Peace if I …….(finish) it before you go on holiday.

6. If we ……(work) all night we (finish) in time; but we have no intention of working all night.

3. go/ must4. were 5. might / spent6. can/ am7. would / had8. should

- *key1. stoped / would fly 2. smoke / will object 3. Wouldn’t your

parents be4. hadn’t failed 5. have finished 6. worked/ would finish




Date of preparing:...../......./..... Period:43TEST CORRECTION

A.OBJECTIVES: 1. Knowledge: After the lesson, Ss will be able to know about the common mistakes and their knowledge , from that they will know how to improve their knowledge of English 2. Skills: crrect mistakes 3. Political thought: redone the testB.TEACHING AIDS: 1. Teacher:textbook ,poster.... 2. Students: pens, … C. METHODS: T/Wh class, groupwork, pairwork D. CONTENTS:I. Organisation:

II.Warm up:

- greeting- - Ask Ss some questions

III. New lesson

I./ LISTENING : 3.0: 0,6/ each Nghe và chọn a,b,c1. c 2a 3b 4a 5b

VOLUNTEER WORKSpring School is an informal school. It provides classes to advantaged children in HCM

City. Around 30 street children live and study at the school and about 250 children with special difficulties from District 1 regularly attend classes.



103

Lesson plan grade 11 school year: 2013 - 2014The Organisation for educational development co-operated with Spring School to set up

English classes in 1998. Dane, theatre, singing and folk music classes were set up a year later. Children from these classes participate in fundraising performances. They raise money to continue their English and Performance Arts classes.

Spring School requires volunteers to help organise their fundraising dinner held annually in June. This is an exciting night in which children dance, sing and play music at one of the largest hotels in HCM City. They also need foreign volunteers to contact sponsors and help to expand the school activities. Volunteers are required from February until July to help organise these events.

It is hoped that more schools like Spring School will soon be found in other cities in Vietnam.

II./ PRONUNCIATION (1pt) : 0,25/ eachChọn từ gạch chân có cách phát âm khác so với các từ còn lại1. b 2d 3d 4b

III/ GRAMMAR, VOCABULARY, SPEAKING (2,5 pts)Chọn đáp án đúng nhất để hòan thành mỗi câu1. a 2b 3c 4b 5a 6d 7d 8b 9a 10c

IV./READING (2,5 pts) .1. They take part in helping disadvantaged or handicapped children.2. They give care and comfort to them and help them to overcome their difficulties.3. the people who have suffered badly in wars or natural disasters4. During summer vacations, they volunteer to work in remote or mountainous areas

to provide education for children5. Volunteers believe that some of the happiest people in the world are those who

help to bring happiness to othersV/ WRITING : Chuyển các câu sau sang lời nói gian tiếp

A. 0.5/ each

1. Mike thanked (me )for inviting him to my birthday party.

2. Mr. forest admitted having made a mistake in the calculations.

B. 0,5/ each

1.c 2.b

IV./ Summary: (1’) - Summarise the main pointsV./ Home work: (1’) - prepare next lessonE. EVELUATION:Time:…………………………………………………………………………………Contents:…………………………………………………………………………….Methods:……………………………………………………………………………Result:……………………………………………………………………………….* Result:



Class Students Mark 9, 10

7, 8 5, 6 3,4 0,1,2 > TB

11A1

11A2

Date of preparing:...../......./........ Period: 44REVISION

A.OBJECTIVES: 1. Knowledge : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to: -Students revise some verb tenses. 2. Skills: writing 3. Political thought: Students revise some verb tenses. B.TEACHING AIDS: 1. Teacher: lesson plan ,textbook , pen,handouts, cassette 2. Students: pens, notebooks, textbooks… C. METHODS: T/Wh class, groupwork, pairwork D. CONTENTS:I. Organisation:

class Date of teaching absent

II.Revision:III. New lesson:A. GRAMMAR:. Revising some present tenses:- Tell sts that present tenses can be used to retell a story happening in the past to make the story more immediate and more vivid

+ The past simple:Form: (+) S + V-ed/ V(irregular) ................ (-) S + did not + V ........................



(?) Did + S + V ...........................?Use: an event/ activity happened at one particular time in the past.+ The past progressive:Form: (+) S + was/were + V-ing.......... (-) S + was/ were + not + V-ing ....... (?) Was/ Were + S + V-ing ........?Use: An event/ activity was in progress at a particular time in the past.+ The past perfect:Form: (+) S + had + PII ................. (-) S + had + not + PII ........ (?) Had + S + PII ...............?Use: An event/ activity took place and was completed before another activity or time in the past.B. PRACTICEII. Complete the passage with the correct verb form.

(1) Have you ever been (you/ ever/ be) in a cable car? Well I have. Last February, I (2) went (go) on a ski strip to Switzerland. What a trip! The first morning, I (3) got (get) into a cable car. I (4) wanted (want) to go to the top of the mountain and (5) ski. The cable car (6) started (start) up the mountain. I (7) looked (look) down, and it was so beautiful. Then there (8) was terrible noise. Suddenly the car (9) stopped (stop). It (10) didn’t move (not move), and there was quiet everywhere.

It was cold, and it (11) began (begin) to get dark and snow. I (12) was (be) alone for one hour, two hours. I thought, "They (13) have forgotten (forgot) me!" At last the car started back down the mountain. It went very fast. "Sorry" a man said when I (l4) climbed (climb) out of the car. "We (15) have never had (never/ have) this problem before. Please, try again tomorrow." "He (16) is joking (joke)," I thought. "I (17) have had (have) enough of cable car for a lifetime."III. Complete the sentence using these pair of verbs. Use the past simple or past

progressive. come - show; get - go; break - ski; live - spend; look- see; look - slip; start - check in; add - taste; go off - light; not listen - explain; push - run; write - drive; shut - start; come - put; take - place .

1. The smoke alarm went off when he lit neath it.2. Just as I was getting into the bath all the light went off.3. When I was living/ lived in Paris, I spent three hours a day traveling to and from

work. 4. She added more salt to the soup, and then it tasted much better.5. Helen broke her leg while she was skiing in Switzerland.6. When the taxi came I put my suitcase on the back seat.7. A friendly American couple started chatting to him as he was checking in at the hotel

reception.8. I bumped into Mary last week. She was looking a lot better than when I last for her.9. It was an amazing coincidence. Just as I was writing to Anne, she was driving to my

house to come and see me10.I shut the windows as soon as it started to rain. 11.My boss came into the office just as I was showing everyone my holiday photos.12.He took the cake out of the oven and placed it carefully on the table13.When his mother was looking in the other direction Steve slipped away quietly.



14.She pushed open the door and ran into the room.15.I can't remember how to answer this question. I must confess that I didn’t listen/

wasn’t listening while the teacher was explaining it to us.IV. Complete these sentences using the verb given. Use the past simple or the past

perfect.1. As Geoff was introduced to Mrs Snape, he realized (realize) that he had met (meet)

her before.2. During the previous week, I went (go) to the gym every morning.3. By the time I got (get) back to the bathroom, the bath had overflowed (overflow). 4. The boy told me that he had lost (lose) his train ticket and didn’t know (not/ know)

how he would get home. 5. I was just about to leave when I remembered (remember) my briefcase.6. She walked (walk) into the station only to find that the train had left (leave).7. At the conference, scientists reported that they had found (find) a cure for Malaria.8. On my last visit to Wixton I found (find) that the village hadn’t changed (not

change) much.9. In a surprise move, the Prime Minister resigned (resign) last night.10.Jane didn't want any dinner. She had eaten (eat) already.11.When she came (come) into the hall, everyone started (start) cheering.12.After they had eaten/ ate (eat) all the food, they picked (pick) up their bags and left.13.I thought I would get to the restaurant first, but Jim had arrived (arrive) before me.14.By the time I got (get) to the party, most people had gone (go) home.

IV/ Summary: V/ Homework ; Prepare new lessonE/ Evaluation………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

Date of preparing: period : 45REVISION


- Students learn about: - Gerund - Perfect gerund and perfect participle 2. Skills: Writing+ listening 3. Political thought: Talking about volunteer worksB.TEACHING AIDS: 1. Teacher: lesson plan ,textbook , pen,handouts 2. Students: pens, notebooks, textbooks… C. METHODS: T/Wh class, groupwork, pairwork D. CONTENTS:I. OrganizationII. Warm up:



III. New lesson:1. Gerund and Present participle.+ Gerund: -A gerund is a noun made from a verb by adding ‘-ing’. The gerund always has the same function as a noun *A gerund goes: + after prepositions: for; to; without; from; of…. +after some verbs: mind; To look forward to, to give up, t “ bo be for/ against, to take to, to put off, to keep on:+ as the complement of the verb “ to be”- Example:* She is good at learning E* They are keen on windsurfing*: her favorite hobby is reading1.Present participle+ as part of the continuous form of a verb.+after a verb of movement/ position every day.+ as an adjective+after verb of perception in the pattern: verb +object +present participle+ after the verb: waste; spend; catch; find+ to replace a sentence or part of sentenceExample:

• I am working• He came running torwards me• It was an interesting film• I can smell something burning• They ‘ve spent 3$ buying that watch• Feeling tired, he went to bed early.

2. Perfect gerund and Perfect participle.+ Perfect gerund: is used as the Objective of a sentence e.g: She admitted having stolen my wallet. O+ Perfect participle: is used with adverbial meaning and emphasizes the first action is complete before the second one starts e.g: Having taken off his shoes, Ray walked into the a house.

A. EXERCISEExercise 1: Choose the correct answer.1. ______ for twelve hours, I felt marvelous.

a. Having slept b. have sleptc. Having been slept d. have been slept

2. By the time their baby arrives, the Johnson hope ______ painting and decorating the new nursery.a. having finished b. to have finishedc. having been finished d. to have been finished

3. She's angry about ______ to the farewell party last night.



a. not having invited b. not to have invitedc. not having been invited d. not to have been invited

4. We decided not to travel, ______ the terrible weather forecast.a. having heard b. to have heardc. having been heard d. to have been heard

5. I'd love ______ to the party, but it was impossible.a. having gone b. to have goneb. having been gone d. to have been gone

6. I don't recall ______ him at the conference.a. having seen b. to have seen c. having been seen d. to have been seen

7. ______ in dark colors, the room needed some bright lights.a. Having painted b. To have paintedc. Having been painted d. To have been painted

8. The stockbroker denied ______ of the secret business deal.a. having informed b. to have informedc. having been informed d. to have been informed

9. They now regret ______ their son by providing too many material possessions.a. having spoiled b. to have spoiledc. having been spoiled d. to have been spoiled

10.______ to the party, we could hardly refuse to go. a. Having invited b. To have invitedc. Having been invited d. To have been invited

11.Tom made a bad mistake at work, but his boss didn't fire him. He's lucky ______ a second chance.a. having given b. to have givenc. having been given d. to have been given

12.Are you sure you told me? I don't recall ______ about it.a. having told b. to have told c. having been told d. to have been told

Exercise: Complete the sentences with the correct form of the verbs in brackets.

1. The missing children were last seen playing (play) near the river.2. Having completed (complete) the book, he had a holiday.3. Found (find) only in the Andes, the plant is used by local people to treat skin

diseases. 4. The accident seems to have happened (happen) at around 1.00 p.m yesterday.5. Do something! Don't just sit there twiddling (twiddle) your thumbs.6. Last year I studied abroad. I appreciate having had (have) the opportunity to live and

study in a foreign country. . 7. Looking (look) down from the hill, the town spread out before us towards the coast. 8. Marta doesn't like to have her picture taken (take). She avoids being photographed

(photograph).9. I don't agree with smacking (smack) children if they do something wrong.10.The book published (publish) last week is his first novel.11.Having photocopied (photocopy) all the papers, Sarah put them back in the file.12.I found a coin lying (lie) on the sidewalk.13.Our mechanic said that he expects to have fixed (fix) the brake on the car before we

pick it up.



14.Life must be unpleasant for people living (live) near busy airports.15.Having parked/ Parking (park) the car about a kilometre from the stadium, I walked

the rest of the way.IV/ Summary: V/ Homework ; Prepare new lessonE/ Evaluation………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

Date of preparing: period : 46REVISION


Students learn about: - Reported speech with gerund 2. Skills: doing exercise 3. Political thought: practice doing exerciseB.TEACHING AIDS:



1. Teacher: lesson plan ,textbook , pen,handouts 2. Students: pens, notebooks, textbooks… C. METHODS: T/Wh class, groupwork, pairwork D.CONTENTS:I. Organisation:

class Date of teaching absence

I. Warm up; noII. New lesson:

A.PRESENTATION: - If necessary, T reviews reported speech with gerund+ Form: Verb + (O) + Preposition +(NOT) V-ing(*)+ Meaning and use: We usually use a gerund structure to report thanking, apologies, accusations, and so on. We don’t use “say” in this structure.E.g: I apologised the teacher for submitting my assignment late. We thank you for having helped us generously. Note:- Some verbs don’t need a preposition, e.g. stop, deny,admit,suggest,and so on.- T might want to remind Ss that time and place references often have to change in reported speech. E.g:- Ask sts to look at some examples on the board:e.g: 1. " Sorry. I'm late," my student told me. => My student apologised for being late. 2. " Don't forget to buy some milk, Andy," said Clare. => Clare reminded Andy of buying some milk.- Ask sts to give remarks on the way of using reported speech in the above examplesB. EXERCISE:Exercise 1: Complete the sentences to report what was said, using a to-infinitive or an- ing form of a verb.1. 'You'd better look for a new job, Andrew.'

Jane advised Andrew to look for a new job. 2. 'It was nice of you to invite me to your birthday party. Thanks very much.'

Mike thanked me/ us for inviting him to my I our birthday party. 3. 3, 'I must have made a mistake in the calculations."

Mr Forest admitted making/ having made a mistake in the calculations.4. 'I'll pay for the meal.'

Sarah insisted on paying for the meal.5. 'Perhaps we can go to Paris for the weekend.'

Neil suggested going to Paris for the weekend.6. 'I can get you there in good time.'

Jim guaranteed to get me/ us there in good time.7. 'I'm sorry I couldn't come to visit you last summer.'

Kate apologized (to me/ tis) for not coming to visit me/ us last summer.8. 'We'll organize the Christmas party.'

They promised to organize the Christmas party.



9. 'I hear you won the championship. Congratulations!'Dane congratulated me on winning the championship.

10.'I wish I'd asked for his name and address.'I regretted not asking/ having asked for his name and address.

Exercise 2: Report these sentences. Make any necessary changes to verb tense, pronouns, etc.11.'We have found the missing girl,' said the police last night.

Last night, the police said (that) they had found the missing girl.12.'I'll drop you from the team if you don't train harder,' said the captain.

The captain threatened to drop me! us from the team if I / we didn't train harder.13.'I'd buy the big tin if 1 were you,' said the grocer.

The grocer advised me to buy a big tin. .14.'Here are the car keys. You'd better wait in the car,' he said to her.

He gave her the car keys and advised her to wait in the car.15.'Why didn't you tell me about that yesterday, Peter?' Jane asked.

Jane asked Peter why he hadn't told/ didn't tell her about that the day before.16.'Would you please wait in the lounge till your flight number is called?' she said.

She asked me to wait in the lounge till my flight number was called.17.'1 gave you my textbook last week. 1 insist,' Tom said

Tom insisted on giving me his textbook the week before.18.'Could you speak more slowly, please? 1 can't understand,' he said to me.

He asked me to speak more slowly because he couldn't understand.19.'I hope you have a good journey,' he said, 'Don't forget to send a card when you

arrive.'He wished me a good jouney and reminded me to send a card when I arrived/ had arrived.

20.'I'm sorry 1 didn't phone you earlier. I was very busy,' Jill said to me.Jill apologized for not phoning me earlie'r and explained that he was/ had been very busy.

21.'It's not true! I have never been arrested!' Larry said.Larry denied ever having been arrested.

IV/ Summary: summarise the main pointsV/ Homework; Prepare new lessonE/ Evaluation…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………



Date of prepareing: Period:47 REVISION


Students learn about: - Reported speech with gerund 2. Skills: doing exercise 3. Political thought: practice doing exerciseB.TEACHING AIDS: 1. Teacher: lesson plan ,textbook , pen,handouts 2. Students: pens, notebooks, textbooks… C. METHODS: T/Wh class, groupwork, pairwork B. CONTENTS:I.Organisation:


II. Warm up: noIII. New lesson:A. PRESENTATION:- T elicits the from and use of coditional sentences (type 1, 2 and 3 ) from Ss . If necessary T may give Ss the following handout Type Form Use 1 If + simple

present , will future

In these sentences , the times is the present or future and the situation is real . They refer to a possible condition and its probable result Example :+ If find her address , I’ll send her an invitation +If I run , I’ll get there in time

2 If + simple past , would + infinitive

Like type 1 , type 2 refers to the present of future , and the past tense in the if – clause is not a true past but a subjuntive , which indicates unreality or improbability .Example :+ If I were 18 again I would go on a round – the –world – tour . (I’m not 18 , in fact I’m 45 )+ If I studied , I would pass the exams

3 If +past prefect , would have +

The time is past , and the condition cannot be fulfilled because the action in the if – clause didn’t happen .



P2 Exmple :+ If I had found her address last week , I would have sent her an invitation .+ If I had studied , I would have passed the exams

B. Conditional in reported speech- T writes some conditional sentences in reported speech on the board and asks Ss to comment on the changes of the verbs , pronouns and adverbs of time and placesExamples: 1. “ If I hears any news, I will let you know”, she said.

->She said that if she heard any news she would let me know2. “If it didn’t rain, I would go out”, Minh said.

=> Minh said that if it didn’t rain he would go out the night before.3. “ If it hadn’t rained, I would have gone out last night”

Minh said that if it hadn’t rained he would have gone out the night before.- T elicits the comments from Ss and makes clear that + Coditional type 1 : we apple all the necssary changes as usual (changes of verb tenses ,pronouns , adverbs of time and place ...)+ Conditional type 2 and 3 : we do not change the verb tenses , but we follow the rules to change pronouns , adverbs of time and place ...

B. EXERCISE:

Exercise 1:Put the verb into the correct form.9. If the earth suddenly stoped (stop) spinning we all would fly (fly) off it.10. If you smoke (smoke) in a non-smoking compartment the other passengers will/

may object (object).11. Wouldn’t your parents be (your parents/ not/ be) proud if they could see you now?12. If she hadn’t failed (not/ fail) one of her final exams she wouldn't have had to spend

part of the summer in college.13. I’ll lend you War and Peace if I have finished (finish) it before you go on holiday.14. If we worked (work) all night we could/ would finish (finish) in time; but we have

no intention of working all night.15. If you had worked harder, you would have passed (pass) your final exam.16. If you want to learn a musical instrument, you should practice (practise). Exercise 2: Using the given information, make conditional sentences. Use if.17. The wind is blowing hard, so we won't take the boat out for a ride.

If the wind wasn't/ weren't blowing hard, we would take the boat out for a ride.18. Carol didn’t answer the phone because she was studying.

If Carol hadn't been studying she would have answered the phone.19. I feel better now because you talked to me about my problems yesterday.

I wouldn't fee] better now if you hadn't talked to me about my problems yesterday.20. Because I don't have enough free time, I can't help my mother with the housework.

If I had more free time I could help my mother with the housework.21. Rita is exhausted today because she didn't get any sleep last night.



Rita wouldn't be exhausted today if she had gotten some sleep last night.IV/ Summary: summarise the main pointsV/ Homework ; Prepare new lessonE/ Evaluation………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….


ĐỀ KIỂM TRA HỌC KÌ INĂM HỌC: 2011 – 2012

A.OBJECTIVES: 1. Knowledge: Test their knowledge from unit 1 to unit 7 2. Skills: Writing + listening 3. Political thought: do the test individuallyB.TEACHING AIDS: 1. Teacher: test handouts 2. Students: pens, C. METHODS: T/Wh class, groupwork, pairwork D. CONTENTS:I. Organisation:

II. Revision:III./New lesson:MATRIXKHUNG MA TRẬN ĐỀ KIỂM TRA HK 1 năm học 2011-2012- lớp 11–Thời gian: 45’(Thang điểm 10)

Tên chủ đề Nhận biết Thông hiểu Vận dụng Cộng Cấp độ thấp Cấp độ cao



LISTENING(Tự luận)

Volunteer work

Số câu: 8Số điểm 2

Số câu: 8 Số điểm: 2

Số câu: 8 Tỉ lệ: 20%

READING (MCQ)

A Party and Competitions

Số câu:10Số điểm 2,5

Số câu: 10Số điểm: 2,5

Số câu:10Tỉ lệ: 25%

WRITING (Tự luận + MCQ)

- infinitive - reported speech- conditional sentences

- reported speech- conditional sentnces

Số câu: 8Số điểm: 2



Số câu:8 Tỉ lệ:20%

LANGUAGE FOCUS (Grammar, vocabulary and speaking) (MCQ)

- tense revision: past simple, past perfect- vocabulary: using parts of speech, using vocab in structures

- giving and responding to an experience

Số câu 10Số điểm:2,5



Số câu: 10Tỉ lệ:25%

PHONETICS(MCQ)

- distinguish the sounds:/dз/ /w/; /tw/ /tς/; /h/


Số câu: 4Số điểm:1

Số câu: 4Tỉ lệ: 10%

Tổng số câu: 40

Số câu: 17Tỉ lệ: 42,5%


Số câu: 5 Tỉ lệ: 12,5%

Số câu: 40

SỞ GD & ĐT QUẢNG NINHTRƯỜNG THPT QUẢNG LA

ĐỀ KIỂM TRA HỌC KÌ INĂM HỌC: 2011 – 2012



---------------------- MÔN: TIẾNG ANH 11Thời gian làm bài: 45 phút (không kể thời gian giao đề)

ĐỀ 01 Họ và tên học sinh:…………………………..Lớp:……….SBD:………Phòng thi:……..I. LISTENING:(2pts) Nghe và điền từ ( cụm từ ) vào chỗ trống Spring School is an …..(1)…. school. It provides classes to …..(2)….children in Ho Chi Minh City. Around 30 street ….(3)…live and study at school and about ….(4)… children with special difficulties from District 1 regularly attend classes. Spring School requires ….(5)… to help organize their fund raising dinner held annually in ….(6)... This is an exciting night in which children perform circus, theatre, dance, and singing at one of the largest hotels in Ho Chi Minh City. They also need …(7)… volunteers to contact sponsors and help to expand the school ….(8)…. Volunteers are required from February until July to help organize these events II-PRONUNCIATION: (1pt)Chọn từ gạch chân có cách phát âm khác so với các từ còn lại1. A. guitarist B. knowledge C. generous D. village2. A. twin B. twenty C.twice D. two 3. A. yellow B. young C. years D. way4. A. wheel B. now C. wet D. sweet`

III/ GRAMMAR, VOCABULARY, SPEAKING : (2,5 pts)Chọn đáp án đúng nhất để hoàn thành mỗi câu1. She was in a very...........situation. she felt so stupid and didn’t know what to say.

A. embarrassing B. embarrassed C. embarass D. embarrassingly 2. I don’t like that man . He has a............. behaviour. A. clever B. good C. interesting D. sneaky 3. Have you ever spoken English to a native speaker? A. Well, it made me more interested in learning English. B. Yes. I talked to an English girl last summer. C. It teaches me a lesson and makes me study harder. D. I like speaking English.4 . Teacher makes us …………..the exercises everyday

A. do B. did C. doing D. to do5. I think your mother should let you ............your own mind.

A. make up B. to make up C. making up D. made up6. When he realised that I ________ at him, he ________ away.

A. looked - was turning B. was looking - turnedC. was looking - was turning D. looked - turned

7. If he came here today I ....... him a special gift.A. would have given B. give C. would give D. will give

8. Before I applied for that job, I ________ my parents for advice.A. had asked B. asked C. to ask D. have asked

9. “ If I were you, I would help that woman” Mary said to Tom.A. Mary told Tom if she is Tom she will help that woman.



B. Mary told Tom if she had been Tom , she would have helped that woman.C. Mary told Tom if she were Tom she would help that woman.D. Mary said Tom if she were Tom she would help that woman.

10. If you had had breakfast, you __________hungry.A. would not be B. will not be C. are not D. would not have been

IV.READING: (2,5pts)

A. Đọc đoạn văn sau và chọn một đáp án phù hợp nhất, từ câu 1 đến câu 5:If you are invited to someone's house for dinner in the United States, you should (1)

____ a gift, such as a bunch of flowers or a box of chocolates. If you give your host a (2) ____ gift, he/she may open it in front of you. Opening a present in front of the gift-giver is considered (3) _______. It shows that the host is excited about receiving the gift and wants to show his/her appreciation to you immediately. Even if the host doesn't like it, he/she will tell a "(4) _____ lie" and say how much they like the gift to prevent the guest from feeling bad. If your host asks you to arrive at a particular time, you should not arrive (5) _______ on time or earlier than the expected time, because this is considered to be potentially inconvenient and therefore rude, as the host may not be ready.

1. A. take B. give C. bring D. make2. A. unwanted B. valuable C. unpacked D. wrapped3. A. rude B. polite C. unpolite D. funny4. A. great B. obvious C. deliberate D. white5. A. exactly B. gradually C. perfectly D. recently

B. Đọc đoạn văn sau và chọn một câu trả lời thích hợp nhất, từ câu 1 đến câu 5: Why do we have the Olympic Games? How did they begin? The first Olympic Games that we have records of were in Greece in 776 B.C. The games lasted one day. The only event in the first thirteen Olympic Games was a race. Men ran the length of the stadium (about 192 meters). Then, longer running races were added. Through the years, a few other kinds of events, like the long jump, were also added. During this time, the games were for men only, and women could not even watch them. In the year 393, a Roman emperor ended the Olympic Games because the quality of the games became very low. The Olympics did not take place again from 1500 years. In 1894, Pierre de Coubertin of France helped form the International Olympic Committee, and the modern Olympic Games began. In 1896 the games were held again in Athens, Greece. The Greeks built a new stadium for the competition. Three hundred and eleven athletes from thirteen countries competed in many events. the winners became national heroes. 1. The word "emperor" refers to_______.

A. King B. athlete C. winner D. person 2. How many athletes from thirteen countries took part in the events?

A. 300 B. 311 C. 310 D. 11 3. Who formed the International Olympic Committee?

A. France B. RomanC. emperor D. Pierre de Coubertin

4. The Roman emperor ended the Olympic Games in ________A. 1898 B. 1896 C. 393 D. 1500

5. The Olympic Games began in_______.A. 192 B. one year C. 776 D. 776 B.C



V. WRITING: (2pts) A. Viết lại câu theo gợi ý đã cho:

3. “ I have made a mistake in the calculations."=> Mr Forest admitted …………………………………………………………..

4. “I'll pay for the meal.”=> Sarah insisted ………………………………………………………………….

5. I don't ride the bus to school every morning because it's always so crowded.=> If………………………………………………………………………………

6. “I'd have been in bad trouble if Jane hadn't helped me,” he said.=> He said he would ……………………………………………………………….

B. Chọn câu viết đúng nhất: 1. “ If I were you I would help her” Lan said to Ba

A. Lan told Ba if she had been Ba, she would have helped her.B. Lan told Ba if she were Ba, she would help her.C. Lan told Ba if she is Ba, she will help her.D. Lan told Ba if she have been Ba, she would have helped her.

2. “ I hear you’ll get married next week . Congratulations !”, Bob said to me.A. Bob is looking forward to congratulating me on getting married .B. Bob promised to congratulated me on getting married .C. Bob wanted to know about my getting married .D. Bob congratulated me on getting married the next week .

3. If you don’t go to school, you won’t understand the lesson.A. Unless you don’t go to school, you understand the lesson.B. Unless you go to school, you understand the lesson.C. Unless you don’t go to school, you won’t understand the lesson.D. Unless you go to school, you won’t understand the lesson.

4. “You didn’t pay attention to what I said “, he said to me.A. He looked forward to what I said.B. He accused me of not paying attention to what he said.C. He thanked me for what I said.D. He apologized for not paying attention to what I said.

-------------------The end--------------------

SỞ GD & ĐT QUẢNG NINHTRƯỜNG THPT QUẢNG LA----------------------

ĐỀ KIỂM TRA HỌC KÌ INĂM HỌC: 2011 – 2012MÔN: TIẾNG ANH 11Thời gian làm bài: 45 phút (không kể thời gian giao đề)

ĐỀ 02



Họ và tên học sinh:…………………………..Lớp:……….SBD:………Phòng thi:……..

I- LISTENING:(2pts) Nghe và điền từ ( cụm từ ) vào chỗ trống Spring School is an …..(1)…. school. It provides classes to …..(2)….children in Ho Chi Minh City. Around 30 street ….(3)…live and study at school and about ….(4)… children with special difficulties from District 1 regularly attend classes. Spring School requires ….(5)… to help organize their fund raising dinner held annually in ….(6)... This is an exciting night in which children perform circus, theatre, dance, and singing at one of the largest hotels in Ho Chi Minh City. They also need …(7)… volunteers to contact sponsors and help to expand the school ….(8)…. Volunteers are required from February until July to help organize these events II- PRONUNCIATION: (1pt)Chọn từ gạch chân có cách phát âm khác so với các từ còn lại

1. A. guitarist B. knowledge C. generous D. village2. A. twin B. twenty C.twice D. two 3. A. yellow B. young C. years D. way4. A. wheel B. now C. wet D. sweet`

III- GRAMMAR, VOCABULARY, SPEAKING : (2,5 pts)Chọn đáp án đúng nhất để hoàn thành mỗi câu1. The transition from school to work does not happen smoothly to everyone. A. without difficulties B. full of troubles C. plenty of challenges D. with problems2. I don’t like that man . He has a............. behaviour. A. clever B. good C. interesting D. sneaky 3. “ If I were you, I would help that woman”, Mary said to Tom.

A. Mary told Tom if she is Tom she will help that woman.B. Mary told Tom if she had been Tom , she would have helped that woman.C. Mary told Tom if she were Tom she would help that woman.D. Mary said Tom if she were Tom she would help that woman.

4. Before I applied for that job, I ________ my parents for advice. A. had asked B. asked C. to ask D. have asked5. When he realised that I ________ at him, he ________ away.

A. looked - was turning B was looking - turned C. was looking - was turning D. looked - turned6. Teacher makes us …………..the exercises everyday

A. do B. did C. doing D. to do7. I think your mother should let you ............your own mind.A. make up B. to make up C. making up D. made up8. If he came here today, I ....... him a special gift.

A. would have given B. give C. would give D. will give

9. I wouldn't..................of going to a party I hadn't been invited to. A. dream B. intend C. depend D. rely10. “You won the competition. Congratulations!”, Mary said to me. A. Mary congratulated me with winning the competition. B. Mary congratulated me about winning the competition C. Mary congratulated me on winning the competition Trương THPT Nguyễn Văn cừ. Ngô Sách Thiệu120


D. Mary congratulated me at winning the competition IV.READING: (2,5pts)A. Đọc đoạn văn sau và chọn một đáp án phù hợp nhất, từ câu 1 đến câu 5:

If you are invited to someone's house for dinner in the United States, you should (1) ____ a gift, such as a bunch of flowers or a box of chocolates. If you give your host a (2) ____ gift, he/she may open it in front of you. Opening a present in front of the gift-giver is considered (3) _______. It shows that the host is excited about receiving the gift and wants to show his/her appreciation to you immediately. Even if the host doesn't like it, he/she will tell a "(4) _____ lie" and say how much they like the gift to prevent the guest from feeling bad. If your host asks you to arrive at a particular time, you should not arrive (5) _______ on time or earlier than the expected time, because this is considered to be potentially inconvenient and therefore rude, as the host may not be ready.

1. A. take B. give C. bring D. make2. A. unwanted B. valuable C. unpacked D. wrapped3. A. rude B. polite C. unpolite D. funny4. A. great B. obvious C. deliberate D. white5. A. gradually B. exactly C. perfectly D. recently



A. 300 B. 311 C. 310 D. 11

3. Who formed the International Olympic Committee?A. France B. RomanC. emperor D. Pierre de Coubertin



V. WRITING: (2pts) A. Viết lại câu theo gợi ý đã cho:

1. “ I have made a mistake in the calculations."Trương THPT Nguyễn Văn cừ. Ngô Sách Thiệu121


=> Mr Forest admitted …………………………………………………………..2. “I'll pay for the meal.”

=> Sarah insisted ………………………………………………………………….3. I don't ride the bus to school every morning because it's always so crowded.

=> If………………………………………………………………………………4. “I'd have been in bad trouble if Jane hadn't helped me,” he said.

=> He said he would ………………………………………………………………. B. Chọn câu viết đúng nhất: 1. “ If I were you I would help her” Lan said to Ba

A. Lan told Ba if she had been Ba, she would have helped her.B. Lan told Ba if she were Ba, she would help her.C. Lan told Ba if she is Ba, she will help her.D. Lan told Ba if she have been Ba, she would have helped her.

2. “ I hear you’ll get married next week . Congratulations !”, Bob said to me.A. Bob is looking forward to congratulating me on getting married .B. Bob promised to congratulated me on getting married .C. Bob wanted to know about my getting married .D. Bob congratulated me on getting married the next week .

3. If you don’t go to school, you won’t understand the lesson.A. Unless you don’t go to school, you understand the lesson.B. Unless you go to school, you understand the lesson.C. Unless you don’t go to school, you won’t understand the lesson.D. Unless you go to school, you won’t understand the lesson.

4. “You didn’t pay attention to what I said “, he said to me.A. He looked forward to what I said.B. He accused me of not paying attention to what he said.C. He thanked me for what I said.D. He apologized for not paying attention to what I said.

-------------------The end--------------------



ĐỀ 03 Họ và tên học sinh:…………………………..Lớp:……….SBD:………Phòng thi:……..

I- LISTENING:(2pts) Nghe và điền từ ( cụm từ ) vào chỗ trống Spring School is an …..(1)…. school. It provides classes to …..(2)….children in Ho Chi Minh City. Around 30 street ….(3)…live and study at school and about ….(4)…



children with special difficulties from District 1 regularly attend classes. Spring School requires ….(5)… to help organize their fund raising dinner held annually in ….(6)... This is an exciting night in which children perform circus, theatre, dance, and singing at one of the largest hotels in Ho Chi Minh City. They also need …(7)… volunteers to contact sponsors and help to expand the school ….(8)…. Volunteers are required from February until July to help organize these events. II-PRONUNCIATION: (1pt)Chọn từ gạch chân có cách phát âm khác so với các từ còn lại

1. A. never B. night C.ink D.next2. A. honesty B. house C. hat D. horrible3. A. change B. children C. machine D. church4. A. guitarist B. passenger C. generous D. village

III- GRAMMAR, VOCABULARY, SPEAKING: (2,5 pts)Chọn đáp án đúng nhất để hoàn thành mỗi câu 1. He is a(n).......man. He always help people without thinking of his own benefit.

A. unselfish B. generous C. friendly D. honest 2. The second solution is to provide safe, ______ birth-control methods.

A. expensive B. inexpensive C. expensively D. inexpensively 3. Have you ever talked to a famous pop star? A. Well, it is very interesting.

B. No, thank you. C. Yes, I have. D. Yes, I ‘d like.

4. I was sure that I ________ him before. A. met B. had met C. have met D. was meeting5. …………….you study hard, you will not pass the exam. A. If B. Unless C. When D. Because6. I wouldn’t have broken my arm if I ......on the ice.

A. will not slip B. don’t slip C. didn’t slip D. hadn’t slipped7 . “ I hear you’ll get married next week . Congratulations !, Bob said to me.

A. Bob is looking forward to congratulating me on getting married .B. Bob promised to congratulated me on getting married .C. Bob wanted to know about my getting married .D. Bob congratulated me on getting married the next week .

8. I warned An ______________ staying at the hotel near the airport. A. for B. from C. away D. against9. They had a really good chance of winning the national___________ A. compete B. competition C. competitor D. competitive10. “ Why don't we invite our neighbours ? " my sister said.

A. We didn't invite our neighbours because my sister didn't want it.B. My sister suggested inviting our neighbours.C. My sister refused to invite our neighbours.

D. My sister avoided inviting our neighbours.

IV-READING: (2,5pts)A. Đọc đoạn văn sau và chọn một đáp án thích hợp nhất, từ câu 1 đến câu 5:

If you are invited to someone's house for dinner in the United States, you should (1) ____ a gift, such as a bunch of flowers or a box of chocolates. If you give your host a (2)



____ gift, he/she may open it in front of you. Opening a present in front of the gift-giver is considered (3) _______. It shows that the host is excited about receiving the gift and wants to show his/her appreciation to you immediately. Even if the host doesn't like it, he/she will tell a "(4) _____ lie" and say how much they like the gift to prevent the guest from feeling bad. If your host asks you to arrive at a particular time, you should not arrive (5) _______ on time or earlier than the expected time, because this is considered to be potentially inconvenient and therefore rude, as the host may not be ready.

1. A. take B. give C. bring D. make2. A. unwanted B. valuable C. unpacked D. wrapped3. A. rude B. polite C. unpolite D. funny4. A. great B. obvious C. deliberate D. white5. A. gradually B. exactly C. perfectly D. recently



A. 300 B. 311 C. 310 D. 11

3. Who formed the International Olympic Committee?A. France B. RomanC. emperor D. Pierre de Coubertin



V- WRITING: (2 pts)A. Viết lại câu theo gợi ý đã cho:

1. Because I don't have enough free time, I can't help my mother with the housework. →If I ………………………………………………………………………………….

2. What would you do if you were a billionaire?” the man asked the woman. → The man asked the woman ……………………………………………………3. “It was nice of you to invite me to your birthday party. Thanks”. Mr.Mike said to

LanTrương THPT Nguyễn Văn cừ. Ngô Sách Thiệu124


→ Mr.Mike thanked …………for………………………………………………..4. “I have broken your car.", Mr. Forest said to me. Mr Forest admitted …………………………………………………………….

B. Tim lỗi sai của câu cần sửa A, B ,C hoặc D: 1. The teacher agreed dividing our class into two groups. A B C D 2. The boy insisted on have a break after dinner.

A B C D 3. The teacher congratulated Jack for winning the gold medal. A B C D 4. My brother accused me of steal the money he had put on the table that morning. A B C D

-------------------The end--------------------



ĐỀ 04 Họ và tên học sinh:…………………………..Lớp:……….SBD:………Phòng thi:……..

I- LISTENING:(2pts) Nghe và điền từ ( cụm từ ) vào chỗ trống



Spring School is an …..(1)…. school. It provides classes to …..(2)….children in Ho Chi Minh City. Around 30 street ….(3)…live and study at school and about ….(4)… children with special difficulties from District 1 regularly attend classes. Spring School requires ….(5)… to help organize their fund raising dinner held annually in ….(6)... This is an exciting night in which children perform circus, theatre, dance, and singing at one of the largest hotels in Ho Chi Minh City. They also need …(7)… volunteers to contact sponsors and help to expand the school ….(8)…. Volunteers are required from February until July to help organize these events. II-PRONUNCIATION: (1pt)Chọn từ gạch chân có cách phát âm khác so với các từ còn lại

1. A. never B. night C.ink D.next2. A. honesty B. house C. hat D. horrible3. A. change B. children C. machine D. church4. A. guitarist B. passenger C. generous D. village

III- GRAMMAR, VOCABULARY, SPEAKING: (2,5 pts)Chọn đáp án đúng nhất để hoàn thành mỗi câu1.…………….you study hard, you will not pass the exam. A. If B. Unless C. When D. Because2. I wouldn’t have broken my arm if I ......on the ice.

A. will not slip B. don’t slip C. didn’t slip D. hadn’t slipped3. Have you ever talked to a famous pop star? A. Well, it is very interesting.

B. No, thank you.C. Yes, I have.D. Yes, I ‘d like.

4. I was sure that I ________ him before. A. met B. had met C. have met D. was meeting5. They had a really good chance of winning the national___________ A. compete B. competition C. competitor D. competitive6. " Why don't we invite our neighbours ?" my sister said.

A. We didn't invite our neighbours because my sister didn't want it.B. My sister suggested inviting our neighbours.C. My sis ter refused to invite our neighbours.

D. My sister avoided inviting our neighbours.

7 . “ I hear you’ll get married next week . Congratulations !”, Bob said to me.A. Bob is looking forward to congratulating me on getting married .B. Bob promised to congratulated me on getting married .C. Bob wanted to know about my getting married .D. Bob congratulated me on getting married the next week .

8. I warned An ______________ staying at the hotel near the airport. A. for B. from C. away D. against9. He is a(n).............man. He always help people without thinking of his own benefit.

A. unselfish B. generous C. friendly D. honest 10. The second solution is to provide safe, ______ birth-control methods.

A. expensive B. inexpensive C. expensively D. inexpensivelyIV-READING: (2,5pts)A. Đọc đoạn văn sau và chọn một đáp án thích hợp nhất, từ câu 1 đến câu 5:



If you are invited to someone's house for dinner in the United States, you should (1) ____ a gift, such as a bunch of flowers or a box of chocolates. If you give your host a (2) ____ gift, he/she may open it in front of you. Opening a present in front of the gift-giver is considered (3) _______. It shows that the host is excited about receiving the gift and wants to show his/her appreciation to you immediately. Even if the host doesn't like it, he/she will tell a "(4) _____ lie" and say how much they like the gift to prevent the guest from feeling bad. If your host asks you to arrive at a particular time, you should not arrive (5) _______ on time or earlier than the expected time, because this is considered to be potentially inconvenient and therefore rude, as the host may not be ready.

1. A. take B. give C. bring D. make2. A.wanted B. valuable C. unpacked D. wrapped3. A. rude B. polite C. unpolite D. funny4. A. great B. obvious C. deliberate D. white5. A. gradually B. exactly C. perfectly D. recently



A. 300 B. 311 C. 310 D. 11 3. Who formed the International Olympic Committee?

A. France B. RomanC. emperor D. Pierre de Coubertin



V- WRITING: (2 pts)A. Viết lại câu theo gợi ý đã cho:

5. Because I don't have enough free time, I can't help my mother with the housework. →If I ………………………………………………………………………………….

6. What would you do if you were a billionaire?” the man asked the woman. → The man asked the woman ……………………………………………………7. “It was nice of you to invite me to your birthday party. Thanks”. Mr.Mike said to

LanTrương THPT Nguyễn Văn cừ. Ngô Sách Thiệu127


→ Mr.Mike thanked …………for………………………………………………..8. “I have broken your car.", Mr. Forest said to me. Mr. Forest admitted …………………………………………………………….

B. Tim lỗi sai của câu cần sửa A, B ,C hoặc D: 1. The teacher agreed dividing our class into two groups. A B C D 2. The boy insisted on have a break after dinner.

A B C D 3. The teacher congratulated Jack for winning the gold medal. A B C D 4. My brother accused me of steal the money he had put on the table that morning. A B C D

-------------------The end--------------------

SỞ GD&ĐT QUẢNG NINHTRƯỜNG THPT QUẢNG LA---------Đề chính thức

ĐỀ KIỂM TRA HỌC KỲ I NĂM HỌC 2011-2012 MÔN: TIẾNG ANH 11 (Ban cơ bản) Thời gian: 45’ (Không kể thời gian giao đề)

Phần nghe (Trước khi nghe Gv cho học sinh 01 phút đề đọc phần nghe)(Giáo viên đọc cho học sinh nghe 03 lần với tốc độ vừa phải)Tapescript: Spring School is an informal school. It provides classes to disadvantaged children in Ho Chi Minh City. Around 30 street children live and study at school and about 250 children with special difficulties from District 1 regularly attend classes. Spring School requires volunteers to help organize their fund raising dinner held annually in June. This is an exciting night in which children perform circus, theatre, dance, and singing at one of the largest hotels in Ho Chi Minh City. They also need foreign volunteers to



contact sponsors and help to expand the school activities. Volunteers are required from February until July to help organize these events.

SỞ GD&ĐT QUẢNG NINHTRƯỜNG THPT QUẢNG LA---------

ĐÁP ÁN VÀ BIỂU ĐIỂM ĐỀ KIỂM TRA HỌC KỲ I NĂM HỌC 2011-2012 MÔN: TIẾNG ANH 11 (Ban cơ bản)

ĐỀ 1:

I./ LISTENING: Mỗi câu đúng 0,25 điểm



Nghe và điền từ (cụm từ) vào chỗ trống1. informal 2. disadvantaged 3. children 4. 250 5. volunteers 6. June. 7. foreign 8. activities.

II./ PRONUNCIATION: Mỗi câu đúng 0,25 điểmChọn từ gạch chân có cách phát âm khác so với các từ còn lại

1.A 2. D 3.D 4.B

III./ GRAMMAR, VOCABULARY AND SPEAKING: mỗi câu đúng 0,25 điểmChọn đáp án đúng nhất để hoàn thành mỗi câu

1.A 2 .D 3. B 4.A 5.A 6.B 7.C 8.A 9.C 10.D

IV./ READING : mỗi câu đúng 0,25 điểmA. Đọc đoạn văn sau và chọn một câu trả lời thích hợp nhất, từ câu 1 đến câu 5.

1.C 2. D 3.B 4.D 5.A B. Đọc đoạn văn sau và chọn một câu trả lời thích hợp nhất, từ câu 1 đến câu 5.

1.A 2.B 3.D 4.C 5.D

V./WRITING: mỗi câu đúng 0,25 điểmA. Viết lại câu theo gợi ý đã cho:

1. Mr Forest admitted making a mistake in the calculations.2. Sarah insisted on paying for the meal3. If it weren't always so crowded, I would take the bus to school every morning 4. He said he would have been in bad trouble if Jane hadn't helped him

B. Chọn đáp án đúng để hoàn thành câu 1.B 2.D 3.D 4.B



ĐỀ 02:



I./ LISTENING: Mỗi câu đúng 0,25 điểmNghe và điền từ (cụm từ) vào chỗ trống

1. informal 2. disadvantaged 3. children 4. 250 5. volunteers 6. June. 7. foreign 8. activities


1.A 2. D 3.D 4.BIII./ GRAMMAR, VOCABULARY AND SPEAKING: mỗi câu đúng 0,25 điểmChọn đáp án đúng nhất để hoàn thành mỗi câu

1.A 2.D 3.C 4.A 5.B6.A 7.A 8.C 9.A 10.C

IV./ READING : Mỗi câu đúng 0,25 điểmA. Đọc đoạn văn sau và chọn một câu trả lời thích hợp nhất, từ câu 1 đến câu 5.


1.A 2.B 3.D 4.C 5.DV./WRITING: Mỗi câu đúng 0,25 điểmA. Viết lại câu theo gợi ý đã cho: 1. Mr Forest admitted making a mistake in the calculations.2. Sarah insisted on paying for the meal3. If it weren't always so crowded, I would take the bus to school every morning 4. He said he would have been in bad trouble if Jane hadn't helped himB. Chọn đáp án đúng để hoàn thành câu1. B 2.D 3.D 4.B



ĐỀ 3I./ LISTENING: Mỗi câu đúng 0,25 điểmNghe và điền từ (cụm từ) vào chỗ trống

1. informal 2. disadvantaged



3. children 4. 250 5. volunteers 6. June. 7. foreign 8. activities


1.C 2.A 3.C 4.AIII./ GRAMMAR, VOCABULARY AND SPEAKING: Mỗi câu đúng 0,25 điểmChọn đáp án đúng nhất để hoàn thành mỗi câu

1.A 2.B 3.C 4.B 5.B6.D 7.D 8.D 9.B 10.B



1.A 2.B 3.D 4.C 5.DV./WRITING: Mỗi câu đúng 0,25 điểmA. Viết lại câu theo gợi ý đã cho:

1. If I had more free time I could help my mother with the housework2. The man asked the woman (that) what she would do if she were a millionaire3. Mr.Mike thanked her for inviting him to her birthday party.4. Mr. Forest admitted breaking my car

B. Tìm lỗi sai của câu cần sửa A, B ,C hoặc D .1.A 2.B 3.A 4.B

IV./ Summary: - Summarise the main pointsV./ Home work: - prepare next lessonE. EVELUATION:...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................





ĐỀ 4:I./ LISTENING: Mỗi câu đúng 0,25 điểmNghe và điền từ (cụm từ) vào chỗ trống

1. informal 2. disadvantaged 3. children 4. 250 5. volunteers 6. June. 7. foreign 8. activities


1.C 2.A 3.C 4.AIII./ GRAMMAR, VOCABULARY AND SPEAKING: Mỗi câu đúng 0,25 điểmChọn đáp án đúng nhất để hoàn thành mỗi câu

1.B 2.D 3.C 4.B 5.B6.B 7.D 8.D 9.A 10.B



1.A 2.B 3.D 4.C 5.D

V./WRITING: Mỗi câu đúng 0,25 điểmA. Viết lại câu theo gợi ý đã cho:

5. If I had more free time I could help my mother with the housework6. The man asked the woman (that) what she would do if she were a millionaire7. Mr.Mike thanked her for inviting him to her birthday party.8. Mr. Forest admitted breaking my car

B. Tìm lỗi sai của câu cần sửa A, B ,C hoặc D .1.A 2.B 3.A 4.B


UNIT 8: CELEBRATIONSLESSON 1: READINGA.OBJECTIVES: 1. Knowledge : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to: - Ss know about the TET holidays in Vietnam. 2. Skills:Reading



3. Political thought: Talking about Tet holidayB.TEACHING AIDS: 1. Teacher: lesson plan ,textbook , pen,handouts, 2. Students: pens, notebooks, textbooks… C. METHODS: T/Wh class, groupwork, pairwork D. CONTENTS:I. Organisation: Class absents

II.Warm – Up:- Ask Ss to look at the picture in the textbook and work in pair to discuss the questions: 1. What time of the year is it? 2. What are the people in the picture doing? 3. What else do you see in the picture? - Check the answers with the whole class. - Suggested answer: 1. It is Spring and it should be Tet holiday because we can see the apricot blossom and a kumquat tree full of ripe fruits.2. The people in the picture may be a family. The grandmother is giving her grandson and granddaughter some lucky money.3. In the picture we can also see a five-fruit tray on the ancestral altar and a dish of fruits, and banh trung on the table.

III.New lesson:

Teacher’s activities Students’ activities1. Before you read: (10 minutes)1.New words: +Lunar New Year: TÕt ¢m lÞch + to fall between .. and ....: r¬i vµo kho¶ng thêi gian.. + spread (v): kÐo dµi + candied fruit: møt + positive comments:nh÷ng lêi nãi tèt ®Ñp- Ask sts to read the words after T. - Ask some sts to read the word again- Checking by R&R2. T/F prediction- run through the statements and ask Ss to predict they are true or false?- call Ss to give answer

STEP 2: WHILE - READING Instruction : You are to read the passage and decide whether the statements are True (T) or Fasle (F)

Practice reading the new words.- Listen and repeat.- Some individuals read the words aloud

b. Give prediction.

- Read the words and do the task.

- Some ss answer and others listen.

*Keys: 1. F ( it fall between 19th January and



1. checking prediction- Ask Ss to read the passage again and underline the key words to understand the main point.- Ask Ss to work individually to do the task.- Call on some ss to give the answers and ask them to explain their choices.- Give the correct answers:

2. Answering the questions:- Ask S to read the questions carefully and underline the key words in each questions.- Ask S to work individually , then discuss their answers with a partner.- Call on some ss to write the answers on board.- Feedback and give correct answers:

STEP 3: POST – READING- Ask Ss to discuss in groups to tell each other about their last Tet holiday.- Go around and offer help.- Call on some Ss to report their ideas in front of the class- Correct the Ss’ mistakes and give the comments.

20th February) 2. F ( it’s just for agrarian people) 3. T 4. F ( according to the passage, lucky money tends to be given to children ) 5. T 6.

- Read the sentences and do the task .- Some Ss answer in front of the class.*Keys:1. It sometime between 19th January and 20th February. 2. Tet’s preparations and celebrations used to be spread over months. 3. They are decorated with coloured lights and red banners. 4. They buy gifts, clean and decorate their houses and cook traditional foods.5. It is made from sticky rice, green beans and fatty pork.6. Mut is candied fruit.7. Visiting friends and other family members, exchanging wishes, going to the pagoda, playing games.......

- Discuss in pairs and talk about the Tet holiday.- Some S talk in front of the class.

IV./ Summary: - Summarise the main pointsV./ Home work: - Write a passage about your last Tet holiday - prepare next lessonE. EVELUATION:..............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




UNIT 8: CELEBRATIONSLESSON 2: SPEAKINGA.OBJECTIVES: 1. Knowledge : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to: - Students can develop their speaking skill by talking about the celebrations of Tet and other festivals’ activities. 2. Skills:speaking 3. Political thought: Talking about Tet holidayB.TEACHING AIDS: 1. Teacher: lesson plan ,textbook , pen,handouts, 2. Students: pens, notebooks, textbooks… C. METHODS: T/Wh class, groupwork, pairwork D. CONTENTS:I. Organisation: Class absents

II.Warm – Up: matching

A. TET holidayB. Mery ChristmasC. Mid-Autumn festival D. Valentine’’s dayE. Vietnamses Teacher’sday

II.New lesson:

Teacher’s activities Students’ activitiesSTEP 1: PRE – SPEAKING TASK 1 Instruction : You are going to practice the dialogue on page 93 in pairs .- T asks the whole class to read the dialogue silently and asks them what points are mentioed in the dialogue

- Work in pairs to do the task.- Some pairs stand up to present.



- T checks with the whole class and makes clear that : in the dialogue the two friends talk about Tet holiday , It’s time and activities .- Ss then practice the dialogue in pairs . T encourages Ss to remember the dialogue so that they can act it uot more naturally .- T goes around to onsere - When Ss have finished , T calls on some pairs to act out the dialogue and goves commnets .STEP 2: WHILE – SPEAKING Task 2: Instruction : You are going match the holidays with its description and activities - Before Ss do the task , T asks them to look at the three pictures on page 93 and work out the name of each holiday . Ss may be asked to give the Vietnamese equivalent to each holiday .- T checks with the whole class and gives out correct answer :+ Picture 1 : mid – Autunm festival : tÕt trung thu + Picture 2 : Thanksgiving : LÔ t¹ ¬n + Picture 3 : Valentine’s Day : ngµy lÔ t×nh yªu - T may ask Ss to list the activities people usually do in these jolidays and write quicky on the board so that Ss can compare these with the information they will dael with later .- Now Ss turn to the next page and do the task in pairs . they match the holiday with its main purpose and activities .- T calls on some Ss to give the answer and ashs other Ss to feedback . T may aslo ask Ss to cmpare their answers with the information written on the board earlier .- Listen and give remarks.STEP 3: POST - SPEAKING- Ask sts to work in pairs to do the task. Ask Ss to add any information about the holiday they know to make the dialogue more interesting.- Go around to offer help.- Ask Ss to act out their dialogue in front of the whole class.- Listen to them and then give remarks

- Work in pairs to make the conversation about the holidays.

- Some sts present in front of the class.

Answers :1 . c C 2 . a A 3 . b B

- Work in pairs to make the conversation about the holidays.

*Model conversation:- What do you know about Mid-Autumn Festival?- People celebrate the largest full moon in the year and it’s a special day for children.- When is it exactly?- It falls on/ comes on the fifteen day of the 8th lunar month.- What do people do on that day?- People eat mooncakes, fruit, drink tea and watch the full moon.- What about the children?- They have mooncakes and a lot of fruits. Then they carry their beautiful star lanterns along the streets in their neighbourhood. Dragon dance is also a special activity on this day.- Oh, that sounds really interesting.

IV./ Summary: - Summarise the main pointsV./ Home work: - Write down about the the Mid-Autumn Festival. - prepare next lesson E.EVALUATION



……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………


UNIT 8: CELEBRATIONSLESSON 3: LISTEINGA.OBJECTIVES: 1. Knowledge : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to: - Sts know about the New Year Day in Japan 2. Skills:Listening 3. Political thought: Talking about celebrationsB.TEACHING AIDS: 1. Teacher: lesson plan ,textbook , pen,handouts, cassette 2. Students: pens, notebooks, textbooks… C. METHODS: T/Wh class, groupwork, pairwork D. CONTENTS:I. Organisation:

II.Revision:Homework checking: - One st talk about Mid- Autumn Festival.- Listen and give remarks

Teacher’s activities Students’ activitiesSTEP 1: PRE- LISTENING1.New words: + shrine (n ): ®Òn thê + longevity : long life :tuæi thä + pine tree: c©y th«ng + constancy(n ): bÒn lßng, kiªn ®Þnh)) + represent (v): to be a symbol of smth :biÓu tîng cho - Read the words / plays the tape again and ask sts to repeat.- Ask Ss to read the words in pairs.- Ask some sts to read the words again.- Ask S to look at the words in the book and read after T .- Checking by R.O.RSTEP 2: WHILE – LISTENINGInstruction: You are going to listen to two

Copy the words and phrases.- Listen and repeat.- Read the words in pairs and correct each other’s mistakes.- Some individuals read the words aloud Look at the words and read after T /the tape.

- Listen and do the task.- Compare their answers- Give the answers.- Check their answer say it aloud, and



138


people talking about how the New Year is celebrated in Japan. Task 1: - Ask Ss to read the statements carefully and work out what information they need to concentrate on while listening. - Ask Ss to listen to the tape/T once . - Ask Ss to compare their answer in pairs.- Play the tape the second time for Ss to check their answers.- Check Ss’ answers by calling on some Ss

Task 2: - Ask Ss to work in pairs and read questions given in the textbook and makes sure they understand the questions. Sts discuss the information needed to answer the questions with each other and try to answer them.- Ask sts to listen to the talk once or twice and answer the questions. Sts are advised to note down necessary information.- Ask Ss to compare their answers. - Check sts’ answer by playing the tape/ read the dialogue once again, stop where necessary and conduct the correction. STEP 3: POST - LISTENING - Ask Ss to work in group to take turn talking about the New Year’s Day in Japan.- Ask Ss to work in pairs to compare the Vietnamese Tet Holidays with those of the Japanese ones.- Go round to check the activities and to make sure that sts are working effectively.- Ask one or two sts to present in front of the whole class.- Check and give remarks.

then correct their work if they have the wrong answer.*Answer: + They put on special clothes. + Housewives prepare special foods. + They go to a shrine. + They drink rice wine. + They watch television. + They eat special meal.

- Read the questions and answer the questions in pairs.- Listen and do the task.- Compare their answers.- Check their answer.Suggested answers : 1- Because they want to get rid of the dirt of the old year and welcome the new year. 2- From television or the radio. 3- Kimonos or special dress. 4- No, New Year is mostly celebrated among family only.


- One/ two sts present.IV./ Summary: - Summarise the main pointsV./ Home work: - Write a short paragraph about the New Year’s Day in Japan. - prepare next lessonE. EVELUATION:..............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



Date of preparing:...../......./........ Period: 52Date of teaching:......./......./...........

UNIT 8: CELEBRATIONSLESSON 4: WRITINGA.OBJECTIVES: 1. Knowledge : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to: - Students can write the first draft of a description of one of the popular celebrations in Vietnam. 2. Skills:Listening 3. Political thought: Talking about celebrationsB.TEACHING AIDS: 1. Teacher: lesson plan ,textbook , pen,handouts, cassette 2. Students: pens, notebooks, textbooks… C. METHODS: T/Wh class, groupwork, pairwork D. CONTENTS:I. Organisation: Class absents

II.Revision:

A B

1. Mid-Autumn Festival

2. National Independence Day.3. Women's Day

4. Teacher's Day

a. people give flowers or gifts to the women they love.b. It is celebrated on the 2nd of December.c. People celebrate the largest full moon in the year.d. people visit their old teachers.

- Work in pairs to match.- Some sts report.Key: 1 - c ; 2 - b ; 3 - a ; 4 - d- Introduce the topic of the lesson:" In this lesson you will learn how to describe one of these celebrations"



III.New lesson: Teacher's activities Students' activitiesSTEP 1: PRE – LISTENINGActivity 1: - Tell sts that a description should include 4 main parts and introduce some structures that can be used:+ name of the festiva+ time of the festival+ purpose of the festival+ main activities of the festival+ your feeling about festival- Ask sts to refer back to the lesson of speaking and pay attention to Mid-Autumn festival, and then to answer some questions about this festival:1. What is the name of the festival?2. When is it celebrated?3. What is the purpose of the festival?4. What are the main acivities of the festival?*Activity 2: Brainstorming and outlining:- Ask sts to choose one of the three other celebrations and describe it and make an outline basing on 4 main points.- Allow them to work in 5 minutes and to share their ideas with their friends if necessary.- Move round to help.STEP 2: WHILE – WRITING- Ask sts to write a description of the celebration that they chose.- Let sts write in 10 minutes.- Ask two sts to write on the board.- Move around to conduct the activity.

STEP 3: POST – WRITING- Ask some other sts to give remarks on the descriptions on the board.- Check and give the correct answer.- If there is enough time, T can have sts exchange their writing among sts within a group so that they can check their friend's work and give remarks.

- Listen to the T.

- Work in 4 minutes and then compare their answers with their friends.- Some sts report.

- Listen to the T and take note.- Listen and answer:1. It is Mid-Autumn Festival.2. It is celebrated on the 15th day of the 8th lunar month.3. It is the day when people people celebrate the largest full moon in the year.4. On that day, children usually wear mask, parade in the street, have parties .............

- Choose one celebration and make an outline.

- Work individually.- Listen to the teacher.- Do the writing task.

- Sample:" In Viet Nam the Mid – Autumn festival , is one of the two most celebrated festivals to current date . The Mid –Autumn Festival dates back over 15,000 years ago , and is traditionlly held on the 15th day of the 8th lunar month .. Appropriately , The Mid –Autumn Festival is also called the Chilren’s Festival . Trung thu activites are offer centred around children and education .Children also perform traditional Vietnamese danse and participate in contests for prizes and scholarships . Unicorn dancers are also very popular in Trung Thu festivites . In addition , Vietnamese



parents tell their children’s fairy tales and serve mooncakes and other special treats treats uneder the opportunity for me to gather with my family and friends to enjoy the moonlight and many special refreshments

IV./ Summary: - Summarise the main pointsV./ Home work: - Write down about the the Mid-Autumn Festival. - prepare next lessonE. EVELUATION:..............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


UNIT 8: CELEBRATIONSLESSON 5: LANGUAGE FOCUSA.OBJECTIVES: 1. Knowledge : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to: - Students know how to pronounce sounds /fl/, /fr/ and / θr/ correctly.

- Students learn about: - Pronouns: someone, no one , anyone, everyon - Vocabulary about holidays and celebrations 2. Skills:Listening+ writing 3. Political thought: Talking about celebrationsB.TEACHING AIDS: 1. Teacher: lesson plan ,textbook , pen,handouts, cassette 2. Students: pens, notebooks, textbooks… C. METHODS: T/Wh class, groupwork, pairwork D. CONTENTS:I. Organisation: Class absents

II.Revision:



. Homework checking: ( 5mins)- Ask one st to read the description they wrote at home aloud.- Ask another st to give remarks.- Check and give a mark.

III.New lesson:

Teacher's activities Students' activitiesI./ PRONUNCIATIONIntroduce sounds /fl/, /fr/ and / θr/, 1 .Listen and repeat Write three sounds on the board and pronounce them clearly twice, then ask sts to repeat.- Look at the book , listen and repeat. /fl/ /fr/ / θr/ fly fry thrive flower frozen threaten flu fruit through ............................- Tell sts how to pronounce these sounds accurately.- Ask them to look at the textbook, listen and repeat.- Then ask sts to work in pairs to read the words again so that they can check for each other.- Move around to help .- Ask two sts to read again and give remarks.2./Practice- Ask sts to look at sentences in page 97 in the book.- Ask them to work in pairs to read the sentences and then find out the words containing sounds /fl/, /fr/ and / θr/.- Ask them to work in 2 minutes.- Move around to conduct the activity.- Ask one st to report and other sts to give remarks.- Check and give the correct answers.- Ask some sts to read these sentences aloud.- Listen and give remarks.II.GRAMMAR & PRONUNCIATION + Pronouns: One(s) - Ask sts to look at some examples:e.g:1. I don’t like the red shirt ; I prefer the blue one 2. + Don’t buy the sour oranges . Buy the

- Write down five sounds.- Listen to the teacher and repeat.



- Answers: /fl/ /fr/ / θr/ flags French throw floor fries three ................................ - Read the sentences.

- Read the examples.- Try to find out the rules.- Copy these sentences.- Tell the T about the uses of one/ones:"one": is used instead of repeating a



sweet ones - Ask sts to tell the T about the uses of one and ones.- Ask sts to discuss with their partners and then report.- Listen and give remarks.- Ask some people to give examples.+ Pronouns: "everyone, someone, anyone" and "no one".- Give some examples:eg: + There’s someone waiting for the director in the office + Did someone call me last night ?+ Have you met anyone like him ?+ Don’t tell anyone my secret + No one likes her story + Everyone laughs at him *Notes: someone; anyone; no one và every one dung với động từ ở ngôi thứ 3 số ít. Someone và evryone dùng trong câu khẳng định, anyone dùng trong câu hỏi và câu phủ định. Sau no one thường dùng động từ ở thể khẳng định.- Ask sts to read the examples and draw the rules of using these pronouns.- Ask them to share their ideas with friends.- Ask one st to report.- Listen and give remarks.- Ask sts to give some more examples.- Ask sts to do exercise 1+ Exercise 1:- Ask sts to look at Ex1 and to do the task individually and then compare their answers with other sts.- Move round to conduct the activity.- Ask some sts to report.- Listen and give remarks.

+ Exercise 2:- Ask sts to do Ex 2 individually but because of the time limit, ask them to do the first four sentences only.- Then ask them to share the answers with their friends.- Move round to help if necessary.- Ask some sts to report. - Check and give remarks.

singular countable noun."ones": is used instead of repeating a plural nouns.

- Read the examples.- Try to find out the rules.- Some sts give answers:- Discuss the uses of these pronouns.- Some sts report.+ "Everyone, someone" are often used positive sentences.+ " anyone" can be used in negative and interrogative sentences.+ "no one" has a negative meaning and is often used in positive sentences.- Give examples.

- Give some examples- Do exercise 1 individually.- Some sts report.1. anyone 2. someone 3. anyone 4. someone 5. no one 6. everyone7. no one- Listen and correct their work if necessary.

- Do the task individually.- Share their ideas with their friends.- Report.1 . Of the three bags , I like the blue one .2 . Mai is making a fruit cake . Huong is making one too .3 . I like reading books , especially the ones about the natural world 4 . I don’t have a computer , and my father doesn’t want me to have one 5 . They let me choose a pencil , and I took the red one 6 . There are several national celebrations in Vietnam but perhapd the most meaningful one is Tet holiday .



+ Exercise 3:- Ask sts to do Ex 3 individually. - Then ask them to share the answers with their friends.- Move round to help if necessary.- Ask two sts to write their answers on the board. - Check and give remarks.

7 . We told each other both happy stories and sad ones about our lives - Listen and correct their work if necessary.

- Do the task individually.- Share their ideas with their friends.- Two sts write the answers on the board.1. tradditional 2. grand3. gifts 4. celebrating5. polite 6. good luck7. excitement.

IV./ Summary: - Summarise the main pointsV./ Home work: - prepare next lessonE. EVELUATION:..............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




A.OBJECTIVES: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to : Revision unit 8 2. Skills: practice doing exercise 3. Political thought: revision grammar, vocabularyB.TEACHING AIDS: 1. Teacher: lesson plan ,textbook , pen, 2. Students: pens, notebooks, textbooks… C. METHODS: T/Wh class, groupwork, pairwork D. CONTENTS:I. Organisation: (1’)

II./Revision: Test 45 minutes1. I am not going to the party because I've got …………….. to wear.2. I thought I heard ………….. knocking at the door.3. ……….. calls her Maggie, but her real name's Margaret.4. The earthquake destroyed …………… within a 25-mile radius.5. There was complete silence in the room. ………. said ………..6. Sarah was upset about ……….. and refused to talk to ……….7. I don’t think………….likes the film. It’s so boring. 8. Does …………mind if I eat first ?

*Key:1. nothing 2. someone 3.everyone 4.every thing 5.no one 6.anything7.something 8.anyone 9.anyone 10.anyone

III./New lesson:

Teacher’sactivities time Students’activitiesA. VOCABULARY

Fill in each blank of the sentences with 8’



146


one word from the box.Preparations; decorate; celebrate ;excited popularWrapped; represent ;influence; traditional ;exchange

1. How do people ………..New Year in your country?

2. On the first days of Tet, people often visit relatives and friends to …….New Year wishes.

3. Japanese usually ………..their houses with some small pine trees, which ……..constancy and longevity.

4. People believe that what they do on the first day of the year will ……….their luck during the whole year.

5. People usually make ……..for Tet severals weeks beforehand.

6. Tet is also the time for children to receive lucky money ………..in red envelopes.

7. Besides the ………..flowers for Tet such as peach flowers and apricot flowers, the kumquat trees are also popular throughout the country.

8. Children are always ……..about the Tet holiday.

B. GRAMMAR1. presentation:*Notes: someone; anyone; no one và every one dung với động từ ở ngôi thứ 3 số ít. Someone và evryone dùng trong câu khẳng định, anyone dùng trong câu hỏi và câu phủ định. Sau no one thường dùng động từ ở thể khẳng định.2. practiceEXERCISE 1: Complete these sentences with someone, something, anyone, anything, no one, nothing, everyone, everything.1. We arranged the meeting, but no one

came.2. Janet Jones is someone I rarely see

these days.3. She valued friendship more than

anything in the world.

3’

8’

- listen to the teacher- work individually- fill in the gáps with one word

from the box• Key:

1. celebrate 2. exchange 3. decorate 4. represent 5. influence 6. preparations 7. wrapped 8. traditional 9. excited

- recall the way to use : someone, anyone, no one, every one.

- work in pairs to complete the sentences.

- Write on the board - *key

1. no one2. some one3. anything4. anyone



4. I always get to work before anyone else.

5. While you are making dinner, I'll get on with something else.

6. Nothing has changed. Everything is the same as it was.

7. I hope everyone will be comfortable here. We try to make each guest feel at home.

8. We don't think there's anything wrong with her reading ability,

9. Hardly anyone turn up to the meeting.

EXERCISE 2: Find the mistakes in these sentences and correct them. 1. Has everyone seen Lucy recently? I

haven't seen her every day. (anyone)2. He didn't want something to do with

the arrangements for the party. (anything)

3. Normally I don't like wearing a scarf, but it was so cold I put it on. (one)

4. I couldn't fit all the boxes in the car, so I have to leave ones behind and pick it up later. (one)

5. If anyone call, tell them I'm not at home. (calls)

6. There was hardly no one on the beach. It was almost deserted. (anyone)

7. Sarah is invited to lots of parties and she goes to everyone. (everyone)

8. Have everybody remembered to bring pen and notebook? (Has)

2. production- call SS to recall the way to use : someone, anyone, no one, every one

8’

5. something6. nothing7. everyone8. anything9. anyone

- - work in pairs to complete the

sentences.- Write on the board - *key1. anyone2. anything3. one4. one5. calls6. anyone7. everyone8. has

IV./ Summary: (1’) - Summarise the main pointsV./ Home work: (1’)- prepare next lessonE. EVELUATION:Time:…………………………………………………………………………………Contents:…………………………………………………………………………….Methods:……………………………………………………………………………Result:……………………………………………………………………………….



Date of preparing:...../......./........ Period: 55UNIT 9: THE POST OFFICE

LESSON 1: READINGA.OBJECTIVES: 1. Knowledge : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to know about the Thanh Ba post office 2. Skill:Reading 3. Political thought: talk about the post officeB.TEACHING AIDS: 1. Teacher: lesson plan ,textbook , pen,handouts, cassette 2. Students: pens, notebooks, textbooks… C. METHODS: T/Wh class, groupwork, pairwork D. CONTENTS:I. Organisation: (1’)

II.Warm –up: (3’) Chatting: - Raise some questions:+ Show Ss a letter and ask: What's this ?( A letter)+ Where can you post letter ? ( At the post office) + How far is it from your house to the nearest post office ? ( ...kilometer(s) )+ How often do you go to the post office? What for? (One/twice a week. To post letter / to make a phone call/ to buy phone cards ...)+ What services do you think the post call ...)Lead in : We're going to read a text about postal service of Thanh Ba post office

III.New lessonTeacher’s activities Time Students’ activities

STEP1: PRE - READING1.New words::

- Practice reading the new words.- Listen and repeat.



149


- equip(v) (explanation): trang bị - express (a) (synonym) = very fast: rất nhanh, hoả tốc- transfer (v) (explanation) : chuyển - notify (v) (translation) : thông báo- recipient(n) (situation) : người nhận - subscribe to: ®Æt mua (b¸o) dµi h¹n - Ask sts to read the words after T. - Ask some sts to read the word againChecking: What and Where 2. Opening questions: What services do Thanh Ba post office offer to customers ?- Ask Ss to read list out as many services as they know - Check the answers with the whole class. STEP 2: WHILE - READING Task 1: - Ask Ss to read the passage quickly and work individually to do the task.- Ask Ss to exchange the answers with a friend.- Call on some Ss to give the answers in front of the class.- Give the correct answers: Task 2: - Ask S to read the questions carefully and underline the key words in each questions.- Ask S to work individually , then discuss their answers with a partner.- Call on some ss to write the answers on board.- Feedback and give correct answers:=> Task 3: - Ask S to read the statements carefully and find the evidence- Ask S to work individually , then discuss their answers with a partner.- Call on some Ss to give the answers in front of the class.- Give the correct answers:

STEP 3: POS-READING: - Ask Ss to work in groups to answer the questions:

5’

5’

7’

10’

7 ‘

- Some individuals read the words aloud

- Suggested answer: Give Ss some services at the post office: + Mail and parcel service: chuyÓn th vµ bu phÈm + Money transfer service; chuyÓn tiÒn + Press distribution : ph¸t hµnh b¸o chÝ + Flower telegram service: ®iÖn hoa + Telephone and fax service: ®iÖn tho¹i vµ fax + Phone card and Internet cards : thÎ ®iÖn tho¹i vµ Internet + Postal savings: tiÕt kiÖm bu ®iÖn

- Read the words and do the task.- Some ss answer and others listen.*Key:1. c 2. b 3. d 4. c

- Read the sentences and do the task .- Some Ss answer in front of the class.

*Key:1. Thanh Ba post office is equipped with advanced technology and a spacious and pleasent office. 2. They are : Mail and Parcel Service, Express Money Transfer Service, Phone Calls and Faxes, Press Distribution. 3. They are air mail, surface mail and the Express Mail Service. 4. It is used for notifying the recipient of the time and place to receive the call.5. You will have to subscribe to your favourite newspapers and magazines.



1. Which service provided by Thanh Ba Post Office do you think is the most important and why? 2. What services do you think Thanh Ba Post Office should have in the future?- Go around and offer help.- Call on some Ss to give the answers in front of the class.- Correct the Ss’ mistakes and give the comments. Cue 1: advanced technologyCue 2: staffCue 3: mail and parcel serviceCue 4: Express money transferCue 5: phone call and faxesCue 6: press distribution

8’- Work in pairs to - Some pairs present in front of the class.*Key:1. The post ofice opens daily from 7 a.m. to 9 p.m.2. We offer a very competitive for parcels under 15 kg.3. We also have the Express Mail Service and your EMS mail will be delivered in the shortest possible time.4. We offer a speedy and secure sercice of transferring money in less than 24 hours.

Some S talk in front of the class..S: Thanh Ba post office is equipped with advanced technology.S: Their staff is well trained, thoughtful and courteous.S: They provide good mail and parcel service.S1: They will send your money in less than 24 hours.S: They have ordinary telephone call service and messenger call service as well as fax transmission.S2, S3 ............ : repeatS1: They have newspaper or magazine delivery service.S2,S3 ....... : repeat




Date of preparing:...../......./........ Period:56UNIT 9: THE POST OFFICE

LESSON 2: SPEAKINGA.OBJECTIVES: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to make requests and talk about different postal services. 2. Skill: Speaking 3. Political thought: Talk about different postal servicesB.TEACHING AIDS: 1. Teacher: textbook, handouts. 2. Students: pens,textbooks . notebooks… C.METHODS: T/Wh class, groupwork, pairwork D.CONTENTS:I. Organization:


II.Warm up: 5’Teacher’s activities Student’s activities

Jumbled words:- Give out a list of jumbled words (prepared before hand on a poster)- Give Ss 2 minutes to prepare individually, and then ask them to go to the board to write down the correct words.

1. mali2. nomey trerfans

- Give feedback.Answer keys:1. mail 2. money transfer 3. fax 4. press delivery- Ask: What are these ? ( postal services)Introduce the lesson: Today we are going to talk about some postal services.



3. xaf4. repss deervyli

III. New lesson:Teacher’s activities time Students’ activitiesSTEP 1: PRE – SPEAKING*Listening task- Give instruction:A man is at the post office and he's taking a postal service. Listen for the first time and answer the following questions:1. What service is the man taking :2. What does he want to fax ?)3. What's his fax number ? ( )4. How much is this service ?)5. What exactly did the man say to make the request - Ask Ss to give answers.- Give feedback.- As Ss to open their book (p.103) and practice the dialogue between the man and the clerkSTEP 2: WHILE – SPEAKINGActivity 2: Mapped Dialogue - Draw on the board two haces and introduce the scene This is Mr. Minh This is the clerk at a post office Mr. Minh wants to have a telephone line installed at his home.

Good morning Good ... Can I ..........?

I'd ... telephone line installed... . ..address...?

234 Tran Hung Dao st ..... When ...? ..one week ..... Friday ? ... have.... telephone...?

....how much ...? fill in the form?

10’

10’

c. Work in pairsd. *key:

1. fax transmission) 2. a document 3. 04.7223898 4. 5.000 dongs 5. Could you help me to send this document to my office by fax ?)

Example dialogue: B. Good morning A. Good morning. Can I help you ?B. Yes, I'd like to have a telephone line installed at home, please A. Yes, sir. What's you address, please? B. 243 Tran Hung Dao street. When will it be installed, please? A. We'll make it ready one week after registration B. Can you make it on Friday ?A. Certainly. Do you have a telephone? B. Yes. How much is that? A. It's 200.000 dongs. You can see the rates on the desk. Would you please fill in this form?B. Yes... here you are


Mr MinhThe clerk


...here you are thanks - Get Ss to practice the dialogue in open pairs, then in closed pairs A. Thank you Activity 3: - Ask Ss to work in pairs and make a similar dialogue using one of the two situations given in their books (p.104)- Go around the class and give help when needed- Call on some pairs and ask Ss to act out the conversationSTEP 3: POST – SPEAKINGRole- play - Ask Ss to think of situations that they themselves need to go to the post office - Get Ss act out the conversation thta may happen there - Caal some pairs to the front of the class to act out the conversation

10’

7’

- work in groups- roleplay


Date of preparing:...../......./........ Period:57UNIT 9: THE POST OFFICE

LESSON 3: LISTENINGA.OBJECTIVES: 1. Knowledge: Students will be able to listen to a monologue about the development of Vietnam's telephone system for details. 2. Skill: Listening 3. Political thought: Talk about Vietnam's telephone systemB.TEACHING AIDS: 1. Teacher: textbook, handouts. 2. Students: pens,textbooks . notebooks… C.METHODS: T/Wh class, groupwork, pairwork D.CONTENTS:I. Organization:




II.Warm up Guessing game: What is it? (5’)

- T gives cues and Ss guess what the thing is by raising. Yes/ No questions Cues: 1. It was invented in the 1870 2. It was invented by Alexander Graham 3. IT Is used to transmit in along distance Example exchange:T: It was invented in the 1870s Ss: Is it the telegraph? T: No, it isn't Lead in: You can see the telephone system has developed quickly in the last few yeaes. Today we are going to listen to a monologue about such a development

III. New lessonTeacher’s activities time Students’ activitiesSTEP 1: PRE - LISTENING1. Pre-teach vocabulary:- Commune(n) :công cộng, chung-. rural network(n): mạng lưới nông thôn - capacity(n) (translation): công suất , năng suất- subseriber(n) (definition ): thuê bao - Checking: R.O. R2. Prediction ( handouts ) - Ask Ss to read through the statements in the Multiple Choise section and predict the answers .- Ask to compare their prediction with their partners - Write Ss' prediction on the BbStatements predict Check 1. According to the passage, Vietnam ranks... for growth in telephone numbers

5’

5’

- Copy the words and phrases.- Listen and repeat.- Read the words in pairs and correct each other’s mistakes.

- Listen to their teacher.- predict the statements



2. Vietnam is among the ... coutries in the world that have more than 2 milion telephones 3. In 1996, Vietnam began upgrading. Its ... networks 4. According to the interview, at presnt,...% of communes across Vietnam have telephone services 5. Which aspect of development in Vietnam's telecommunications is not mentioned in the listening passage ?

STEP 2: WHILE - LISTENINGActivity 1: Checking prediction - Ask Ss to listen to the monologue and check their prediction - Let Ss listen for three times - Ask Ss to report the results - Give feedback Activity2: Comprehesion questions - Run through the questions on page 106 to make sure Ss understand all of them .- Ask Ss to listen to the tape again( one, twice or three times) and find the answers to the questions given - Get Ss to compare their answers with their partners - Give feeback where needed Expected answers:Game: A MARGICAL HAT - Get Ss to play this game in 2 teams - Let Ss choose a box Box 1: Lucky box !Box 2: How many telephones were there in Vietnam in 1996?Box 3: Which coutry has the highest growth in telephone numbers ?Box 4: Lucky box !Box 5 : Lucky box !Box 6: How many percent of communes in vietnam have telephone services ?Box 7: What is the rank of Vietnam for growth in telephone numbers?STEP 3: POST - LISTENING - Ask Ss to work in group to discuss” how many

7’

15’’

5’

- Listen and do the task.- Compare their answers.- Check their answer.

Answer keys :1. second 2. 30 3. fixed telephone 4. 93 5. The change of international telephone system

- Practice talking in groups.- play game.1. China has the best growth in telephone numbers 2. In the early 1990s, there were only 140.000 telephonews in Viet Nam.3. In 1996, the fixed telephone numbers were changed from six to seven digist in Ha Noi and Ho Chi Minh City as well as five to six digist in other provinces 4. In 1996 5. There are 6.014 communal post offices in Viet Nam



telephone networks are there in Vietnam now?- Go round to check the activities and to make sure that sts are working effectively.- Ask one or two sts to present in front of the whole class.- Check and give remarks

- work in groups


Date of preparing:...../......./.2013 Period:58UNIT 9: THE POST OFFICE

LESSON 4: WRITINGA.OBJECTIVES: 1. Knowledge: students will be able to write a letter to express satisfaction 2. Skill: writing 3. Political thought: write a letter to express satisfaction B.TEACHING AIDS: 1. Teacher: textbook, handouts. 2. Students: pens,textbooks . notebooks… C.METHODS: T/Wh class, groupwork, pairwork D.CONTENTS:I. Organization: (1’)


II.Warm up (5’) Game: Shark attack( the word to find: Post office) - Draw 10 dashes on the board - Give Ss the clue: This is place - Ask Ss to guess each letter of the whole woord- Give 1 mark for each correct letter For each wrong guess, the boy has to move down 1 step. If the boy is at the last step, the shark will attack him The game goes on till the word in uncovered Ss will loose if the shark reaches the boy before the word is found Lead in: - Do you often go to the post office ? -What do you go to the office for?

III/ New lesson:




Teacher’s activities time Students’ activitiesSTEP 1: PRE WRITINGClass discussion - Set the scene and give out the topic for the discussion:T: tell me some services at Thanh Ba post office?T: Now, imagine you have been using some of these services. Tell me what you are satisfied with and what you are dissatisfied with

a. Act as instructor and write shortly Ss' ideas on the board

Satisfied DissatisfiedThe opening hours?

(close too early)

The security condition ?

(no one looks after the motorbikes)

The attitude of the staff?

(polite though )

The prices ?The punctuality of delivery of letter and newpapers?The position of the post office ?The quality of the equipment

Example board lay - out - Clarify the writing task :The director of Thanh Ba post office invited you to write a letter to him describing the quality of thr services Revision of writing a letter showing satisfaction or dissatisfaction: - Elicit the outline from Ss * Dear Mr. director * State the reason for writing ( I am writing about the quality of the servies your post office offers) * Say whether you are satisfied or dissatisfied with these services, or both * List out some evidences to support your idea * (Firstly ... secondly... thirdly ... finally ) * You suggestion *End the letter politely(yours sincerely, yours faithfully. Etc)STEP 2: WHILE – WRITING- work in groups of 4- Ask Ss to write the letter on a sheet of paper - Go around the class and gives help when needed

10’

5’

15’

- listen and answer the question:Ss: mail and parcel serces, phone call, press distribution, etc

b. work in pairsc. complete the

table

Example writing :Dear Mr. Director, I am writing about the quality of the sercices of your post office .However, there is still something that I am dissaitisfied with Firstly, the post office is closed too early. Sometimes I need to make an emergent phone call after 9 and this service is not available Secondly, the prices for sending oversea mails are far too expensive compared with other post office In the disstict Finally, there is no one to look affter the motobikes of the customers outside I would suggest that the post office should open until 10 p.m and that there should be someone to keep an eye on the motorbikes of customers. I'm looking forward to hearing from you Yours sincerely Nguyen Thanh Nhan

158



Date of preparing:...../......./2013 Period: 59UNIT 9: THE POST OFFICE

LESSON 5: LANGUAGEA.OBJECTIVES: 1. Knowledge: - distinguish the sounds / sp/, /st/ and /sk/

- use defining and non- defining relative clauses appropriately 2. Skill: Listening + doing exercise 3. Political thought: Talk about different postal servicesB.TEACHING AIDS: 1. Teacher: textbook, handouts. 2. Students: pens,textbooks . notebooks… C.METHODS: T/Wh class, groupwork, pairwork D.CONTENTS:I. Organization:


II.Warm up (5’)- look at the picture and call the name òf the picture a. b. c.

spoon, scanner, stamp, /sp/ /sk/ /st /, T reads the words which they have found and introduces the clusters /sp/, /st /, and /sk/

III. New lesson


http://images.google.com.vn/imgres?imgurl=http://charlestonsamplers.com/Rice_SpoonBa.jpg&imgrefurl=http://charlestonsamplers.com/RiceSpoons.htm&h=362&w=500&sz=13&hl=vi&start=3&tbnid=1NoHFlXU4dpmwM:&tbnh=94&tbnw=130&prev=/images%3Fq%3Dspoon%26gbv%3D2%26hl%3Dvi%26sa%3DG

http://images.google.com.vn/imgres?imgurl=http://www.netbanker.com/Images/scanner.jpg&imgrefurl=http://www.netbanker.com/remote_deposit_capture/&h=501&w=747&sz=31&hl=vi&start=2&tbnid=7ncxwVkg5Y5iGM:&tbnh=95&tbnw=141&prev=/images%3Fq%3Dscanner%26gbv%3D2%26hl%3Dvi%26sa%3DG

http://images.google.com.vn/imgres?imgurl=http://apgar.net/virginia/images/apgar%2520stamp.gif&imgrefurl=http://apgar.net/virginia/Stamp_Article.html&h=400&w=335&sz=67&hl=vi&start=2&tbnid=bIwX8MG6Fx-s2M:&tbnh=124&tbnw=104&prev=/images%3Fq%3Dstamp%26gbv%3D2%26hl%3Dvi%26sa%3DG



Teacher’activities time Students’activitiesI- PRONUNCIATION1. Distinguish sounds- T models the three clusters /sp/, /st /, and /sk/ for few times and explains how to pronounce them- T gets Ss to read the words in each column out loud in chorus for a few more times. T listens and corrects if Ss pronounce the words incorrectly2. Practicing sentences containing the target sounds-Ask Ss to work in pairs and take turn to read aloud the dialogue- Go around to listen and take notes of the typical errors- Call on some pairs to read the dialogue again and provides corrective feedback

II- GRAMMAR:STEP 1: PRESENTATIONDefining relative clauses and non-defining relative clauses1. Defining relative clauses

Subject Object possessiveFor personFor thing

Who/thatWhich/that

Who(m)/thatWhich/that

WhoseWhose/ of which

M§QH x¸c ®Þnh thêng ®øng sau the+N. ngoµi ra nã cßn ®c dïng sau m¹o tõ a, an +N or Ns kh«ng cã the, vµ nh÷ng ®t nh all, none,anybody, somebody….Ex: I like the ruler which my mother bought from China very muchThat thêng theo sau c¸c tõ nh: something, anything, everything, nothing, all vµ trong so s¸nh bËc nhÊtEx: Is there anything that we must pay attention to?

2.Non- defining relative clausesSubject Object possessive

For personFor thing

WhoWhich

Who(m)Which

WhoseWhose/ of which

-Là loại mệnh đề không cần thiết vì danh từ trước nó đã được xác định, không có nó câu vẫn đủ nghĩa.

-Mệnh đề quan hệ không xác định được ngăn cách với mệnh đề chính bởi dấu phẩy.

*Cách nhận biết mệnh đề quan hệ không xácđịnh: dựa vào danh từ đứng trước mệnh đề quan

8’

5’

5’

Individual work, pair work and whole class

Pair work

Whole classEx: The students who/that come from Japan work very hard

Ex: William Shakespeare, who was in Stratford-on-Avon, wrote the play”Romeo and Juliet”

Ex: He told me about Susan, who he just met at the party

Ex: There were a lot of students gathering at the hall, all of whom looked excitedHe was studying all the cameras in the shop, some

160


IV./ Summary: (1’) - Summarise the main pointsV./ Home work: (1’) - prepare next lesson, do exercise 2(p.100)E. EVELUATION:Time:…………………………………………………………………………………Contents:…………………………………………………………………………….Methods:……………………………………………………………………………Result:……………………………………………………………………………….


A.OBJECTIVES: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to : Revision unit 9 2. Skills: practice doing exercise 3. Political thought: revision grammar, vocabularyB.TEACHING AIDS: 1. Teacher: lesson plan ,textbook , pen, 2. Students: pens, notebooks, textbooks… C. METHODS: T/Wh class, groupwork, pairwork D. CONTENTS:I. Organisation:

II/ Warm up: Test 15 minutes Choose the best answer.1. Post office is a place ______ you can buy stamps, mail letters and packages, and

receive mail.a. that b. which c. where d. in which

2. Do you know the date ______ we have to hand in the essay?a. which b. in which c. on that d. when

3. My uncle ______ you met yesterday is a lawyer.a. which b. who c. whose d. to whom

4. The council is in discussion with Lord Thomas, ______ land most of the village is built on.a, who b. whom c. whose d. that

5. These adults, ______ come to my night class, are very eager to learn.a. whose b. who c. that d. when

6. Regina, ______ you have never met before, is a genius in painting.a. that b. whose c. whom d. whoever

7. The paintings Mr Flowers has in his house are worth around $ 100,000.a. which b. whose c. what d. whom

8. Oxford, ______ attracts many tourists, is often crowded in the summer.a. that b. which c. whose d. where

9. It's the best film ______ has ever been made about madness.



161


a. which b. whom c. whose d. that10.She cycled from London to Glasgow, ______ is pretty good for a woman of 75.

a. that b. what c. which d. where

III/ New lessonTeacher’activities time Students’activities

A. VOCABULARY.EXERCISE1: Complete these sentences with the correct form of the words from the box.

compete distribute transmit space post

courteous transfer subscribe deliver satisfy

1. All mail ……….were suspended during the strike.

2. It's only common ………..to thank someone when they help.

3. Do you wish to take out a full twelve-month ……..to the journal?

4. We offer a wide range' of goods at very ………….prices.

5. If you are …………with our service, please write to the manager,

6. This ticket is only used by the person who bought it. It is not………...

7. Fax ………….has now become a cheap and convenient way to transmit texts over distances.

8. White walls can give a feeling of …………

B. GRAMMAR:

EXERCISE 2: Write all the pronouns possible to complete each sentence. Write Ø if the sentence is correct without adding a pronoun. 1. We talk about the party ……..Sarah

wants to organise for my birthday.2. To get to Frank's house, take the main

road ……..bypasses the village.3. The paintings ……….Mr Flowers has

in his house are worth around £100,000.

4. Mrs Richmond, …….is 42, has three children,

5. Don is a friend ………..I stayed with in Australia.

- read the sentences- complete the sentences1. deliveries2. courtesy3. subscription4. competitive5. dissatisfied6. transferable7. transmission8. spaciousness.

- Recall the pronouns- Work in pairs*key: 1. which/ that/ 2. which/ that3. which/ that4. who5. who(m)/ that/ Ø6. that/ Ø 7. whose8. which9. that/ Ø10. that/ Ø



6. She was probably the hardest working student ……..I've ever taught.

7. Stevenson is an architect ……..designs have won international praise.

8. The Roman coins, ………a local farmer came across in a field, are now displayed in the National Museum.

9. Dorothy said something …….I couldn't hear clearly.

10.There was a little we could do to help her.

EXERCISE 3: Write the information in brackets as a relative clause (defining or non-defining) in an appropriate place in the sentence. Give alternative relative pronouns if possible. (Use - to indicate ‘no relative pronoun’.)

1. The problems faced by the company are being resolved. (I'll look at these in detail in a moment.)

2. She was greatly influenced by her farther. (she adored him)

3. Parents are being asked to take part in the survey. (their children are between four and six)

4. He isn't looking forward to the time. (he will have to leave at that time)

5. He pointed to the stairs. (they led down to the cellar)

- work in groups- key:1. The problems faced by the company, which I’ll look at in detail in a moment, are being resolved.

2. She was greatly influenced by her father, who/ whom she adored.3. Parents whose children are between four and six are being asked to take part in the survey. 4. He isn't looking forward to the time when he will have to leave. 5. He pointed to the stairs which/that led down to the cellar.




Date of preparing:...../......./2013 Period: 61TEST YOURSELF C

A.OBJECTIVES: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson students can do the exercises by themselves by usingwhat they learnt 2. Skill: 3 skills :listen + reading + writing 3. Political thought: do the exercises by themselvesB.TEACHING AIDS: 1.Teacher: textbook , poster, CD, CD player 2. Students: pens, text books… C.METHODS: T/WH CLASS, individuallyD. CONTENTS:I/Organisation:

II/ Revision: noIII/New lesson:

Teacher’s activities time Students’ activitiesI/ LISTENINGT lets sts listen the dialogueSts listen three times then give the answerT remarks

II/ READING:T asks sts to read the text Sts work in pair to discuss the answer T lets sts give the answer loudly

10’

10’

Expected answer :

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

11

g b e f d j h k c a i

Expected answer :1. They gather before midnight and select twelve grapes from a large bunch.2. Because the twelve grapes are symbols of the twelve months of the year.



164


III./ PRONUNCIATIONT reads the words Sts listen then choose the words they listenT asks sts to do the exercise in groups of fourSts do then come to the board to writeOthers remark and correctT gives comments

IV/ WRITINGT explains the way to doSts work in individualsT goes around and helps themT asks sts to give their task ( 5 sts)T will mark at home

7’

13’

3. In Iran4. It lasts for thirteen days.5. They read from the Koran , then all embrace each other and say. “ May you live 100 years”

Expected answer :A. 1. glean 2. fry 3. thrive 4. overthrowB. 1. Earth is a planet which can support life.2. The book is about a girl who runs away from home.3. A dictionary is a book which gives you the meaning of words.

SAMPLETet is one of the most important traditional holiday in ourcountry. People always prepare for it well in advance. The house is usually cleaned and decorrected with beautiful things such flowers and pictures. Peach flowers and kumquat trees are very typical at tet . During the tet people enjoy traditional foods such as banh chung, fruit jams…., On the first day of Lunar new year, people often go to pagodas or church then they visit their relatives . I enjoy Tet holidays because we often have “ lucky money” at Tet and we can get up later than usual . The only thing I don’t like at Tet is that the weather is wet and cold.




Date of preparing:...../......./........ Period: 62UNIT 10 NATURE IN DANGER

LESON 1: READINGA.OBJECTIVES: 1. Knowledge: - Sts know about the danger caused by human to environment 2. Skill: Reading 3. Political thought: talk about natural in danger & how to protect themB.TEACHING AIDS: 1.Teacher: textbook , Picture, poster, CD, CD player 2. Students: pens, text books… C.METHODS: T/WH CLASS, GROUP WORKS, PAIRS WORK D. CONTENTS:I/Organisation:

II/ Warm up: Warm up(5m): - Ask Ss to look at the picture in the textbook and read the facts about endangered species, then work in pair to discuss the questions: 1. What do you understand from the facts ? 2. Can you explain why the numbers of these animals become small? - Check the answers with the whole class.

- Look at the picture and answer the questions.* Suggested answer 1. The facts above show that the numbers of some wild or rare animals such as cheetahs, pandas and Siberian tigers become small or extinct. 2. The numbers of these animals become small because they are killed for food, medicines, fur or skin

- What should we do to protect the life of the wild animals To answer the questions,today we are going to learn unit ten- lesson 1.

III/ New lesson:



166


Teacher’s activities Time Students’ activitiesSTEP1: PRE - READING *. New words:+ human race = human beings:nhân loại + affect (v ): ảnh hưởng + prohibit = ban h ành, c ấm + result (v ) k ết qu ả + pollutant (n ): chất gây ô nhiễm + interference (n :gây cản trở- Ask sts to read the words after T. - Ask some sts to read the word again* checking by R,O.R

STEP2: WHILE – READING:

Task 1: - Ask Ss to read the passage quickly and work individually to do the task.- Ask Ss to exchange the answers with a friend.- Call on some Ss to give the answers in front of the class.- Give the correct answers:

Task 2:- Ask S to read the sum up of each paragraph carefully and underline the key words .- Ask S to work individually , then discuss their answers with a partner.- Call on some ss to give the answers in front of the class.- Feedback and give correct answers:

Task3: :

- Ask S to read the statements carefully and find the answer- Ask S to work individually , then

6’

5’

7’

6’

- Listen to their T and take notes.



- Some ss answer and others listen.*KEY1. extinct 2. protect 3. decreasing 4. pollutants 5. endangered 6. interference

- Read the text and do the task .- Some Ss answer in front of the class.

*KEYS

1. C 2. B 3. A 4. C

- Work in pairs to answer the questions in the book.- Some pairs present in front of the class.

*KEYS:

1. Four ways that people change the world are: + They are changing the environment by building cities and villages. + They are affecting the water supply by using water for industry and agriculture.



discuss their answers with a partner.- Call on some Ss to give the answers in front of the class.- Give the correct answers:

STEP 3: POST – READING:- Ask Ss to work in groups to find out why some animals have become extinct. - Go around and offer help.- Call on some Ss to give the answers in front of the class.- Correct the Ss’ mistakes and give the comments..

9’

7’

+ They are changing weather conditions by cutting down trees in the forests. + They are destroying the air by adding pollutants like smoke from factories and fumes from cars.2. The serious consequences of people’s interference with the environment are: + many kind 0f rare animals are killed + the environment where these animals are living is badly destroyed. + the numbers of rare animals are decreasing so rapidly that they are in danger of becoming extinct.3. Many things have been done to protect endangered nature such as: + many organizations have been set up and money has been raised to save rare animals. + thousands of national parks have been established. + laws have been passed to prohibit killing endangered animals. - Discuss in groups and find out the reason of some animals’ extinction. - Some S give the answers in front of the class.*Suggested answer: People kill animals for fur, skin and food. People keep animals as pets. People hunt or capture animals for recreation or entertainment

IV./ Summary: (1’) - Summarise the main pointsV./ Home work: (1’) - prepare next lessonE. EVALUATION:Time:…………………………………………………………………………………Contents:…………………………………………………………………………….



Methods:……………………………………………………………………………Result:……………………………………………………………………………….

Date of preparing:...../......./........ Period:63UNIT 10: NATURE IN DANGER

LESSON 2: SPEAKINGA.OBJECTIVES: 1. Knowledge: : - Students can develop their speaking skill by talking about nature in danger and measures for protecting the environment. 2. Skill: speaking 3. Political thought: talk about natural in danger and suggest meansures to protect it.B.TEACHING AIDS: 1. Teacher: textbook , Picture, poster, CD, CD player 2. Students: pens, text books… C.METHODS: T/WH class, group works, pairworks D. CONTENTS:I/Organisation:

II/ Revision: (5’)T introduces new lesson by asking some questions:- Why do we call some animals such as tigers, bears, elephants, whales endangered animals?- What should we do to protect and save them*key:- Because they are hunted or killed in large number that they are in danger of

becoming extinct- As a student we should stop eating and using products which made from animals

III/ New lesson:Teacher’s activities time Students’ activitiesSTEP1: PRE- SPEAKING: * Vocabulary:+ Cultivation (n): sù cÇy cÊy, sù trång



169

Lesson plan grade 11 school year: 2013 - 2014trät + to discharge:th¶i ra (synonym)+ to discourage(v): thuyÕt phôc ai kh«ng lµm g× + to capture (v) : b¾t giam

- Ask Ss to give the Vietnamses equivalent (if necessary) Checking Checking Vocabulary: slap the boarb

STEP2: WHILE – YOU SPEAKINGTask 2: + Task1- Ask Ss to work in pairs to do the task. - Move round to help if necessary.- Ask some pairs to answer in front of the class.- Give comments and corrective feedback.- Suggested answers: Reasons why nature is threatened

Measures for protecting endangered nature

Killing endangered animals for fur, skin and food

Killing endangered .... should be banned

Keeping animals as pets.

Keeping .... should be discouraged

Burning the forests, Cutting down trees for wood

Planting trees should be encouraged

Using fertilizers and pesticides for cultivation

We should decrease the use of fertilizers and .....

Discharging chemical pollutants into the environment

Discharging ...... should be prohibited


STEP3: POST –SPEAKING: *Making conversations - Teacher asks Ss to make a coversation, using the passive voice of should to combine the ideas in activity 1 with activity 2 - Model the coversation with a good student - Have two studets do the same, looking at their parter when they speak - Ask Ss to work in pairs simultaneously - Move around if there is time

5’

15’

15’

- Work in pairs to do the task.- Some Ss talk in front of the class.Suggested answers: A: I think burning the forests is the most important because animals and plants will die, which causes the air polluted. B: As for me, I think cutting down trees for wood is the most important because without trees and plants, most water would run off and cause not only erosion but also foods

- Work in pairs to make the dialogue.

Suggested answers: A: Nowsaday People are killing endangered animals for fur , skin and food B: Killing endangered animals for fur, skin and food should be banne

- Some pairs present in front of the class.

Sample conversation S1: Do you know these days people are cutting down a lot of trees in the forrest for wood?S2: Yes, I do / Oh, relly? I thinhk laws should be introduced to stop people from cutting trees for wood S1: You're right. And planting trees should be encouraged S2: Yeah..



IV./ Summary: (1’) - Summarise the main pointsV./ Home work: (1’) - prepare next lessonE. EVALUATION:Time:…………………………………………………………………………………Contents:…………………………………………………………………………….Methods:……………………………………………………………………………Result:……………………………………………………………………………….

Date of preparing:...../......./........ Period: 64UNIT 10 : NATURE IN DANGER

LESSON 3: LISTENINGA.OBJECTIVES: 1. Knowledge: know that national park are in danger of being destroyed. 2. Skill: listening 3. Political thought: listen to some national parks in USA B.TEACHING AIDS: 1.Teacher: textbook , Picture, poster, CD, CD player 2. Students: pens, text books… C.METHODS: T/ Ss; groups work ; pairs work D.CONTENTS:D. CONTENTS:I/Organisation:

II/ Warm up: (5’)What nationnal parks in Vietnam and in the world do you know? a. b. c. d. e

Expected answer: a. Cat Ba National Park- hai phong b. Cat Tien National Park –lam dongc. Bach Ma National Park-hue d. Phong Nha National Park –quang binhe. Cuc Phuong National Park- ninh bình



171

http://images.google.com.vn/imgres?imgurl=http://www.catbasunriseresort.com/CmsImage/gioithieu1.gif&imgrefurl=http://www.catbasunriseresort.com/&h=549&w=540&sz=196&hl=vi&start=1&tbnid=k-3Z0N2w921h4M:&tbnh=133&tbnw=131&prev=/images%3Fq%3Dcat%2Bba%26gbv%3D2%26hl%3Dvi%26sa%3DG

http://images.google.com.vn/imgres?imgurl=http://www.vietlandscape.com.vn/news/images/stories/tour/taynguyen/DakLak.jpg&imgrefurl=http://www.vietlandscape.com.vn/news/content/view/33/&h=300&w=300&sz=37&hl=vi&start=25&tbnid=j-95O4Eu2jeszM:&tbnh=116&tbnw=116&prev=/images%3Fq%3Dcat%2Btien%26start%3D21%26gbv%3D2%26hl%3Dvi%26sa%3DN

http://images.google.com.vn/imgres?imgurl=http://www.bachma.vnn.vn/images/BM_summit.JPG&imgrefurl=http://www.bachma.vnn.vn/&h=480&w=640&sz=65&hl=vi&start=1&tbnid=P-Y0WdVRoqx9QM:&tbnh=103&tbnw=137&prev=/images%3Fq%3Dbach%2Bma%26gbv%3D2%26hl%3Dvi%26sa%3DG

http://images.google.com.vn/imgres?imgurl=http://www4.ttvnol.com/uploaded2/hongsonn/dsc_9710.jpg&imgrefurl=http://vespavn.com/forums/3/7636/ShowThread.aspx&h=480&w=640&sz=75&hl=vi&start=39&tbnid=sJqW6HJq6vu_4M:&tbnh=103&tbnw=137&prev=/images%3Fq%3Dphong%2Bnha%26start%3D36%26gbv%3D2%26ndsp%3D18%26hl%3Dvi%26sa%3DN

http://images.google.com.vn/imgres?imgurl=http://www.footprintsvietnam.com/gallery/ninhbinh_cucphuong/ninhbinh_cucphuong1.jpg&imgrefurl=http://www.footprintsvietnam.com/gallery/ninhbinh_cucphuong/ninhbinh_cucphuong1.htm&h=347&w=565&sz=46&hl=vi&start=1&tbnid=LEqJ7N3rzbK0_M:&tbnh=82&tbnw=134&prev=/images%3Fq%3Dcuc%2Bphuong%26gbv%3D2%26ndsp%3D18%26hl%3Dvi%26sa%3DN


III. New lesson: Teacher’activities Tim

e Students’activities

STEP 1: PRE – LISTENING *New words :+ Scenic features (n) đặc điểm phong cảnh +Approximately (adv) khoang chưng + Devasting(a) tan pha, pha huy+Vehicles (n): xe cộ+Maintenance (n) sư giư gin; sư duy tri+Completely(adv) hoàn toàn- T explains the meaning and read the words as model and then asks Ss to practice reading these words- checking by R.O.RT introduces the tapecript: You are going to hear a passage about nationals parks in US.

STEP 2: WHILE – LISTENING1. Task 1: T/ F statements:- Listen to the passage and decide if the statements are true or false- Before listening, ask Ss to read through the statements to understand them and underline keys words.- Play the tape once for Ss to listen and do the task- Check the answer with the whole class. If many Ss cannot answer the questions, T plays the tape one or two more times and pauses at the answer for them to catch

2.Task2 : Answering the questions:- work in pairs- T rúns thruogh the questions - T plays the tape again for Ss to do the task.- After playing the tape, T gets Ss to work in pairs and check their answers- T calls on some Ss to give the answers and elicits feedback from other Ss. STEP 3: POST – LISTENING :

5’

10’

13’


Individual work1. T 2. T 3. F4. T 5. T

Task 21. There are 52 national parks in the National Parks in the United States2. Millions of people visit national parks every year3. + Rare animals are killed or hunted for fur, skin or other parts+ Trees are cut down for food+Large areas of national parks experience desvasting fires caused by careless people+ The increasing number of visitors is harming the parks due to the pollution from their vehicles4. – Rare animals and trees should be protected- Fires caused by careless people should be limited- Pollution from visitors vehicles should be decreased and many should be raised for the park’s staff and maintenance of their resourcesGroup work

Whole class*Key:1. It’s about a national park


http://images.google.com.vn/imgres?imgurl=http://hotinhtam.vnweblogs.com/gallery/1022/previews-med/01530017.jpg&imgrefurl=http://hotinhtam.vnweblogs.com/print/1022/21692&h=528&w=480&sz=72&hl=vi&start=41&tbnid=wT0X4eaAIg4TUM:&tbnh=132&tbnw=120&prev=/images%3Fq%3Dcuc%2Bphuong%26start%3D36%26gbv%3D2%26ndsp%3D18%26hl%3Dvi%26sa%3DN

http://images.google.com.vn/imgres?imgurl=http://www.footprintsvietnam.com/gallery/ninhbinh_cucphuong/ninhbinh_cucphuong1.jpg&imgrefurl=http://www.footprintsvietnam.com/gallery/ninhbinh_cucphuong/ninhbinh_cucphuong1.htm&h=347&w=565&sz=46&hl=vi&start=1&tbnid=LEqJ7N3rzbK0_M:&tbnh=82&tbnw=134&prev=/images%3Fq%3Dcuc%2Bphuong%26gbv%3D2%26ndsp%3D18%26hl%3Dvi%26sa%3DN


- work in groups and look at the picture and answer the questions:

1. What are the pictures about? Are they in the forest or a national park?2. What can you see in the pictures?3. Why do governments set up these places?

7’

2. We can see trees, plants and animals3. They set up national parks to protect and save endangered amimals


Date of preparing:...../......./........ Period: 65UNIT 10 : NATURE IN DANGER

LESSON 4: WRITINGA.OBJECTIVES: 1. Knowledge: : - understand the information about Cat Ba National park

- Write a description of a location. 2. Skill: writing 3. Political thought: Description of Cat Ba National parkB.TEACHING AIDS: 1.Teacher: textbook , Picture, poster, 2. Students: pens, text books… C.METHODS: T/ Ss; group work ; pair work D. CONTENTS:I/Organisation:

II/ Warm up: (5’) Game; Guessing game Show the back of a picture of a National Pak to the Ss. Teacher gives some information about the piture - Ask Ss to guess what the national park is + It has a lot of tropical forests, beautiful landscapes rare animals + It is in the North- East of Vietnam + it is on an island 20 km east of Hai phong Expectect answer: It is Cat Ba National Park Lead in: Have you ever been to Cat Ba?



173


If Ss say yes, ask Ss: When did you go? What is Cat Ba like? If Ss say No: Would you like to know some information about Cat Ba ?To day I would like to introduce to you some more information about Cat Ba national park III.New lesson:Teacher’sactivities Time Students’activitiesSTEP1: PRE-WRITING1.Vocabulary:+ coastal waters(n):vịnh,ven biển + abundant:(adj) = plentiful, nhiều, phong phú (synonym)+ Ha = hectare + stone tool(n): (picture): đồ đá + human bone(n) : xương người - Checking Vocabulary: W&W 2. Questions and answers: Pair work Ask Ss to read the information of Cat Ba National Park Ask Ss some questions Cat Ba National Park1. Where is Cat Ba National Park located?2. What are the features of Cat Ba National Park?3. How large is it?4. What do you know about the animals and plants in Cat Ba National Park?5. What are some of historic features of the parks?……..STEP 2: WHILE-WRITINGWriting a description of a location - Ask Ss to write a short desciption of Cat Ba National Park, using following prompts:Cat Ba national Park/ situated/ Cat Ba island. 120 km/ Ha Noi/ 20 km east/ Hai Phong Cat Ba/ The only site/ Vietnam/ endowed/ tropical forests/ coastal waters with sand beaches/ / abundant natural resources/ landscapes/ rare animals/ plants./ It/ cover/ 15,200 ha. Cat Ba/ preserve / 300 species of fish / 40 kinds of animals / 150 birds / 620 plants.Stone tools / human bones / found / island's limestone cave / reveal / people /

7’

7’

15’

- listen to the teacher- repeat the new words- copy down- make outline* Outlining:1. Location 2. Total area 3. Special features 4. Animals and plants 5. Historic

Sample writing:

Cat Ba National Park is situated on Cat Ba Island, 120 km from Hanoi and 20 km east of Hai Phong.Cat Ba National Park is the only site in Vn endowed with both tropical forests and coastal waters with while sand beaches, abundant natural resources, beautiful landscapes and many kinds of rare animals and plants. It covers 15.200 ha, including 9,800 ha of oceanCat Ba National Park presevers approximately 300 species of fish, 40 kinds of animals, 150 different birds and 620 species of plantsThe stone tools and human bones



inhabit / 6,000 years ago.- Goes around the class and offer help - Call some Ss to go to the board and write their writing.STEP 3: POST – WRITINGFeedback: Peer Correction- When Ss have finished, ask them to

exchange their writings and give corrections

- Ask Ss to hang them on the board. Teacher gives comments and correction if necessary.

7’

found in the island’s limestone caves reveal that people inhabited there at least 6,000 years old.

IV./ Summary: (1’) - Summarise the main pointsV./ Home work: (1’) - prepare next lessonE. EVALUATION:Time:…………………………………………………………………………………Contents:…………………………………………………………………………….Methods:……………………………………………………………………………Result:……………………………………………………………………………….Date of preparing:...../......./2013 Period: 66 UNIT 10: NATURE IN DANGER LESSON 5: LANGUAGE FORCUSA.OBJECTIVES: 1. Knowledge: + distinguish the differences between the consonant clusters / sl /, / sm /, / sn /, / sw/.

+ understand the use of Relative Pronouns with prepositions. + write the sentences with Relative Pronouns with prepositions

2. Skill: writing,listening,reading 3. Political thought: Pronunce the sounds correctly, and better at using relative pronouns with prepositions.B.TEACHING AIDS: 1. Teacher: textbook , Picture, poster, CD, CD player 2. Students: pens, text books… C.METHODS: T/Wh classs, group work, pair work.

D.CONTENTS:I/Organisation:

II/ Warm up: 3’ Complete two sentences1. a/swims/lake/often/in/Snow/smallTrương THPT Nguyễn Văn cừ. Ngô Sách Thiệu


175


2. loudly/can’t/he/that/the/sleep/snores/bady/so=> key:1. Snow often swims in a small lake2. He snores so loudly that the baby can’t sleepLead-in: Ask Ss to pronounce the words they have just found

Teacher’s activities Time Students’activitiesA. PRONUNCIATION:- Hang on a chart of the sounds on the board and introduce the sounds to the Ss. T reads the sounds three times./ sl / / sm / / sn / / sw /slaveslimsliceslow

smartsmellsmokesmile

sneezesnookerssnowsnap

swingswitchswearswallow

Repetition:- Ask the whole class to repeat the sounds after the T.- Ask some Ss to repeat the words. The others listen and give remarks if they are pronounced correctly.- Move around to give help.

2- Practice reading aloud the sentences.- Practice reading aloud the dialogue.- Ask Ss to make 5 new sentences which contain as many sounds above as possible.- The group that can write more sounds will win the game.

B. GRAMMARI. Presentation 1. Relative Pronouns with prepositions

Examples:1. The man was very helpful. I talked to

him.a. The man whom / who I talked to was

very helpful.b. The man that I talked to was very

helpful.c. The man ∅ I talked to was very

helpful.d. The man to whom I talked was very

helpful.

5’

5’

7’

- Look at the chart and repeat after the teacher.

- Copy down

* work in pairs: - Practice reading aloud the dialogue.

- listen and copy- make sentences



* Notes: - whom / who, which và that có thể được

sử dụng như là tân ngữ của một giới từ trong mệnh đề quan hệ.

- whom / who, which và that có thể được lượt bỏ đi như ở câu ví dụ 1c và 2c.

- Trong cách dùng Tiếng Anh trang trọng, giới từ được đặt đầu mệnh đề quan hệ (hay đại từ quan hệ) như ở ví dụ 1d và 2d. Giới từ chỉ đứng trước whom hoặc which mà không đứng trước that hoặc who; đại từ whom, which lúc này không thể lượt bỏ.

II. Practice:* Exercise 1:- Ask Ss to work in pairs to do exercise 1.- Give enough time for Ss to do it.- Move around to help if necessary.Feedback:- Call on Ss to read the sentences aloud . Others listen and give comments.* Exercise 2:- Copy the example on the board, explain how to the exercise and make a model.Example;a- She is the woman. I told you about her. She is the woman about whom I told you.b- The song was interesting . We listen to it last night. The song to which we listened last night was interesting.- Ask Ss to do exercise 2 individually.- Move around to help if necessary.- Ss compare their answers together.Feedback:- Call on Ss to read the sentences aloud. Others listen and give comments.

* Exercise 3: Ask Ss to complete the sentences, using who, whom, which, that Key: Feedback:- Ask ss to say out their answers - give correction if necessary III. Production:- call Ss to recall the main points.

7’

12’

7’

- work in pairs

*Key: 1. whom 2. which 3. whom 4. who 5. that 6. whom 7. which

*key:1. The man to whom I talked yesterday was very kind.2. The man about whom I told you works in the hospital 3. The woman about whom I am telling you teaches me English 4. The movie about which they are talking is fantastic 5. The picture at which she was looking was beautiful 6. I'll give you the address to which you should write

*key:1. That 2. Which 3. Who 4. Whom 5. Which/ that 6. Which 7. Who 8. whom




V./ Home work: (1’) - prepare next lessonE. EVALUATION:Time:…………………………………………………………………………………Contents:…………………………………………………………………………….Methods:……………………………………………………………………………Result:……………………………………………………………………………….

Date of preparing:...../......./2013 Period: 67UNIT 11: SOURCES OF ENERGY

LESSON 1: READINGA.OBJECTIVES: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson , students will be able to know about the alternative sources of energy2. Skill:reading 3. Political thought: Understand the the importance of saving sources of energy B.TEACHING AIDS: 1. Teacher: textbook , Picture, poster, CD, CD player 2. Students: pens, text books… C.METHODS: T/Wh classs, group work, pair work. D.CONTENTS:I/Organisation: (1’)

II/Warm up (5’)Aswer the questions:



178


Work in pairs:1. nuclear; oil; the sun; coal2. we need energy to live and work +To cook meals +To light, heat or cool the house + to run machines, cars, mortobikes…..

- Look at the pictures and tell the class, + what sources of enery does each picture below refer to?+ what do we need energy for?III. New lesson:

Teacher’s activities Time Students’ activitiesSTEP1. PRE – READING:* New words: + fossil fuels: nhi ên liệu hoá thạch +windmills(n ): cối xay gió + geothermal heat(n ): địa nhiệt + hydroelectricity dams: đập thuỷ điện + alternative( adj): thay thế + plentiful( adj): nhiều + alternative (a): có thể thay thế- Checking vocabulary: Gap - Fill:Gap - fill:1- Six hundred balloons were .... at the ceremony.2- We are looking for .......methods of making it.3- Fuel supplies are nearly ............... .4-The food in the restaurant is cheap but the rather. …5- Our company doesn't have a great ...of capital.

STEP2. WHILE – READING:1. Activity 1: Answer the Pre questionsAsk Ss to read the text silently and answer the pre-questions with a partner.1- What is our major source of energy ?2- Is this major source limited ? Why ?3- How many sources of energy are mentioned in the text ?4- Which one do you think is the most potential energy of all the alternative sources of energy ?2. Activity 2: Table Completion- Divide the class into 4 groups.- Ask Ss to scan the passage to find out the advantages and disadvantages of each alternative source.Answer key:

Sources of Advantages Disadvantages

6’

5’

10’

-reading the new words.- Listen and repeat.- Some individuals read the words aloud


-Some ss answer and others listen.KEY:1. released 2. alternative 3. energy 4. limited 5. exhausted

- Read the text and do the task .- Some Ss answer in front of the class.

KEY:1.Our major source of energy is fossil fuels (oil, coal, natural gas)2. Yes, It is limited. Because our demand is increasing very quickly and fossil fuels will be exhausted within a relative short time.3. The sources of energy mentioned in the text are : Fossil fuels, nuclear energy,


Lesson plan grade 11 school year: 2013 - 2014energyNuclear power It’s unlimited It can be very

dangerousGeothermal heat It’s available It’s only possible

in a few placesSolar energy It’s not only

plentiful and infinite but also clean and safe

It’s only possible during the day time.

Wind power It’s clean and unlimited

There’s no wind energy when there is no wind.

Water power It’s clean and unlimited

It’s expensive

STEP3: POST- READING: Discussion:Which of these alternative energy sources is the most feasible in Vietnam ? Say why ?- Ask Ss to work in groups and take notes their group's ideas.- Mix the group to share ideas.- Give comments on their ideas.

10’

5’

geothermal heat, solar energy, wind power, water power .4. I think solar energy is the most potential energy of all the alternative sources of energy.

Read the questions and give the answers.- Some Ss answer in front of the class.


Date of preparing:...../......./..2013 Period: 68UNIT 11: SOURCES OF ENERGY

LESSON 2: SPEAKINGA.OBJECTIVES: 1. Knowledge: : - talk about advantages and disadvantages of energy sources.

- express their own ideas about alternative source of energy. 2. Skill: speaking 3. Political thought: talk about the alternative sources of energy sourcesB.TEACHING AIDS: 1. Teacher: textbook , Picture, poster. 2. Students: pens, text books… C.METHODS: T/Wh classs, group work, pair work. D.CONTENTS:D. CONTENTS:I/Organisation: (1’)



180


II/ Revision(5’)- Who can tell me again about the advantages and disadvantages of these sources of energy ?- Call on some Ss to answer the questions. T says: - Today, we are going to talk some more about the advantages and disadvantages of the sources of energy. Let's begin our lesson:III. New lesson:

Teacher’s activities time Students’ activitiesSTEP1: PRE- SPEAKING1.New words:+ Nuclear reactor (n) lo phan ưng hat nhân+ radiation [,reidi'ei∫n] sư bưc xa, sư phat xa, + Enormous(a) to lơn, không lô+ Renewable(a) co thê hôi phuc lai- Ask Ss to repeat- Call ss to read again- Checking by W&W. 2. Activity 1: - Read the sentences in the box and tick if these facts are advantages or disadvantages.- Ask Ss to read the sentences carefully and work in pairs.- Move around to observe.- Ask Ss to answer the question in the book in front of the class.

STEP2: WHILE – SPEAKING:* Activity 2 + 3 : Substitution Ask Ss to work in groups of four or five to express their belief on the increasing use of alternative sources in the future, using the ideas in task 1 and 2 Useful language : - Expressing ideas - I think ...- I believe ...- In my opinion - Personally...- I don't think ...Example:A: I believe that the use of solar energy should be the alternative source of energy in our country B: I agree with you. It is the most feasible way to have solar energy in our country because Vietnam is a tropical country

5’

5’

20’


- Read the statements and do the task.

Suggested answers: 1, 2,3,5,7- disadvantages4,6- advantages

- Work in pairs to make the dialogue.Model: A: I think that more and more people will use the solar energy. B: Why do you think so? A: Because it’s available, unlimited and easy to use. C: But it’s expensive and we can only have it at specific time of the year. A: I hope that the progress of science and technology will help to overcome this problem. B: That’s right and then we don’t have to worry about the shortage of energy. C: And our life will be more comfortable with cheap simple devices run on the solar energy

- Some pairs present in front of the



STEP3: POST- SPEAKING:Group discussion Work in group of five to make a list of things the family should do to save energy Share ideas with the others by changing groups Feedback: Each group suggests the way their family often do to save energy

7’’

class.-work in groups;

Suggested ideas : - try to reduce the amount of water bill or electricity bill by cutting power such as lights, conditioner, when unnecessary - Do not cook with electricity - make sure there are no cracks in the pipes ...


Date of preparing:...../......./.2013 Period: 69UNIT 11: SOURCES OF ENERGY

LESSON 3: LISTENINGA.OBJECTIVES: 1. Knowledge: - listen to renewable resources

- express their own ideas about how to protect environment . 2. Skill: listening + speaking 3. Political thought: talk about the alternative sources of energy sourcesB.TEACHING AIDS: 1. Teacher: textbook , Picture, poster. 2. Students: pens, text books… C.METHODS: T/Wh class, group work, pair work. D.CONTENTS:D. CONTENTS:I/Organisation:



182


II/ Warm up: (7’)

OIL

COAL THE SUN

show the pictures and ask: What do these pictures refer to? - Expected answer: They are about natural resources Ask Ss: Which of them are renewable and which of them are non renewable ? Why ?Have Ss to work in pairs and guess the answers Natural Resources Renewable Nonrenewable Reasons

To know the answer. We're going to listen to a text about natural resources and natural environment

III. New lesson:Teacher’s activities time Students’ activitiesSTEP 1: PRE – LISTENING: *New words + ecology( n): sinh thái + renewable(adj ): có thể thay thế + fertilized (adj ): thụ tinh + oxygen( N): oxy + nitrogen: nit ơ + carbon dioxide: CO2 -Checking by R.O.R

STEP 2: WHILE – LISTENING:

* Activity 1 : Multiple Choice - Ask Ss to read task 1 ( page 129) carefully, guess the answer. Listen to the tape and circle the word they choose

5’

10’

- Copy the words and phrases.- Listen and repeat.- Some individuals read the words aloud - work individually

Answer: 1. D 2. C 3. D 4. A 5. C

Read the passage and do the task .- Compare their answers.- Check their answer.



* Activity 3g : Gap - Fill - Give Ss three minutes to read the paragraph carefully and guess the missing words - Ask Ss to listen to the tape again and fill in the gaps with the words they have heard - Let them call out their answers

STEP 3: POST – LISTENING:Discussion Ask Ss to work in groups of the five to discuss the questions - What can we do to keep the resources renewable ?Feedback: One student from each group comes to the front of the ideas Other give comments

10’

10’

Suggested answers : 1- unlimited 2. atmosphere 3. may 4. gases 5. amount



Date of preparing:...../......./.2013 Period: 70UNIT 11: SOURCES OF ENERGY

LESSON 4: WRITINGA.OBJECTIVES: 1. Knowledge: - Write a description from a chart. 2. Skill: writing 3. Political thought: write a description from a chart of energy consumptionB.TEACHING AIDS: 1. Teacher: textbook , Picture, poster. 2. Students: pens, text books… C.METHODS: T/Wh class, group work, pair work. D.CONTENTS:D. CONTENTS:I/Organisation: (1’)



184


II/ Revision: (5’) Home checking:Ask Ss to tell the class : which resources of energy do they belong to- renewable and nonrenewable?

Lead-in: Are you interested in the energy consumption in your family ? your city ? your country ?Do you know how much energy your country consume in a year ?To know how to read and write a chart of energy consumption, we will study the lesson today.

III. New lesson:Teacher’sactivities time Students’activitiesSTEP1: PRESENTAION

SOURCES OF ENERGY * - Hang the chart on the board and explain the information in the chart.In pairs, Ss look at the chart carefully and read the passage, contrasting the chart with the passage to find out the missing information.

* Elicit the tense and the language which is used in the passage from Ss.+) Useful Languages: - use Simple Past tense. - to be under / over / + figure. - to make up the largest ... - to account for / to take the smallest ... a small amount of ........ a large proportion of ...... a large percentage of ......- There was / were + noun / noun phrase.e.g: There were 10 million tons of coal used in 2000.- as much as .....- as + noun / noun phrase + as+) Outlining:1. Give out the topic sentence.2. Write some detaild sentences / supporting ideas for the topic sentence.

STEP2: PRACTICE* Activity 1:- Have Ss work in pairs to describe the chart, using similar function of language.

10’

3’

7’

- Compare the answer with other pairs ...- Call on some Ss to read out their answers.Key:1- 100 million tons 2. Nuclear and Hydroelectricity3- 18 million tons

e. listen and copy down

f. work in groupsg. write the paragraph

Sample writing:The chart shows the energy consumption in the year 2005 in HighlandAs can be seen, the total energy consumption was 170 million tons. Nuclear and hydroelectricity made up the largest amount of this figure with 75 million tons. This was followed by



Give correction if necessary.* Activity 2:- Divide the class into 4 groups.- Deliver a large piece of paper for each group.- Ask Ss to compare the amount of energy consumption in the two years 2000 and 2005.

STEP 3: PRODUCTION- Ask Ss to stick their posters on the board.- Correction- Give correction and comments on their writing

10’

7’

the consumption of petroleum(50 million tons). Coal made up the smallest amount of energy consumption(45 million tons)

h. work in groupsSuggested writing:

There was a trend in the consumption of coal and nuclear & hydroelectricity but there was a sharp decrease in the use of petroleum. The amount of coal used increased by 5 million tons and the consumption of nuclear & hydroelectricity went up dramatically by 55 million tons . However, the amount of petroleum consumed in 2005 fell by 7 million tons.

IV./ Summary: (1’) - Summarise the main pointsV./ Home work: (1’) - prepare next lessonE. EVALUATION:Time:…………………………………………………………………………………Contents:…………………………………………………………………………….Methods:……………………………………………………………………………Result:……………………………………………………………………………….Date of preparing:...../......./........ Period: 71

UNIT 11: SOURCES OF ENERGYLESSON 5: LANGUAGE FOCUS

A.OBJECTIVES: 1. Knowledge: - distinguish the sounds / r/, /spl/ and /spr/

- understand the use of Relative clauses replaced by participles and to- infinitives 2. Skill: writing +listening. 3. Political thought: pronounce the sounds correctly and better at using relative clauses replaces by participle.B.TEACHING AIDS: 1. Teacher: textbook , Picture, poster. 2. Students: pens, text books… C.METHODS: T/Wh class, group work, pair work. D. CONTENTS:I/Organisation : (1’)



186


II/ Warm up: (5’)Game:Show a picture or a realia of a shrimp, a split ring, spring onion then ask: - What are these ?Expected answer: They are : a shrimp, a split ring and a piece of spring onion.- Ask Ss to listen to the teacher and repeat.- shrimp / rimp /:- split ring / 'split 'rin /:- spring onion / sprin ' ni n/:Elicit the consonant clusters / r/, / spl /, / spr /.III/ New lesson:

Teacher’sactivities time Students’activitiesI./ PRONUNCIATION:

• listen and repeat Hang on the chart with the sounds: / r /, / spl /, / spr // r /shredshrillshrugshrink

/ spl /splitsplashspleensplutter

/ spr /sprayspreadsprainsprat

Point to each sound and read it aloud three times.Ask Ss to repeat the sounds Call on some Ss to pronounce them.

• Practice:* Listen and repeat- Read out some examples of the sounds.- Ask Ss to add some more words that contain the sounds.* Give each sound a number: 1- / r / 2- / spl / 3- / spr /T reads the words randomly, Ss listen and shout 1 or 2, 3 depending on the sound Ss hear.Example: T: spring Ss: three T: shrug Ss: one- Practice reading aloud the sentences on page 131

II./ GRAMMAR:1.Presentation.1.1 . Relative clauses reduced by participlesa. Present participleex1: The students who attend this school have to wear uniform→ The students attending this school have

5’

5’

-listen to the teacherC opy down- repeat the sounds

- listen to the tape and repeat

- listen to the teachercopy model- take note

- listen to the teachercopy model

- take notes



to wear uniformEx2: The girl who is speaking to Nam is my sister→ The girl speaking to Nam is my sisterNote:

• Relative Pronoun + V = V-ing• Relative Pronoun + be + V-ing =

V-ing(The verb in the relative clause is in active form)b. Past participleex: The film which is shown at the cinema is really interesting→ The film shown at the cinema is really interesting

• Relative Pronoun + be + PII = PII(The verb in the relative clause is in passive form)1.2. Relative clauses reduced by To Infa. when the Relative Clause follows the first/second/third/../last only+N/pronoun or the superlative degree of Adjex: The last man who left the shop→ The last man to leave the shopEx: This is the first man who reaches the top of this mountain→This is the first man to reach the top of this mountainb. When the Relative Clause express something that must/can/or have to be doneex: He has a lot of homework that he must finish→ He has a lot of homework to finishEx:The children need a large playground which they can play in→ The children need a large playground to play in2. PracticeExercise 1 Ask Ss to do exercise 1 individually and then compare their answers with another student. Then T calls on some Ss to read out their answersExercise 2 Ask Ss to do exercise 1 individually and then compare their answers with another student. Then T calls on some Ss go to the

7’

5’

5’

5’

- listen to the teachercopy model- take notes

EXERCISE 1:Key: 1- The boy playing the piano is Bend 2- Do you know the woman coming toward us? 3- The people waiting for the bus in the rain are getting wet 4- The scietists searching the case of cancer are making progress 5- The fence surrounding hose is made of wood 6- We have an aoartment overlooking the park EXERCISE2:

Key:1- the ideas presented in that book are interesting 2- I come from a city located on in the southern part of the coutry 3- They live in a house built in 1890 4- the photographs published in the new extraordinary 5- The experiment conducted at the University of Chicago was succesful 6- They wok in a hospital sponsored by the government



board and write on the boardAfter finishing and the rest Ss to correct if necessarylisten and give feedback

3. Production. Exercise 3 - Ask Ss to rewrite the sentences in exercise 3, using infinitive phrase - Ask Ss to come to the board and write them down - Check Ss' tasks and give corrections Show some pictures and ask Ss to work in pairs, making the sentences with Relative clause replaced by participles or to infinitives

5’

EXERCISE3:Key: 1- Jonh was the last man to reach the mountain 2- The last personh to leave the room must turn off the lights 3- The first person to see is Mr Smith 4- This is the second person to be killed in that way 5- The first person to catch the ball will be the winner


Date of preparing:...../......./2013. Period:72REVISION

A.OBJECTIVES: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be improved knowledges of Unit 11 2. Skill: speaking and doing exercise. 3. Political thought: review unit 11 B.TEACHING AIDS: 1. Teacher:textbook , , sub- board 2. Students: pens, … B.TEACHING AIDS: 1. Teacher: textbook , Picture, poster. 2. Students: pens, text books… C.METHODS: T/Wh class, group work, pair work. D.CONTENTS:I/Organisation:( (1’)



189


II/ Warm up: Test 15 minutes: Choose the best word or phrases to complete the spaces: 1. The man .......... is John’s brother.

A. to speak to me B. speaking to me C. whom speak to me D. which speak to me2. Natural resources are…decreasing.

A. rapid B. rapidity C. rapidty D. rapidly3. You can send your letter ............. surface mail.

A. by B. in C. to D. with 4. it can be ............. that human being are changing the environment in all respects.

A. say B. said C. says D. to say5. A ....... is someone who sells things in a shop. A. shop assistant. B. shoplifter C. customer D. burglar6. Which source of energy is dangerous?

A. water B. nuclear C. solar D. fossil7. Choose the word whose underlined part is pronounced differently from that of the other words.

A. cup B. pollute C. umbrella D . but 8. Many animals are ________ for their fur and other valuable parts of their bodies.

A. hunted B. chased C. run after D. followed9.. We have apartment ________ the park.

A. overlooking B. overlooks C. to overlook D. overlooked10.. It was a kind of computer ________ I was not familiar.

A. which B. to which C. that D. with whichIII/ New lesson:

Teacher’sactivities time Students’activitiesA-VOCABULARIES:* Complete the sentence with the correct form of the verb in the box.

exhaust release alternate research relate

supply renew pollute harm finite

1. Coal, gas and oil are …….forms of energy that can not be replaced after used.

2. The nuclear plant provides a fifth of the nation's energy ….

3. Solar energy is not only plentiful and ……but also clean and safe.

4. Increased consumption will lead to faster …….of our natural resources.

5. Electricity companies were criticized for failing to develop….. energy sources.

6. Oxygen from the water is …….into the atmosphere.

7. Fossil fuels will be exhausted within a relatively short time.

12’

- work in groups- key:

1. non-renewable2. supplies.3. infinite4. exhaustion5. alternative6. released7. harmful.8. pollution.



8. These pesticides are environmentally Water power provides energy without ……….

9. B./ GRAMMAR: 1. Exercise 1: Change all of the

adjective clauses to adjective phrases. Use the participles.

1. Only a few of the movie that are shown at the Gray Theater are suitable for children.

2. The couples who live in the house next door are both college professors.

3. A knuckle is a point that connects a finger to the rest of the hand.

4. Antarctica is covered by a huge ice cap that contains 70 percent of the earth's fresh water.

5. Only a small fraction of the eggs that are' laid by a fish actually hatch and survive to adulthood.

6. Our solar system is in a galaxy that is called the Milky Way.

15’’

- work in pairs- exchange their answer - write on board - key:

1. Only a few of the movie shown at the Gray Theater are suitable for children.2. The couples living in the house next door are both college professors.3. A knuckle is a point connecting a finger to the rest of the hand.4. Antarctica is covered by a huge ice cap containing 70 percent of the earth's fresh water. 5. Only a small fraction of the eggs laid by a fish actually hatch and survive to adulthood.6. Our solar system is in a galaxy called the Milky Way.



TEST YOURSELF DA.OBJECTIVES: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to understand the skills and knowledges from Unit 9 to Unit 11 2. Skill: Listening +writing+ reading 3. Political thought: review unit 10 & 11B.TEACHING AIDS: 1. Teacher:textbook , cassette player , sub- board 2. Students: pens, … B.TEACHING AIDS: 1. Teacher: textbook , Picture, poster. 2. Students: pens, text books… C.METHODS: T/Wh class, group work, pair work. D.CONTENTS:



I/Organisation:

II/ Warm up: noIII/ New lesson: Teacher's activities Time Students' activitiesI. LISTENING- Ask Ss to study all sentences in listening carefully- Ask Ss to listen to the passage about water conservation and complete the following sentences.- Play the tapescript first- Play the tapescript second- Ask Ss to compare their results- Walk round to give a help- Check the answers

II. READING:- Ask Ss to read the reading- Explain some words in the reading+ survival+ marine+ automobile- Ask Ss to read again then answer thequestions- walk round to give a help- Ask Ss to compare their results- Check the answers

III/ PRONUNCIATION & GRAMMAR: a. Pronunciation- Ask Ss to listen and put a tick in the right box- Check the results

b. Grammar- Ask Ss to complete each of the following sentences,using the correct form (to-infinitive or participle)of theverb in the box.- Walk round to give a help- Check the answers

IV/ WRITING: - Ask Ss to write a paragraph 120 words

10’

10’

5’

5’

- Individual work- Listen carefully- Correct the answers* Suggested keys1. …cannot live.2….it rains3….planting vegetation4….hold back the water.5….dry seasons

- Read silently- Read silently the answer the questions- Correct the answers*Suggested keys1. Air,waterand soil are necessary to the survival of all things.2. Badly polluted air can cause illness,and even death.Polluted water kills fish and other marine life. Pollution of soil reduces the amount of land that is available for growing food.3. Because much pollutionis causeed by things that benefit people.For example,exhaust from autormobiles causes a large percentage of air pollution,but the autormobile provides transportation for millions of people.4. They would have to stop using many things that benefit them.5. Goverments can pass and enforce laws that require businesses and individuals to stop,or cut down on certain polluting activities.

- Individual work- Correct the results* suggested keys1.living 4. to drink



192


about the measures to protect the environment,using the cues :- Guide Ss using the cues to write* Introduction:- We/try to find solutions/environmentalpollution.* Body:- people/stop cutting trees for timber.- instead,they/plant trees and forests- people/reduce using cars motorbikes/that cause noise and air pollution.- we/ prevent farmers/use fertilizers and pesticides/that damage soil.- people/not leave/litter on land and in water.- we/prohibit factories/dump industrialwaste/rivers and lakes.* Conclusion:- it/be/high time/governments/have suitable measures/that require companies,individuals/stop cutting down/polluting activities.- Check some Ss' writings by using on extra-board- Give the remarks

12’

2.ringing 5. invited3. to leave 6. blown- Study the cues then write on extra-boardCorrect their writings*Sample writing:We are trying to find solutions to environmental pollution problem. People should stop cutting trees for timber [gô xây dưng]. Instead, they should plant more trees and forests. They should reduce using cars and motorbikes that cause noise and air pollution. We should prevent farmers from using fertilizers and pesticides that damage the soil. People should not leave litter on the land and in the water. We should prohibit factories from dumping industrial waste into rivers and lakes. It is high time governments over the world had measures that require companies and individuals to stop or cut down on polluting activities.

IV./ Summary: (1’) - Summarise the main pointsV./ Home work: (1’) - prepare next lessonE. EVALUATION:Time:…………………………………………………………………………………Contents:…………………………………………………………………………….Methods:……………………………………………………………………………Result:………………………………………………………………………………. Date of preparing:...../......./........ Period: 74

ĐỀ KIỂM TRA 45 phutA.OBJECTIVES: 1. Knowledge: Test their knowledge from unit 9 to unit 11 2. Skills: Writing + listening 3. Political thought: do the test individuallyB.TEACHING AIDS: 1. Teacher: test handouts 2. Students: pens, C. METHODS: T/Wh class, groupwork, pairwork D. CONTENTS:I. Organisation: class :..................date of teaching :.............absence :.......II/ Warm up :III./New lesson:MATRIX


Lesson plan grade 11 school year: 2013 - 2014Tên chủ đề Nhận biết Thông hiểu Vận dụng Cộng

Cấp độ thấp Cấp độ cao

LISTENING(TL)

Sources of energy




READING (MCQ)

Nature in danger

Số câu:4Số điểm 2



WRITING Tự luận - relative pronouns

- relative clause replaced by participle, to inf



Số câu:4 Tỉ lệ:20%

LANGUAGE FOCUS (Grammar, vocabulary and speaking) (MCQ)

- relative pronouns- relative clause replaced by participle, to inf-Word to express nature in danger, post office- speaking

Số câu 10Số điểm:2,

Số câu: 10Số điểm: 2,


PHONETICS(MCQ)

- distinguish the stress


Số câu: 5Số điểm:1


Tổng số câu: 40 Số câu: 25Tỉ lệ: 60%



Số câu: 29

I/ LISTENING: ( 3 points) Listen and fill in the blank with a missing word.

The natural environment includes all natural (1).................that are necessary for life: the air, the ocean, the (2) ………, and the land. Because they are vital for life, these resources must be protected from (3)………. and conserved. Ecologists study their importance and how to (4)…………… them carefully.

According to ecologists, resources are divided into two groups: (5)………….. and nonrenewable. When a resource is used, it takes some time to (6)……… it. If the resource can be replaced quickly, it is called renewable. For example, grass for animals is a renewable resource. When cows (7)…………… the grass, the resource is used. If the soil is fertilized and (8)…………, more grass will grow. Coal, however, is nonrenewable because it takes millions of years to make (9)……………… All fossil (10)……………. are nonrenewable resources.II/ PHONETICS (1pt)Choose the word which is stressed differently from the rest.



1. a. devastate b. disappear c. prohibit d. destruction 2. a extinct b. bother c. spacious d. scenic3. a. respect b. effort c. exist d. supply 4. a. action b. habit c. danger d. survive

II/ GRAMMAR , VOCABULARY AND SPEAKING: (2.5 points)Choose the word or phrase that best completes the sentences.1. We need to …………..buildings.

a. preservation b. preserve c. preservative d. preserving.2. Solar energy is _________ enormous _________ clean.

a. not only – but also b. not only – also c. not only – and d. no only – but also3. A custermer is a person _________buys something from a shop.

a. which b. whom c. whose d. who4. The song ________ we listened last night was interesting.

a. that b. which c. to which d. to that5. I met Jane’s father, _________works at the university.

a. which b. who c. whom d. that6. Oxford, ______ attracts many tourists, is often crowded in the summer.

a. that b. whom c. whose d. where7. The man is my teacher . I am grateful to him . a. The man whom I grateful to him is my teacher . b. The man to whom I am grateful is my teacher c. The man is my teacher who I am grateful . d. The man to him I am grateful is my teacher . 8. “The man who is standing there is my brother”.

a. The man stands there is my brother. b. The man who stands there is my brother.c. The man standing there is my brother. d. The man is standing there is my brother.

9. Don’t let me be the last who knows your decision.a. to know b. knowing c. known d. had known

10. they lived in a house that was built in 1890. a. building b. to build c. to be built d. built IV/ READING: (2.5 points)

Read the passage carefully and choose the best answer for each question.

It can be said that human beings are changing the environment in all respects through their actions and by their habits. This has resulted in two serious consequences. The first is that many kinds of rare animals are killed. The second is that the environment where these animals are living is badly destroyed. As a result, the number of rare animals is decreasing so rapidly that they are in danger of becoming extinct.1. What is the main idea of this paragraph?

a. People are in danger of becoming extinct.b. The human race is also an endangered species.c. Human beings are responsible for the changes in the environment.d. Many animals are disappearing.

2. What is the first consequence of changing the environment?a. people are killed b. water is pollutedc. rare animals are killed d. the environment is destroyed



3. What will happen to rare animals as a result?a. They are reducing in numbers. b. They are developingc. They are increasing d. They are becoming extinct

4. What are the serious consequences of people’s interference with the environment?a. Rare animals and human beings are destroyed.b. Rare animals are killed and the environment is destroyed.c. Rare animals and trees are killed.d. Rare animal are protected.

V. WRITING: (2 points)A. Combine the following sentences, using preposition + whom or which.1. There wasn't any directory in the telephone box. I was phoning from this box.……………………………………………………………………………………..2. I was sitting on a chair. It suddenly collapsed.………………………………………………………………………………………..B. Rewrite the following sentences, using participle or to infinitive1. The Queen Elizabeth is the largest ship which has been built on the Clyde.…………………………………………………………………………………………2. We had a river in which we could swim.…………………………………………………………………………………………..


Date of preparing:...../......./........ Period:75UNIT 12: THE ASIAN GAMES

LESSON 1: READING.A.OBJECTIVES: 1. Knowledge: - Sts know about the Asian Games 2. Skill: reading 3. Political thought: talk about the history of the asian gamesB.TEACHING AIDS: 1. Teacher:textbook , cassette player ,pictures 2. Students: pens, … C.METHODS: T/Wh class, group work, pair work. D.CONTENTS:I/Organisation:

II/ Warm up: (5’)



196


Game: Chatting 1. What sports do you see in the photos?2. Which one do you like to play?why?3. In which sporting events are these sports competed?*KEY:1. They are football, table tennis, high jumping, and bodybuilding2. I like to play…because it makes me healthy3. In Sea Games and Asian GamesLead- in :- Which sports do you think are the strongest of Vietnam ?You are going to read a text about the Asian Games. Look at the pictures on page 136. What do they tell you about the Asian Games ?


STEP 1: PRE – READING:1.New words + intercultural knowledge: kiến thức văn hoá + solidarity(n ):tình đoàn kết + aquatic sports( n ): thể thao dư ới nước + appreciated (a)đánh giá cao. + advance(v): tiến bộ + effort (n): nỗ lực- Ask sts to read the words after T. * Checking by : gap – filling1. Swimming and water skiing are

both…….sports2. he never lost his…….for training

athletes.3. I will make every …….to arrive on time.4. our sports performances have been

……….. considerable.5. Your help was greatly………6. The Asian games are held for the purpose

of developing ………… and………within Asia.

STEP 2: WHILE – READING.Task 2: Completing the table.- Ask S to read the paragraph carefully and underline the key words .- Ask S to work individually , then discuss their answers with a partner.- Call on some ss to give the answers in front of the class.- Feedback and give correct answers:

5’

5’

10’

- Listen to their T and take notes.- Practice reading the new words.- Listen and repeat.- Some individuals read the words aloud.


KEY:1. aquatic 2. enthusiasm 3. effort 4. advancing 5. appreciated 6. intercultural knowledge / solidarity

- Read the text and do the task .- Some Ss answer in front of the class.KEY:1. 1951 2. the 2nd Asian Games in Manila, the Philippines 3. 1958 4. Squash, rugby, fencing and mountain biking 5. 2002.



Task3: answering the questions.- Ask S to read the statements carefully and find the answer- Ask S to work individually , then discuss their answers with a partner.- Call on some Ss to give the answers in front of the class.- Give the correct answers:

STEP 3: POST – READING.* working in groups.- Ask Ss to work in groups to name the sports in which Vietnam has won gold medals at the Asian Games.- Go around and offer help.- Correct the Ss’ mistakes and give the comments.

10’

7’

- - Some Ss answer in front of the class.

KEY:1. The purpose of the Asian Games is to develop intercultural knowledge and friendship within Asia. 2. 9,919 participants took part in the 14th Asian Games.3. They won the gold medals in bodybuilding, billiards and women’s karatedo at the Busan Games.

- Work in pairs to answer the question in the book.- Some Ss present in front of the class.


Date of preparing:...../......./........ Period:76UNIT 12: THE ASIAN GAMES

LESSON 2: SPEAKINGA.OBJECTIVES: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to:

- ask for and give some information about Asian Games - express their own ideas own ideas about sport results and about their favorite

games or athletes 2. Skill: Speaking 3. Political thought: talk about the sports results of the Vietnamese athletes at 14th Asian games .B.TEACHING AIDS: 1. Teacher:textbook ,poster.... 2. Students: pens, … C.METHODS: T/Wh class, group work, pair work. D.CONTENTS:I/Organisation: 1’



II.Revision: 5’Teacher’s activities Students’ activities

? what is the pupose of the asian game? The purpose is to develop intercultural knowledge and friend ship within asia.

III. New lesson:

Teacher’s activities Time Students’ activities

STEP1: PRE – SPEAKING.Activity 1T reviews how to read cardinal number and ordinal numberT gives Ss handouts to practice speakingAsk Ss to work in pairs to practice asking for and giving information about the Asian Games and talking about sport resultsT goes around and offer help if necessaryThen call on some pairs to stand up and practiceCorrect their mistakes if necessary

Hand out AGame

NoHost country year Number

of countries

Number of sports

1 1951 62 Philipines 183 204 Indonesia 1962 135 176 Thailand 187 Iran 168 1978 259 India 2110 1986 27

STEP 2: WHILE - SPEAKINGActivitiy 2Ask Ss to take turns talking about the Asian Games and the sports results of the Vietnamese athlete at 14th Asian Games, using the information from the table in your books

15’

15’

- Work in pairs to do the task.- Some Ss answer in front of the class.Example:A: When and where were the 2nd Asian Games held?B: They were held in 1954 in the Philipines A:How many coutries took part in the Games/B: 18 A: How many sports were there at the games?B: 8..,Hand out B

GameNo

Host country

year Number of

countries

Number of

sports1 India 112 195

48

3 Japan 204 196

213

5 Thailand 186 197

013

7 1974

25

8 Thailand 199 198

210 Korea 25

- Work in pairs to make the dialogue.

Model:



199


Ask Ss to work in pairs to practice talking about sport resultsT goes around and offer help if necessaryThen call on some pairs to stand up and practiceCorrect their mistakes if necessarySTEP3: POST – SPEAKING:

Work in groups of 4. Imagine that you are TV reporters. You will make a report about Vietnam’s achievements at the 14th Asian Games..

7’

A: In which sport did Vietnamese athletes won medals? B: Bodybuilding, Billiards, Karatedo, Shooting, Wushu. A: How many medals did they win? B: 10 medals. A: In which sport did Vietnamese athletes win 2 gold and 1 bronze medals?. B: Karatedo

- Some pairs present in front of the class.+ Purpose of the Games + Information about the Games (host country, year, number of countries, number of sports) + Sports results of the Vietnamese athletes at the Games (number of medals, sports winning medals, result in each sport).


Date of teaching:......./......./........... Period: 77UNIT 12: THE ASIAN GAMES

LESSON 3: LISTENINGA.OBJECTIVES: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: - listen to specific information

- express their own ideas own ideas about sport results and about their favorite games or athletes 2. Skill: listening 3. Political thought: talk about the sports results of Asian games .B.TEACHING AIDS: 1. Teacher:textbook ,poster....



2. Students: pens, … C.METHODS: T/Wh class, group work, pair work. D.CONTENTS:I/Organisation:( 1’)

II/ Warm up: (5’)1. What programme is this?

It is the sport news 24/7

2.What contents are usually mentioned in the report? Sports in the country and over the world


STEP 1: PRE – LISTENING.1. Answer the questions: + What are the names of these sports? + Have you ever watched sports like these on television? + Which sports do you like best? Why?- Move around to help sts.- Ask some pairs to give their answers.- Suggested answers: 1. Gymnastic, long jump, high jump, weightlifting. 2. New words: + land (v): đất + freestylet:b ơi t ự do + gymnasium (n):phòng tập thể dục + gymnast (n ):vận động viên thê dục+ crash (v) đâm, cham+ disappointed(adj): thât vong - Read the words / plays the tape again and ask sts to repeat.- Ask Ss to read the words in pairs.- Checking by R.O.R.

STEP2: WHILE – LISTENING1. Task 1: Multiple choice:

5’

7’

- Listen to the T and answer the question. - Some Ss stand up and present.

- Copy the words and phrases.- Listen and repeat.- Read the words in pairs and correct each other’s mistakes.- Some individuals read the words aloud Look at the words and read after T /the tape.

- Listen to their teacher.

Listen and do the task.- Check their answer say it aloud, and then correct their work if they have the wrong answer.



201


- Ask Ss to read the statements carefully and work out what information they need to concentrate on while listening. - Ask Ss to listen to the tape/T once . - Ask Ss to compare their answer in pairs.- Play the tape the second time for Ss to check their answers.- Check Ss’ answers by calling on some Ss2.Task 2 : Answering the questions:- Ask Ss to work in pairs and read questions given in the textbook and makes sure they understand the questions. - Ask sts to listen to the talk once or twice and answer the questions. - Ask Ss to compare their answers. - Check sts’ answer by playing the tape/ read the dialogue once again, stop where necessary and conduct the correction.

STEP 3 POST – LISTENING:- Ask Ss to work in group to talk about a famous athlete.- Go round to check the activities and to make sure that sts are working effectively.- Ask one or two sts to present in front of the whole class.- Check and give remarks.

8’

10’

7’

Answer: 1. C 2. A 3. B 4. B 5. D

Read the passage and do the task .- Check their answer.

Suggested answers :

1- It was at 10.15 p.m. 2- They have won 6 gold medals. 3- He has completed in the long jump 2 times. 4- High jump was the last sports event mentioned in the report. 5- He was very disappointed.


- One/ two sts present.


Date of teaching:......./......./........... Period: 78UNIT 12: THE ASIAN GAMES

LESSON 4: WRITINGA.OBJECTIVES: 1. Knowledge: : - Describing the preparations for the coming Asian Games 2. Skill: Writing 3. Political thought: .write a a paragraph.B.TEACHING AIDS: 1. Teacher:textbook ,poster.. tape, cassette, .. 2. Students: pens, … C.METHODS: T/Wh class, group work, pair work.



D.CONTENTS:I/Organisation:

II.Warm up: networkWhat facilities do you think we need to have for the Asian Games ?Brainstorm Ss' ideas and copy them on the board

Expected answer - National stadium/ local stadium - National sport centre - Sport buildings and roads to sport building - Car parks - Hotels - Guest house - Facilities for disabled athletes Ask Ss:Suppose Vietnam is going to told the coming Asian Games. What facilities does our country need to have ?To go to the details, today we are going to write a paragraph to describe the preparations for the Games

III. New lesson: Teacher's activities Time Students' activitiesSTEP1 : PRE- WRITINGHandoutActivity 1(5m)Ask Ss to match the verbs in column A with the noun phrases in column B

A B1. build a. the training areas2. upgrade b. one more National Stadium3. widen c. people to serve the Games4. equip d. the national Sports Centres5. advertise

e. hotels with modern facilities

6. recruit f. a competition to choose and official song

Group work1. b2. d3. a4. e5. g6. c7. f

1. We’ll have to build one more National Stadium and some



203

The facilities of the Asian Games


7. hold g. sports- places-dates and time

*Activity 2(7m)Setting the sceneSuppose Vietnam is going to hold the Asian Games. What will we have to do to prepare for the Games?T gives some questions:1. what will your country do first?2. Why will we have to upgrade the National Sports Centres and stadiums?3. What about the training areas and the roads?4. What will we have to equit the hotels and guest houses with? What for?5. Which form of mass media will be used to advertise all the preparations for the Games?6. Who will you recruit to serve the Games?7. What competition will we have to hold?-Ask Ss to look at the suggestions in the book before writingCall on some Ss to stand up and answer the questionsListen and give feedback3.Useful languages:* Sequence adverbsFirst / Firstly/ First of all...Then ... Next.... After that ... Finally * Structure: - need to be + pp = need + V-ing - have to + inf Example: The national stadium needs to be upgraded

STEP 2: WHILE - WRITING

* Activity 1: Writing sentences Ask Ss to use information in the box and write a meaningful sentences, combining the verb in column 1 with the phrases in column 2 ( page 143) Teacher moves around the class to give help Ask ss to compare their answers. Some suggested sentences: a. One more national Stadium needs to be

sports buildings and car parks2. Because they are not in good condition3. We will widen the training areas the roads and the sports building4. We will have to equip all the hotels and guest houses with modern facilities- to welcome foreign athletes and visitors5. The radio and television will be used for advertising6. We should recruit university teachers and students with good English7. We should hold a competition to choose an official song for the coming Asian Games

- Sample:Sample writing: To prepare for the Asian Games we have a lot of things to do.First of all, we will build one or more national stadiums and sport centres so that they can meet the international standard. At present, they are too small and many of them are rundown. We will widen and equip training areas because they don’t have enough facilities and are not large enough to accommodate a huge number of participants. We will also need to improve the roads leading to stadiums and sport centres where the Asians Games are going to take place so as to avoid traffic congestions. What is more, we will upgrade and build more



built b. National sports centers and local stadium need to be upgraded because they are not in good conditions c. We have to built more hotels and guest house with modern facilities to welcome foreign athletes and visitors Ask Ss to write them on the board. Teacher gives Ss comments or corrections

STEP 3: POST - WRITING- Ask some other sts to give remarks on the descriptions on the board.- Check and give the correct answer.

- If there is enough time, T can have sts exchange their writing among sts within a group so that they can check their friend's work and give remarks.

hotels and guest houses because most of our hotels and guest houses at the moment don’t meet international standards. There are not enough of them, too, to accommodate. Besides, we need a lot of English- spreaking staff, so we will train and recruit volunteers from students and young people who speak good English. We will also advertise our preparation work on TV as to call for sponsor. Finally, we will need to have an official song for the event, so we might want to hold a competition to choose the best song.


Date of teaching:......./......./........... Period: 79UNIT 12: THE ASIAN GAMESLESSON 5: LANGUAGE FOCUS

A.OBJECTIVES: 1. Knowledge:- Students know how to pronounce sounds /str/, /skr/ and /skw/ correctly. - Students learn about: - Omission of relative pronouns 2. Skill: Writing + speaking 3. Political thought: talk about the Asian Games .B.TEACHING AIDS:



1. Teacher:textbook ,poster.. tape, cassette, .. 2. Students: pens, … C.METHODS: T/Wh class, group work, pair work. D.CONTENTS:I/Organisation:

II.Revision:III.New lesson: Teacher's activities Time Students' activitiesI. PRONUNCIATION:a. Presentation:- Write three sounds on the board and pronounce them clearly twice, then ask sts to repeat.- Tell sts how to pronounce these sounds accurately.- Ask them to look at the textbook, listen and repeat.- Then ask sts to work in pairs to read the words again so that they can check for each other.- Move around to help .- Ask two sts to read again and give remarks.b. Practice:- Ask them to work in pairs to read the sentences and then find out the words containing sounds /str/, /skr/and /skw/.- Ask them to work in 2 minutes.- Move around to conduct the activity.- Ask one st to report and other sts to give remarks.II. GRAMMAR:1.Presentation(7m)Relative clauses(revision)Setting the sceneT: Do you know the man?T: The man whom you met in the street yesterday T: So the man you met yesterday is your cousinTr êng hîp bá §TQH khi nã lµ t©n ng÷ cña mét M§T gives some example for Ss to do+ The girl whom you saw on the bus yesterday is my sister

- Write down five sounds.- Listen to the teacher and repeat.- Look at the book , listen and repeat.



- Answers:/ str/ /skr/ /skw/strong ice-cream squeezingstreet screaming squeaking ................................ - Read the sentences.

- Listen to the T and read the examples.

S: Which man?S: Oh, yes. He’s my cousin

The girl you saw on the bus…..siter The books I bought ……interesting

Individual work1. Have you found the bike you lost?2. Most classmates he invited to….3. The short stories John told were….4. The dictionary I bought yesterday is..5. I didn’t like the man we met this….6. The beef we had for lunch was……

1. I enjoy my job because I like the people I work with



206


+ The books that/which I bought yesterday is very interesting2. Practice Exercise 1(8m)Ask Ss to work individually and then ask them to read loudly before classListen and give feedback

Exercise 2(8m)Ask Ss to complete each of the following sentences, using a suitable sentence in the box to make a relative clause without a relative pronoun-Ask Ss to work individually and then ask them to read loudly before class 3. production

Exercise 3(5m)Ask Ss to tick the sentences in which the relative pronoun can be omittedAsk Ss to work individually then work in pairs to discussThen T calls on some Ss to stand up to answer T corrects if necessary

2. The dinner party we went to wasn’t very enjoyable3. The house we’re living in is not in good condition4. I wasn’t interested in the things they were talking about5. He didn’t get the job he applied for6. The bed I slept in was very modern

Suggested answerThe relative pronoun in sentence 1, 3, 5, 6 can be omitted




Date of preparing:...../......./..... Period:80TEST CORRECTION

A.OBJECTIVES: 1. Knowledge: After the lesson, Ss will be able to know about the common mistakes and their knowledge , from that they will know how to improve their knowledge of English 2. Skills: Speaking +reading + writing 3. Political thought: .know how to improve their knowledge of EnglishB.TEACHING AIDS: 1. Teacher:textbook ,poster.... 2. Students: pens, … C. METHODS: T/Wh class, groupwork, pairwork D.PROCEDURE:I/Organisation:

II.Revision:III.New lesson: Teacher's activities Time Students' activitiesI./ LISTENING: Mỗi câu đúng 0,3 điểmNghe và điền từ (cụm từ) vào chỗ trống

I./ LISTENING: Mỗi câu đúng 0,3 điểmNghe và điền từ (cụm từ) vào chỗ trống

1. resources 2. sun3. polution4. use 5. renewable6. replace



208




IV./ READING : mỗi câu đúng 0,5 điểm

IV./ WRITING : Mỗi câu đúng 0, 5 điểm

7. eat8. protected9. coal10.fuels


1.A 2. A 3.D 4.D

III./ GRAMMAR, VOCABULARY AND SPEAKING: mỗi câu đúng 0,2 điểmChọn đáp án đúng nhất để hoàn thành mỗi câu 1. b 2 a3. d 4.c

5.b 6.d7.b 8.c9.a 10.d

IV./ READING : mỗi câu đúng 0,5 điểm

. Đọc đoạn văn sau và chọn một câu trả lời thích hợp nhất, từ câu 1 đến câu 4.

1. c2. c3. d4. b

V. WRITING: (2 points)A. Combine the following sentences, using preposition + whom or which.

1.There wasn't any directory in the telephone box, from whichI was phoning .2.The chair The chair on which I was sitting suddenly collapsed.

B. Rewrite the followingsentences, using participle or to infinitive

3. The Queen Elizabeth is the largest ship to be built on the Clyde.4. We had a river to swim in.




V./ Home work: (1’) - prepare next lessonE. EVALUATION:Time:…………………………………………………………………………………Contents:…………………………………………………………………………….Methods:……………………………………………………………………………Result:……………………………………………………………………………….

* Result: Class Students Mark 9,

10 7, 8 5, 6 3,4 0,1,2 > TB

11A3

Date of preparing:...../......./........ Period: 81UNIT 13: HOBBIESLESSON : READING

A.OBJECTIVES: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students can know about the writer’s

hobbies. 2. Skill: reading 3. Political thought: talk about the hobbies .B.TEACHING AIDS: 1. Teacher:textbook ,poster.. tape, cassette, .. 2. Students: pens, … C.METHODS: T/Wh class, group work, pair work. D.CONTENTS:I/Organisation:

II/ Warm up:Ask Ss to look at the pictures on page 146 and call out the names of the hobbies described in the pictures

Picture 1: She is playing guitarPicture 2:He is going fishingPicture 3: He is swimmingAsk Ss which of these things they like to doing in their free time and why. If Ss do not like any hobbies in the pictures, they can talk about one of their hobbiesCall on some Ss to answer the questionWhat do you call things you do in your free time?



210


Introduces the topic of the lesson→ HobbiesIII/ New lesson:

Teacher’s activities time Students’ activitiesSTEP1: PRE – READING:1. New words:+ indulge in : (V) Ham mª, say mª+ accomplished:(a) Tµi n¨ng, tµi hoa+ avid (v): khao khat, them khat+ modest (a): vưa phai, phai chăng+ keep me occupied (v): Lµm cho ai bËn rén+ discarded (a): Bá, lo¹i bá, vøt bá+ accompanying( a): đem nha c cho ai- T explians the words that sts can have difficulties in reading*Checking by R.O.R 2. T / F statements.1. the witer is an accomplishes giutarist 2. the writer didn't collect fish from the rice field 3. The writer has more local stamps than foreign ones 4. The writer is an avid stamp collector - Ask Ss to predict.STEP2 : WHILE - READING1. Checking T/ F prediction.- T ask Ss to read the text individually and give the answer.- call Ss to correct if it is false.

2. Questions - Answers - T divides the class into groups of four - T ask each group to read the text again and write down the answers to the following questions Tasks representative of each group to go to the BB to write down their answer ( one question for each group)

STEP3: POST – READING:- Ask Ss to work in groups to talk about their hobbies. With WH- questions: What? When ? where? Why?

- listen and repeat- copy down


- Work in pairs and do the task - Some Ss answer in front of the class.

KEYS:Expected answer 1F ( his uncle is) 2F ( he did) 3T 4T

- Work in groups.- Some Ss present in front of the class.KEY:1. His first hobby is playing his guitar. 2. No, he isn’t.3. Because he’s an accomplished guitarist and he is good at accompanying people singing by his guitar.4. His second hobby is keeping fish.5. He bought some from the shop and collected some from the rice field near his house.6. He collects them from discarded envelopes his relatives and friends give him.8. Local stamps.9. He keeps the less common ones



Example:My hobby is reading book.i read book when i like reading when i have free time. I often read on the bed. Reading book helps me get knowledge and makes me relax- Go around and offer help.- Call on some Ss to give the answers in front of the class.- Correct the Ss’ mistakes and give the comments.

inside a small album. The common ones he usually gives away others or if no one wants them he simply throw them away.

- work individually


Date of preparing:...../......./........ Period: 82UNIT 13: HOBBIESLESSON 2: SPEAKING

A.OBJECTIVES: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, student will be able to talk about a hobby 2. Skill: speaking 3. Political thought: talk about their hobbies .B.TEACHING AIDS: 1. Teacher:textbook ,poster.. tape, cassette, .. 2. Students: pens, … C.METHODS: T/Wh class, group work, pair work. D.CONTENTS:I/Organisation:

II/ Warm up:- look at the pictures and answer the questions. What do they like to do?



212


They like playing football. They like watching TV. She likes singing.III/ New lesson:

Teacher’s activities time Students’ activities

STEP1: PRE – SPEAKING:1. New words:+ Tag(n) [tæg] nhan (hang, gia)+ tall(n) [st :l] quây, ban bay hangɔ+ To classify: ['klæsifai] săp xêp cho co hê thông; phân loai+ Category(n) ['kætigəri] hang, loai+ second-hand: do cu- Call on some pairs to practice the dialogue in font of the class and gives feedback* Checking Slap the board game STEP 2: WHILE – SPEAKING:Activity 1 : Questions- Answers 1. What does Huong say to ask what Lan's hobby is ? 2. What question does Huong make to ask about Lan's ways to collect books ? 3. What does Huong say to ask about the place Lan bought her books ? 4. What question does Hoa put to ask about Lan's way of organizing books ? 5. What does Huong say to ask about Huong's plan for the future + Activity 2 : Role- play - Now that you have five questions. This time you are going to play the roles of Nam and Nga, who are talking about stamps collections. You can use those five questions to ask about your friend's hobby and you can use the following information as help + Hobby: stamps + How to collect stamps: buy from post office, get stamps from oversea pen- frieds + How to organize stamps: classify stamps into categories: animals, landcapes, birds + Where to keep stamps: in album + Plan for the future: collect more stamps

- T goes around to ofter help if need be - T listens to Ss and collects their mistakes for indirect correction STEP 3: POST – SPEAKING:

- Listen to the teachercopy down

- Work in pairs to do the task.- Some Ss answer in front of the class .Expected answers 1. What's your hobby ? 2. Could you tell me how to collect your books ? 3. Where do you byu your books ? 4. How do you organize your collection ?5. What do you plan to do next ?.

- Some pairs stand up to present.

- Work in pairs to make the dialogue.Model: A: What is your hobby, lan? B: Well, I like collecting stamps. I have been collecting them for more than five years. A: Really? You must have a lot of stamps now. Could you tell me how you collect stamp? B: I get them from envelopes and sometimes my relatives or my friends give me some. A: Where do you keep your stamps? B: In albums of course. I’ve had 3 stamp albums so far A: Do you put them all in one



“Find someone who…”- Get Ss to work in pairs. Which pair

finishes the task first will be the winner- Give Ss handouts- Ask the winner to report the results to the

whole class and calls on some other pairs to give out theirs

Handout Like….. Name reason

Swimming Fishing Stamp-collectingMountain-climbingPlaying computer gamesReading booksWatching TVChatting with a friend on the phone

album or do you put them in categories?B: In categories of course. I put local stamps in one and foreign stamps in another, then I classify them into categories like plants , birds, landscape ...A: I see. What do you plan to do next?B: I will attend stamp exhibitions to learn more from experienced collectors to make my collection more valuable.

-Some pairs present in front of the class.

IV./ Summary: (1’) - Summarise the main pointsV./ Home work: (1’) - prepare next lessonE. EVALUATION:Time:…………………………………………………………………………………Contents:…………………………………………………………………………….Methods:……………………………………………………………………………Result:……………………………………………………………………………….Date of preparing:...../......./........ Period: 83

UNIT 13: HOBBIESLESSON 3: LISTENING

A.OBJECTIVES: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, student will be able to know about the advantages and disadvantages of reading. 2. Skill: Listening 3. Political thought: read about the the advantages and disadvantages B.TEACHING AIDS: 1. Teacher:textbook ,poster.. tape, cassette, .. 2. Students: pens, … C.METHODS: T/Wh class, group work, pair work. D.CONTENTS:I/Organisation:

II/Warm up: Brainstorming Get Ss to work in pair to brainstorm all the benefits of reading books in 3 minutesAfter 3 minutes T calls on the pair with the biggest number of benefits to give the answersAsk the other pairs to add more ideas



214


Pair work• Books are help to widen our knowledge• Books give us valuable experience• Books are good sources of information• Books make our life better• Books help us relax

III/ New lesson:Teacher’s activities Time Students’ activities

STEP 1: PRE – LISTENING:1.New words:+ Bygone(a) ;past qua khư, + Gigantic(a) :very great+ Ignorant(a): stupid+To be fed up with: ch¸n ngÊy+To cope with= to face with: ®èi phã ®¬ng ®Çu víi+ Jungle (n): forest :rưng nhiê t đơi+ Profitably(adv) co lơi, co ich; + To be fed up with: ch¸n ngÊy+ To cope with= to face with: ®èi phã, ®¬ng ®Çu víi- Ask Ss to repeat- Call some Ss to read

again.“*checking by R.O.R2.T/F Prediction:- Ask Ss to predict the statements

are T/F- Exchange the ideas- Ask Ss to write their prediction-STEP 3: WHILE – LISTENING1.Checking the prediction- Ask Ss to listen carefully and

check the answer.- Call ss to give correct answer- Listen and give mark.

2. Gap- filling - T gives Ss handouts of activity 2 - Intructions: Now listen to rest of the

- listen and repeat- copy down

- read the statements- give prediction- write their prediction

- listen carefully- checking the answer- write theirm correct answersSuggested answers : 1T 2. F( His parents soon got fed up with having to read to him continually)3. F(He started with simple ABC books)4. F(Now he reads just about anything that is available 5 T 6T 7T 8 T

- Work in groups

Suggested answers :



listening text again and work in pairs to write the missing words. You will listen to the tape twice - T plays the tape twice - T calls on some pairs to give the answers - T goes over the answers with the class

STEP 3: POST – LISTENING* Discussion- Get Ss to work in groups of 4 to talk about the disadvantages of over-reading- Go around checking and offering help- Call on the groups to present their ideas and other groups to add some more ideas- T gives the feeback

1. wonderfurl 2. disease 3. jungle 4. certainly 5. ignorantly 6. profitably

Group workSome disadvantages of over reading- becoming shortsighted- not having enough physical exercise- lacking practical knowledgebecoming a bookworm


Date of preparing:……../……./2013 Period: 84UNIT 13: HOBBIESLESSON 4: WRITING

A.OBJECTIVES: 1. Knowledge: - Students can write about a collection. 2. Skill: writing 3. Political thought: Writing about a collection .B.TEACHING AIDS: 1. Teacher:textbook ,poster.., .. 2. Students: pens, … C.METHODS: T/Wh class, group work, pair work. D.CONTENTS:I/Organisation:



216


II/Warm up: (5’)Homework checking. Teacher's activities Students' activities- Ask one st to talk about the disadvantages of over-reading.- Other sts listen and give rmarks.- Listen and give remarks

- becoming shortsighted- not having enough physical exercise- lacking practical knowledgebecoming a bookworm

III/ New lesson: Teacher's activities time Students' activitiesSTEP 1: PRE- WRITING-Ask Ss to answer the questions:1. Where to buy books2. How to collect books3. How to keep books4. How to classify books5. When started collecting6. Why to collect books7. Plan for the future

STEP 2: WHILE – WRITING:- With weaker Ss, T allows them to write about a book collection and stamp collection, using suggestions or outlines- T gets Ss to work in pairs to make an outline for their writing by answering the questions in pre-writing. They should discuss to choose the most appropritate detail to support the main ideas

- T gets Ss to write a paragraph about their collection in 15m, base on the outlines they have produced. Ss should arrange the ideas in a logical way

STEP 3: POST - WRITING

Call two Ss to go to the board to write- T asks Ss to exchange their writing

Work in groups of four

-Listen to the teacher - copy down1. from book shop, second-hand stall, parents, friends..2. buy the book when find it interesting3. keep them in a big bookself4.different categories: history, people, science…5. at age of 126.broaden knowledge, know more about the world…7. continue to make the collection richer

Individual workI’m very much interested in collecting books and have a book collection at home. I started collecting books when I was a 12 year-old student. I buy the book whenever I find them interesting. Near my house are several book shops, so when I have free time I go there to find books for my collection. Sometimes I also buy books in second-hand book stalls, and occasionally, my parents and friends give me some.



with another student for peer correction- T goes around and collects mistakes and errors- T writes Ss’ typical errors on the board- T provides correction only when Ss are not able to correct the errors

Now I have a total about 100 books and I keep them all in a big bookshelf in my bedroom. I classify them into different categories: books about history, books about famous people, and books about science…I love collecting books because books helps me broaden my knowledge and know more about the world. Also, reading books train my patience


Date of preparing:……./…../ 2013 Period: 85UNIT 13: HOBBIES

LESSON 5: LANGUAGE FOCUSA.OBJECTIVES: 1. Knowledge: * distinguish the 4 sounds /pt/, /bd/, /bz/ ps/

* know how to use cleft sentences- subiect focus - object focus - adverbial focus.

2. Skill: writng + listening 3. Political thought: Ss can distinguish the 4 sounds /pt/, /bd/, /bz/ ps/& know how to use cleft sentences.B.TEACHING AIDS: 1. Teacher:textbook ,poster.., .. 2. Students: pens, … C.METHODS: T/Wh class, group work, pair work. D.CONTENTS:I/Organisation:

II/Warm up: - T write these 4 words on the board Stopped/ robbed/ stops/ robs Pt bd ps bzHow can we pronounce the ending souds in these words?



218


( Ss give answers) OK, in our lesson today, we'll practice these sounds T asks Ss open their books to page 151 T hangs this chart on the BB.

Teacher's activities time Students' activitiesI. PRONUNCIATION1. Distinguish sounds- T models the /pt/, /bd/, /ps/ and /bz/ for few times and explains how to pronounce them- T gets Ss to read the words in each column out loud in chorus for a few more times. T listens and corrects if Ss pronounce the words incorrectly2. Practicing sentences containing the target sounds-Ask Ss to work in pairs and take turn to read aloud the sentences- Go around to listen and take notes of the typical errors- Call on some Ss to read the sentences again and provides corrective feedback

II. GRAMMAR:Step 1: Presentation.Cleft sentences - T gives examples to explainThis boy visited his uncle last month S O Adv+ Subject focus: It was the boy who visited his uncle last month+ object focus: It was his uncle that the boy visited last month+ adverbial focus: It was last month that the boy visited his uncle- T calls on some Ss to comment on these

examples- T explain and ask Ss to do the following

sentence:- Form: It + be+ focus+ clause1. Subject focusIt is/was + S+ that/who +verb: chÝnh ai ®ã lµm c¸I g×2. Object focusIt is/was + O+ that/who(m)+ S +verb: chÝnh ai ®ã, mét c¸I g× ®ã mµ

- Write down five sounds.- Listen to the teacher and repeat.- Look at the book , listen and repeat.


*Example:It was David who studied English at OxfordIt was English that David studied at OxfordIt was at Oxford that David studied E

Individual work, pair work and whole Class*key: 1. It was the boy who visited his uncle last month2. It was my mother who bought me a present on my birthday3. It was Huong and Sandra who sang together at the party4. It was Nam’s father who got angry with him 5. It was the boys who played football all day long6. It was the girl who received a letter for her friend yesterday

Individual work, and whole class*key:1. It is E that the man is learning



…3.Adverbial focusIt is/was + adverbial of place + that+ S+verb+…(chÝnh n¬I nµo ®ã ai ®ã/ mét c¸I g× ®ã lµm g×..)

Step 2:Practice Exercise 1(7m)- T asks Ss to do exercise 1 individually

and then compare their answers with another student

- T calls on some Ss to read out their answers

- T elicits peer correction and gives correct answers if necessary

Exercise 2(7m)- ask Ss to do exercise 2 individually and

then calls some Ss to write their answers on the board

- T elicits feedback from other Ss Correct answers

Exercise 3(7m)- Ask Ss to do exercise 3 in pairs- Ask them to compare answer with

another pair- Call on some Ss to read aloud their

answers- Ask other Ss to feedback and gives

correct answersStep 3: Production.Noughts and crossesMy dog Their sister His wifeAt home In the library Her best

friendMy mother This Sunday Mai - Ask Ss to work in pairs to make cleft

sentences- Call on some Ss to read out their

sentences, and other Ss give comments

2. It was the book that the woman gave him3. It was the postcard that she sent her friend4. It was the book that Hoa borrowed from Long5. It was his grandfather who(m )the little boy greeted in a strange language6. It was the policeman who(m )the pedestrian asked a lot of questions7. It was the stranger who(m) the dog barked at

Pair work and whole class*key:1. It was in the garden that the boy hit the dog2. It was for tea that she made some cakes3. It was for him that his father repaired the bicycle4. It was on his birthday that she presented him a book5. It was in Britain that he met his wife6. It was from the shop that she bought that present7. It was at 8:00 a.m that the meeting started

Whole class

IV./ Summary: (1’) - Summarise the main pointsV./ Home work: (1’) - prepare next lessonE. EVALUATION:Time:…………………………………………………………………………………Contents:…………………………………………………………………………….



Methods:……………………………………………………………………………Result:……………………………………………………………………………….


A.OBJECTIVES: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to : Revision unit 13 2. Skills: practice doing exercise 3. Political thought: revision grammar, vocabularyB.TEACHING AIDS: 1. Teacher: lesson plan ,textbook , pen, 2. Students: pens, notebooks, textbooks… C. METHODS: T/Wh class, groupwork, pairwork D. CONTENTS:I. Organisation:

II/ Warm up:III/ New lesson Teacher's activities time Students' activitiesA. VOCABULARY.Complete the sentence with the correct form of the word in the box.

accomplish succeed admire accompany collect

discard indulge occupy classify profit1. She needed only one more stamp to

complete her …….2. You could spend your time more

…..with a good book.3. The girl sang to the ……of a piano.4. Drawing and singing were among

her many….. .5. He never lost the …of his students.6. My doctor advised me to avoid

excessive ……….. in sweets and canned drinks.

7. We need something to keep the children ….in their summer holiday.

8. The books are …..into different categories to subject.

- work in groups- key:

1. collection .2. profitably 3. accompaniment 4. accomplishments. 5. admiration 6. indulgence 7. occupied 8. classified 9. success. 10. discarded



221


9. Confidence is the key to ……10. The room was littered with

……..newspapersB. GRAMMAR:Step 1: presentation

- using cleft sentences to rewrite these sentences.1. She bought the car from Tom.2. My secretary sent the bill to Mr

Harding yesterday.3. He already plays for national side;

he only turned professional last year.

4. The film was made in Bristol.5. We are coming to stay with Jane

this weekend.6. Columbus sailed to America in

1492.7. The president makes the important

decisions.8. I'm not looking forward to physics,

but I'm most worried about, the statistics exam.

- work in groups- Key:

1. It was Tom who/ that she bought the car from.

2. It was my secretary who/ that sent the bill to Mr Harding yesterday.

3. He already plays for the national side, it was only last year when/that he turned professional.

4. It was in Bristol where/ that the film was made.

5. It is Jane who/ that we are coming to stay with this weekend.

6. It was in 1492 when/ that Columbus sailed to America

7. It is the president who/ that makes the important decisions.

8. I'm not looking forward to physics, but it is the statistics exam which/that I'm most worried about

IV. Summary: summarize the main pointsV. Home work : - prepare next lessonE.EVALUATION:………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………




TEST YOURSELF EA.OBJECTIVES: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to understand the skills and knowledges from Unit 12 to Unit 13 2. Skill: Listening +writing+ reading 3. Political thought: review unit 11 & 13B.TEACHING AIDS: 1. Teacher:textbook , cassette player , sub- board 2. Students: pens, … B.TEACHING AIDS: 1. Teacher: textbook , Picture, poster. 2. Students: pens, text books… C.METHODS: T/Wh class, group work, pair work. D.CONTENTS:I/Organisation:

II/ Warm up: noIII/ New lesson:

Teacher's activities time Students' activitiesI. LISTENINGT lets sts read the questions before they listenT asks sts to listen twice Sts give the answerOthers remarkT lets sts listen once again to check their answer II. READING:T lets sts read the passageSts work in pairs the discuss the answer T goes around and helps them

- Individual work- Listen carefully- Correct the answers* Suggested keys1. Television brings pictures and souds from around the world into millions of home2. A person sitting in his home can watch the president make a speech or visit a foreign3. Home viewers can see and learn about people, places and things in far



223


Sts give their answer Others remark and correctT remark and gives comments III/ PRONUNCIATION & GRAMMAR: T read the soundSts listen the tick T asks sts to work in groupSts discuss then give their answer Others remark and correctT remarks

IV/ WRITING: T lets sts write the writing on the board and correctT give the marks

away lands.4. Entertainment programmes consist of plays or dramas, light comedies, sporting events, and motion pictures.- Read silently- Read silently then tick T or F- Correct the answers*Suggested keys

1. T 2.F 3.T 4.T 5.F - Individual work- Correct the results*Suggested keysa. Pronunciation1. street 2. squeeze 3. meets 4.managedb. Grammar :1. who 2.that 3.that 4.who 5.who 6.that

Correct their writings*Sample writing: My hobby is reading. I read story books, magazines, newspapers and any kind of material that I find interesting.My hobby got started when I was a little boy. I had always wanted my parents to read fairy tales and other stories to me. Soon they got fed up with having to read to me continually. So as soon as I could, I learned to read. I started with simple ADC books. Soon I could read fairy tales and stories. Now I read just about anything that is available. Reading enables me to learn about so many things. I learned about how people lived in bygone days. I learned about the wonders of the world, space travel, human achievements, gigantic whales, tiny viruses and other fascinating things. The wonderful thing about reading is that I do not have to learn things the very hard way. For example, I do not have to catch a disease to know that it can kill me. I know the danger so I can avoid it. Also I do not have to deep into the jungle to find out about tigers. I can read all about it in a book. Books provide the reader with so many facts and so much information. They have certainly helped me in my daily life. I am better equipped to cope with living. Otherwise I would go about ignorantly learning things the hard way. So I continue to read. Reading is indeed a


Lesson plan grade 11 school year: 2013 - 2014good hobby.

IV. Summary: summarize the main pointsV. Home work : - learn by heart the new words - prepare next lessonE.EVALUATION:………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………


ĐỀ KIỂM 45 phutA.OBJECTIVES: 1. Knowledge: Test their knowledge from unit 9 to unit 11 2. Skills: Writing + listening 3. Political thought: do the test individuallyB.TEACHING AIDS: 1. Teacher: test handouts 2. Students: pens, C. METHODS: T/Wh class, groupwork, pairwork D. CONTENTS:I. Organisation:

II. Revision:III./New lesson:MATRIXKHUNG MA TRẬN ĐỀ KIỂM TRA

Tên chủ đề Nhận biết Thông hiểu Vận dụng Cộng Cấp độ thấp Cấp độ

caoLISTENING(MCQ)

The asian Games




READING (MCQ)

hobbies

Số câu:10Số điểm 2,5



WRITING Tự luận

- cleft sentence

Số câu: 4 Số câu: 4 Số câu:4


Lesson plan grade 11 school year: 2013 - 2014Số điểm: 2 Số điểm: 2 Tỉ lệ:20%LANGUAGE FOCUS (Grammar, vocabulary and speaking) (MCQ)

- relative clause-omitted relative pronoun-Word to express Asian game, hobbies- speaking

Số câu 10Số điểm:2,5



PHONETICS(MCQ)

- distinguish the sound/s/;/a/;/ai/;/a;/


Số câu:4Số điểm:1


Tổng số câu: 33 Số câu: 14Tỉ lệ: 42,5%

Số câu: 15Tỉ lệ: 45,5%

Số câu: 4 Tỉ lệ: 12, %

Số câu: 33

Good evening. It’s 10.15 and it’s time for “The Asian Games Report”. It’s the 3rd

day of the Games. Well, today’s most important event was the women’s 200-metre freestyle. The Japanese, Yuko was the first and got the gold medal. She made a new record time of 1 minute 58 seconds. The Japanese athletes won two gold medals yesterday, and three the day before, so in the first three days they’ve won six gold medals.

...Here we’re in the Gymnasium. Lily, the Chinese gymnast, has just finished her display. She’s got an average of 9.5 points. That’s the best score today! Lily’s won the gold medal!

...And this is Lee Bong-ju coming from Korea. This is the second time he completed in the long jump- at the Asian Games. Last time he jumped 8.5 metres. Today he’s won a gold medal for men’s long jump. He jumped 8.9 metres....Now we’re waiting for the last high jumper, Vichai coming from Thailand. The bar is at 2.30 metres and... it seems too high for him. Vichai has just jumped! ...Ooh! He’s crashed into the bar! He’s landing. The bar has fallen too. He’s getting up and walking away. But he’s very disappointed

I.Listen and tick (ν) true (T) or false (F).1. It is the third day of thr Game.2. The japaness athletes won two gold medals yesterday.3. Last time he jumped 9.8 metres.4. Vichai comes from Korea5. Vichai feels disappointed after his performance.

III. PHONETICS:Choose one word whose underlined part is pronounced differently. 1. A. come B. capture C. coexist D. appreciate2. A. nature B. Asian C. squash D. spacious3. A. purity B. tiny C. reply D. happy4. A. standard B. dark C. spark D. pharmacist

IV. GRAMMAR, VOCABULARY AND SPEAKING.1: Chọn từ hay ngữ cần được sữa lỗi , tương ứng với A, B, C hay D:



The flight on it I wanted to travel was fully booked A B C D

2: Chọn phương án đúng A,B C hoặc D để hoàn thành các câu sau : The person _____ prepared this report has a real talent for writing.A. whose B. which C. who D. whom

3: Chọn phương án đúng A,B, C hoặc D để hoàn thành các câu sau : – Let’s go camping. - ______. Then we can rest and enjoy ourselves in the quiet countryside.A. That’s a good idea. B. Not at allC. Thank you D. What can I do for you?

4. Do you know the man about ____ they’re talking? A. whom B. where C. that D. who

5. Where is the girl ____ sells tickets? A. who B. whose C. whom D. A&C are correct

6. I need to find a painting ____ will match the rest of my room. A. Ω B. whom C. who D. which

7. What’s the music to ____ you are listening? A. whose B. which C. whom D. that

8. Choose the word or phrase a, b, c or d that best completes the sentence This multi-sport event is an occasion when friendship and ..............are built and promoted.

A. knowledge B. solidarity C. effort D. enthusiasm

9. The man gave her the book last week. Which of the following is adverbial focus?

A. It was the book that the man gave her last week.B. It was last week that the man gave her the book.C. It was the man who gave her the book last week.

D. It was the book that was given to her last week

10: Which of the following is CORRECT?A. Mr Long, you met yesterday, is my neighbour.B. Mr Long, whom you met yesterday, is my neighbourC. Mr Long, you met him yesterday, is my neighbourD. Mr Long, whom you met him yesterday, is my neighbour

IV. READING.

A. Đọc đoạn văn sau và chọn phương án đúng , từ câu 1đến câu 5Coin collecting is one of the most important hobbies in the world. Most coin (1)

_____ simply enjoy trying to acquire a complete set of a nation’s coin. Some people collect coins as works of art. (2)_____collect them as an investment, to be sold later at a profit. Through coins, a collector can also (3)_____something about certain famous people and events in a country’s (4)_____. Imaginative coin collectors can build many types (5)_____collection. 1: A. collecting B. collectors C. collection D. collected2: A. Others B. Other C. Another D. The other3: A. give B. learn C. offer D. teach



4: A. history B. nature C. science D. geography5: A. on B. in C. of D. forB. Đọc đoạn văn sau và chọn phương án đúng, từ câu 1 đến câu 5

People collect a lot of objects: posters, stamps, dolls. Some people collect objects which are connected with historical events or with famous people. But one of the strangest collections is that of eggcups. Kevin Murphy in Yorkshire has 10,000 of them. Not surprisingly, his favourite eggcup is one in the shape of a typical Yorkshire man.

Kevin’s hobby began seven years ago, after he lent an elephant eggcup to a granddaughter who took such a liking to it that she insisted on keeping it. Kevin saw a few eggcups he liked at a sale at a local shop, and started collecting them. Others like Kevin’s eggcups too. “I have just bought a replacement for one of my favourites, which mysteriously disappeared last week,” he said.1: Kevin’s hobby is collecting _____.

A. Yorkshire men. B. eggcups. C. famous people. D. objects.2: Kevin has pursued his hobby _____.

A. for seven years.B. when he lent an elephant eggcup to his granddaughter.C. seven years ago.D. since he bought a replacement for his favourite.

3: The eggcup he lent his granddaughter is in the shape of a (n ) _____.A. Yorkshire man. B. eggs. C. elephant. D. A and C.

4: What happened to Kevin last week?.A. He saw his eggcup at a local shop.B. He bought one of his favourite eggcups.C. He lent an elephant eggcup to his granddaughter.D. He lost one of his favourite eggcups.

5: Which of the following sentences is true according to the passage?A. Kevin’s hobby is different from other people’s.B. Kevin is a young eggcup collector.C. Kevin has a large collection of Yorkshire men.D. Kevin has never bought anything for his collection.

V. WRITING : Rewrite the following sentences without changing their meaning.1. Bermuda got its name in 1964.

It was in ………………………………………………………2. I’ve lost my book.

It is my book …………………………………………………. 3. I saw him in the street only last week. It was only _______________________________________4. You are wrong not me.

It is you …………………………………………………………….

IV. Summary: summarize the main pointsV. Home work : - learn by heart the new words - prepare next lessonE.EVALUATION:



………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………


UNIT 15: SPACE CONQUESTLESSON 1: READING

A.OBJECTIVES: 1. Knowledge: :By the end of the lesson, students will be able to

- scan read for specific ideas - skim read for general ideas

2. Skills: reading 3. Political thought: read about Yuri Alekseyevich.B.TEACHING AIDS: 1. Teacher: lesson plan ,textbook , pen, 2. Students: pens, notebooks, textbooks… C. METHODS: T/Wh class, groupwork, pairwork D. CONTENTS:I. Organisation:

II/ Warm up: who is who?A B C D



229


*key:A. Yuri Alekseyevich GagarinB. Neil Armstrong C. Buzz Aldrin D. Pham Tuan

Lead-in: Who was the first person in the world to set foot on the moon ?, Gagarin, and today we are going to read about this interesting person. In the first place,

III/ New lesson:Teacher’sactivities Studentsactivities

STEP1: PRE-READING1.Vocabulary1. gravity ( n) - the pull of the earth.2. cosmonaut ( n): translation3. last (v): gap-fillingHow long does this film ...........?Expected answer: last4. name after (v): contextThis street was named after a Vietnamese writer.What does named after mean ?Expected answer: ®îc ®Æt tªn theo2.CheckingT asks Ss to work in pairs to complete the following sentences with the words just learnt.1. Pham Tuan was a very well-known .......in Vietnam.2. Water runs downhill because of ........... .3. My school was ............a national hero.4. Our summer holiday often .........about 3 months.T says: Now let's get back to Gagarin, the first person to come to the moon. Let's open your books to page 167 and read the reading text about him.

STEP 2: WHILE - READING

n. listen to the teachercopy down

Ecpected answers:1.cosmonaut 2.gravity 3.named after 4.lasts



1: Matching the headingi. Now you read the text and then

work in pairs to match the headings to the paragraphs.

T calls on some Ss to give answers.T gives feedback.2. T/ F statements1. Gagarin lifted off into space on 12th

April 19602. Gagarin became the second person to eat and drink in weightlessness3. Gagarin’s flight attracted worldwide attention and made him a hero4. Gagarin could have made another space flight in March 19685. The first words spoken from space were : “I see the Earth. It’s so beautiful

3. Questions – Answersj. Divide the class into groups of

four.k. Give handout (questions) to each

group.l. Asks Ss to read the text again and

work in groups of four to write their answers on the handouts.

m. Ask each group to take its handout back after correction.

2. T/ F statements1. Gagarin lifted off into space on 12th

April 19602. Gagarin became the second person to eat and drink in weightlessness3. Gagarin’s flight attracted worldwide attention and made him a hero4. Gagarin could have made another space flight in March 19685. The first words spoken from space were : “I see the Earth. It’s so beautiful

STEP 3: POST – WRITING.Gap-fillT asks Ss to read the reading text and then work in pairs to do the gap-fill test (task

o. listen to the Teacherp. skim the text and answer

Suggested answers:P1 - B (the lift-off)P2 - E (Uncertainties)P3 - D (A view of earth)P4 - C (Congratulations)P5 - A (The tragic accident)

*key:1. F 2. F 3. T 4. F 5. T

q. work in groupSuggested answers1. He became the first human being in space when he was 27.2. He was in space for 108 minutes.3. Before his flight, these questions were raised - What would happen to a human being in space ?- How would the body react to the extreme changes in temperature ?- How would the mind deal with the psychological tension ?4. It was more than 17.000 miles per hour.5. Because of a tragic accident.6. After his death, his hometown of Gzhatsk was renamed Gagarin, and the Cosmonaut Training Center at Star City, Russia, was given the name to honour this national hero

r. read the text again and fill in the gap



3/page 169)T calls on some pairs to give the answers.T gives feedback.

Suggested answers:1.cosmonaut 2.lasted 3.uncertainies 4.gravity 5.view 6.chapter7.impossible 8.symbol



UNIT 15: SPACE CONQUESTLESSON 2: SPEAKING


- ask and answer questions on given information- talk about historical events in the space conquest

2. Skills: speaking 3. Political thought: talk about important events in space exploration.B.TEACHING AIDS: 1. Teacher: lesson plan ,textbook , pen, 2. Students: pens, notebooks, textbooks… C. METHODS: T/Wh class, groupwork, pairwork D. CONTENTS:I. Organisation:

II/ Warm up: what event is this?



232


*key:It is china launch its first manned spacecraft into spaceIII/ New lesson:

Teacher’sactivities Students’activitiesSTEP1: PRE-SPEAKING*Vocabulary+launch ( v) (gap-fill)+2. mark (v) (translation)+ human (n) (gap-fill)+ orbit (n) (translationChecking:Rub out and rememberSTEP 2: WHILE- SPEAKING1: Questions-Answers

s. You are going to read a piece of news about manned spacecaft of China, then work in pairs to ask and answer questions about the text.

1.When did China launch its first manned spacecraft into space?2.What is the name of China’s first manned spacecraft?3.What is the name of the astronaut?4.How old was he when he flew into space?5. How important is the successful flight to China?6. How many countries in the world have been able to carry out independently manned space activities? What are they?

2: Pair - workInstructions:

t. Open your books on page 171

-listen and copyRepeat the new words

x. listen to the teachery. work in pairs

Student A: When did China launch its first spacecraft into space ?Student B: On Oct 15, 2003*key:1. On 15th October in 2003.2.Its name is “Shenzhou 5”3. His name is Yang Liwei.4.He was 38 years old then5.The successful flight marked a milestone in China’s space project. 6. There are three. They are USSR, USA, and China



and have a look at the events in space exploration of 8 different countries.

u. Divide the events into 4 groups . v. Ask ss to ask answer about the

envents.T goes around to offer help.T takes notes of Ss' mistakes for indirect correction.After 7 minutes, T asks them to stop and gives feedback on their work.STEP 3: POST – SPEAKING.Writing

w. Using the information given in box / page 171, write a short paragraph about Pham Tuan, the first Vietnamese person to set foot on the moon.

• pairsStudent A: When did China launch its first spacecraft into space ?Student B: On Oct 15, 2003

- Group-workSample:Pham Tuan is the first Vietnamese who flies into space. He flied a long with VV. Gorbotko who was a Russian cosmonaut.He stayed 8 days in orbit.



UNIT 15: SPACE CONQUESTLESSON 3: LISTENING


- listen for specific information- listen for general ideals

2. Skills: listening 3. Political thought: talk about the first human moon landingB.TEACHING AIDS: 1. Teacher: lesson plan ,textbook , pen, 2. Students: pens, notebooks, textbooks… C. METHODS: T/Wh class, groupwork, pairwork D. CONTENTS:I. Organisation:



234


II/ Warm up: Matching THE PICTUREz. work ingroups of 4 and then matching the picture with the captionsaa. call ss to write down their answer

*key:1.d 2.a 3. c 4. e 5.b

Lead-in:What do you know about Apollo crew ?(They first set foot on the moon)Now look at picture A, how many people were there in the crew ?(There were 3)Now today we are going to listen about this crew. First I am going to help you know some new words.III/New lesson:

Teacher’sactivities students’activitiesSTEP 1:PRE- LISTENING*Vocabulary+ surface(n) ( drawing)\+ experiment(n) ( question)+ astronaut (n): spaceman+ challenge (n): (translation)CheckingT asks Ss to complete the following sentences with the words just learnta. They couldn't walk on the moon's ...... unless they wore spacesuitb. Putting a man on the moon was a great ........... at that time.c. Mr Smith is doing his ............. in the chemistry lab .d. He was the first ............ to reach the moon.STEP 2: WHILE - LISTENING

1. T/ F statements: bb.Listen and work in pairs to decide

if the statements are true or false. Remember that the tape will be played twice.

cc. T gives Ss handouts of T-F testdd.T plays the tape twiceee. calls on some Ss to give the

answers.

2 Answer the questionsff. T gives Ss handouts of activity 2gg.listen to the listening text again

ll. listen to the teachermm. copy down

nn.listen to the Teacheroo.read the statements carefullypp.listen to the tape and do the test

suggested answers: 1.F 2.F 3.F 4.F 5.T

qq.read the quest tions carefullyrr. under keys wordsss. and listen again and answer

Suggested answers:1. NASA's Apollo program wa developed to meet President Kennedy's challenge.2. The Apollo 11 was launched on July 16, 1969.



and answer the questions in the handout.

hh.You will listen to the tape twice.ii. T gives Ss 1 minute to read the

questions.jj. T plays the tape twice kk.T calls on some Ss to give the

answersSTEP 3: POST – LISTENING Discussion- Choose one of the following topics and discuss it in pairs1. If you knew you had only one more week to live on Earth because you would go to the moon and stayed there forever, what would you do on those 7 days ?2. If you had a chance to go to the moon and could take only 3 things with you, what would you choose and why ?

3. The portable life support system was used for controlling the oxygen temperature and pressure inside the spacesuit.4. The astronauts stayed on the surface of the moon they performed a variety of experiments and collected soil and rock samples to return to Earth.6. They returned to Earth on July 24th, 1969.

tt. listen to the Teacheruu.work in pairsvv.present in front of class



UNIT 15: SPACE CONQUESTLESSON 4: WRITING


- write a biography- work in pairs / groups effectively- do the tasks set by T correctly

2. Skills: writing 3. Political thought: write about Neil Armstrong.B.TEACHING AIDS: 1. Teacher: lesson plan ,textbook , pen, 2. Students: pens, notebooks, textbooks… C. METHODS: T/Wh class, groupwork, pairwork D. CONTENTS:I. Organisation:



236


II/ Home checkingww. write the new wordsxx.check and give marks

III/ New lesson:Teacher’sactivities Students’activities

STEP 1: PRE -WRITING*Vocabulary+ disaster ( explanation)+ Quote (n) ( elicitation)+ investigate ( v) ( gap-fill)+ biography (n) ( translation)Checking:Rub out and remember

STEP 2 : PRE - WRITING1.Gap – filling- You are going to read about Amstrong's biography. After reading it, you have to work in groups of four to put each of the headings in the box in the appropriate blank.- T calls on five representatives of five groups ( chosen at random) to go to the BB to write down their answer.

2. Writing yy.T asks Ss to read Amstrong's

biography again and work individually to write a paragraph of Neil Amstrong.

zz. Ss write their work on their notebooks.

aaa. T goes around to offer help.bbb. T takes notes of Ss' mistakes

for indirect correction.

STEP 3: POST – WRITINGccc. T calls on 2 Ss to go to the

BB to write down their work. T, together with Ss, finds out the mistakes and corrects them.

ddd. T gives feedback on Ss' work.eee. T points out some common

mistakes made by Ss when doing

fff.liste to the teacherggg. copy down

hhh. work in groupsiii. read about Amstrong’sbiographyjjj. and do exercise

Suggested answers:1. birth 2. place of birth 3. known as 4. career 5. quote

kkk. work individually and write draft

lll. go to BB to readSampleNeil Amstrong is an American astronaut. He is known as the first person to walk on the moon. He was born on August 5th, 1930 in Ohio. From 1949 to 1952, he worked as a pilot in the United States Navy. Amstrong received his BS from Purdue University in 1955. In 1962 , he joined the Nasa astronaut program. On july 20th 1969 Neil Amstrong beame the first human to step on the's moon's surface. Amstrong received his M.S from the University of Southern California. He resigned from nasa a year later and from 1971 to 1979, he taught at the university of Cincinnati. In 1986, Amstrong was pointed



this writing task.sample development

T comes to Ss to encourage them to write T collects some mistakes made by Ss for indirect correction T asks two Ss to go to the BBto write down their work T gives feedback

vice chairman of the committee that investigated the Challenger shuttle disaster. Amstrong is aslo well- known for what he said when he stepped on the moon's surface. There's one small step for man, one giant leap for mankind



UNIT 15: SPACE CONQUESTLESSON 5: LANGUAGE FOCUS


* diatingguish the 4 sounds / nt/, /nd/,/nθ/, /ns/, /nz/ *Could /be able to * Tag questions 2. Skills: writing + speaking 3. Political thought: practice doing exercisesB.TEACHING AIDS: 1. Teacher: lesson plan ,textbook , pen, 2. Students: pens, notebooks, textbooks… C. METHODS: T/Wh class, groupwork, pairwork D. CONTENTS:I. Organisation:



II/ Revison: no

III/ New lesson:

I./ PRONUNCIATION1. Distinguishing the sound- Who can pronounce these words? (Ss stand up to say the words )

mmm. T corrects their mistakes if necessary

nnn. T asks Ss to play attention to ending sounds of the five words

ooo. Went end month chance phones

/nt/ /nd/ /n0/ /chnce /nz/ ppp. T hangs this chart

+ /nt/ rent, tenant, dind't+ /nd/ remind, warned, friend +/nθ/ seventh, tenth fifth + /ns/ tense, glance, Florence +/nz/ learns, tones, Barnes - reads the words aloud and asks Ss to repeat 2.practice - T hangs this chart A: Florence, Mr.Barns went on the tenth last month B: Oh, I have warned you, haven't ? Did you pay the rent ? A: Only to the seventh B: Only to the seventh? A: Yes, and we have no chance to see him again. Is he your friend ? B: No, Mr.Barns is not my fiend and if he phones, remind him that he must pay the rent to the end of the month A: Don't be so tense. We'll have a new tenant on the thirteenth of this month T reads the sentences aloud, then asks Ss to listen and repeat after him T calls on some Ss to read the sentences aloud, correcting their mistakes if

- listen to the teachercopy down

/nt/ /nd/ , /nθ/ /ns/ /nz/ rent, remind seventh tense, learns tenant, warned, tenth fifth glance, tones, dind't friend Florence Barne

aaaa. reads the words aloud



239


necessary

II. GRAMMAR1. Presentation

qqq. T shows a picture of a man running

rrr.T asks : Could he run fast five years ago ? (Yes) He could run fast 5 years ago

sss. T shows a picture of a man whose leg was hurt but he was running fast

T asks: Did his hurt ?(Yes) His leg hurt but he was able to run fast

T explains + Could: exprees and ability +was/ were able to: express an effort to do st

2. Practice *Ex 1 - Complete the sentences, using could, could't or was/ were ( not) able to - T asks Ss to open their books to page 176 - T asks Ss to work in pairs to - T revises how to make tag questions +It is a nice day, isn't it ? +They are hungry, are they? +You live here, don't you? +You don't speak English, do you?

ttt. T asks Ss to do exercise 2/ page 176/ 177 in pairs

uuu. T goes around to offer help vvv. T calls on some Ss to read

their answers aloud www. T corrects their mistakes if

necessary Ex 3

xxx. T asks Ss to do exercise 3/ page 177 in apirs

yyy. T goes around to offer help zzz. T calls on some Ss to read

their answers alound T corrects their mistakes if necessary Suggested answers 1.... doesn't she? 2. .... haven't you ?3.... wasn't it? 4. ... didn't we? 5. ...won't we? 6. ...can't you

EXERCISE 1

1. was able 2. was able to 3. could 4. was able to 5. could 6. couldn't

exercise 2:Suggested answers 1. It's a very expensive restanrant, isn't it ?2. The film was great, wasn't it ? 3. She has a lovely voice, doecn't she? 4. It doesn't look good on me, does it? 5. You have had your cut, haven't you ?

exercise 3:Suggested answers 1.... doesn't she? 2. .... haven't you ?3.... wasn't it? 4. ... didn't we? 5. ...won't we? 6. ...can't you 7. ... musn't it ?



7. ... musn't it ? 3. Production:Mistake Correction Correct the mistake in each sentence below 1. The bus was crowed with people but finally I could find a seat 2. She didn't able to find him although she had gone everywhere 3. Iam not a fool, am nit I ? 4. It seems to me that she is very good at maths doesn't it /

sugguested key:1. could → was able to 2. didn't → wasn't 3. am not → aren't 4. deosn't it → isn't she

IV. Summary: summarize the main pointsV. Home work : - prepare next lessonE.EVALUATION:………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………


TEST CORRECTION

A.OBJECTIVES: 1. Knowledge: After the lesson, Ss will be able to know about the common mistakes and their knowledge , from that they will know how to improve their knowledge of English 2. Skills: Speaking +reading + writing 3. Political thought: .know how to improve their knowledge of EnglishB.TEACHING AIDS: 1. Teacher:textbook ,poster.... 2. Students: pens, … C. METHODS: T/Wh class, groupwork, pairwork D.PROCEDURE:I/Organisation:



II.Revision:III.New lesson:

I./ LISTENING: Mỗi câu đúng 0,4 điểmTick true(T) or false(f)1.T 2.T 3.F 4. F 5.T


1.D 2. C 3.C 4.A


1.A 2.C 3.A 4.A 5.A 6.D 7.B 8.B 9.B 10 .BIV./ READING : mỗi câu đúng 0,25 điểm

A. Đọc đoạn văn sau và chọn một câu trả lời thích hợp nhất, từ câu 1 đến câu 5. 1. B 2.A 3.B 4.A 5.CB. Đọc đoạn văn sau và chọn một câu trả lời thích hợp nhất, từ câu 1 đến câu 5.

1. B 2.A 3.C 4.D 5.A

IV. WRITING: (2 points)1. Bermuda got its name in 1964.

It was in 1964 that Bermuda got its name.2. I’ve lost my book.

It is my book that I have lost. 3. I saw him in the street only last week. It was only last week that I saw him in the street.4. You are wrong not me.

It is you who are wrong.

IV/ Summary: Summarise the main poitsV/ Homework ; Prepare new lessonE/ Evaluation………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………* Result: Class Students Mark 9,

10 7, 8 5, 6 3,4 0,1,2 > TB



242


11A1

11A2


REVISIONA.OBJECTIVES: 1. Knowledge : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to:

+ Will able to revise the use of the Relative pronouns and to distinguish Defining and Non-defining relative clause. + will be able to rewrite sentences using the Relative clauses

2. Skills: writing 3. Political thought: Students revise Defining and Non-defining relative clause. B.TEACHING AIDS: 1. Teacher: lesson plan ,textbook , pen,handouts, 2. Students: pens, notebooks, textbooks… C. METHODS: T/Wh class, groupwork, pairwork D. CONTENTS:I. Organisation:


II.Revision:III. New lesson

Teacher’s activities Students’ activities

STEP 1: PRESENTATION.• Briefly review the relative clauses

1. Defining relative clausesDefinition

Defining relative clauses which describe the preceding noun are essential to the understanding of the noun; so they could not be omitted.

Ex: The boy who gave me the letter yesterday ran away without letting me know

Remind the knowledge of the relative clauses.



his name.2. Non-defining Relative ClausesDefinition

Non-defining relative clauses are replaced after definite nouns; so they are not essential to the understanding of the noun. They only give some more information about the noun.Non-defining relative clauses are separated from the noun by commas.

Ex: Long’s father, who works for a construction company, is often away from home.*Note:a. That cannot be used to replace who,

whom, which in non-defining relative clauses.

b. Relative pronouns used as objects cannot be omitted.

c. Notice the difference:- Contestants, who got good results, are all very intelligent.

(All the contestants got good results.)- Contestants who got good results are all very intelligent.

(Only some of the contestants got good results.)

STEP 2: PRACTICE.• Give handouts and ask Ss to do

ExercisesExercise 1: Fill in each of the blanks with who, whom, whose, which, or that.Have Ss do the exercise in 7 minutesWalk around the class to observeCall Ss to read aloud and explain their answers Ask the whole class to check and correctGive the corrects answers and explain more if necessary

1. The book __ I bought at the bookstore yesterday is expensive.2. Do you know the man ___they’re talking about?3. What’s the name of the blonde girl __just came in?4. I don’t like people ___ lose their tempers

eeee. Make example.

Take handouts and do ExercisesWork individually, then compare the answers with a partner'sSuggested answers:1. which /that

6. whose 11. whose

2. whom/that

7. whom/ that

12. whose

3. who/ that

8. which/ that

13. which/that

4. who/ that

9. which/ that

14. who/that

5. which 10. whom/that

15. which/that



easily.5. Mexico City, ____ has a population of over 10 million, is probably the fastest growing city in the world.6. This is Henry, ____ sister works for my father.7. He’s the man _____people like at first sight.8. Could you iron the trousers _____are hanging up behind the door?9. The dress ____ she bought last week doesn’t fit her well10. The man ____ we consider our leader had much experience in climbing mountains.Exercise 2: Defining or non-defining? Write (D) or (N) next to each sentence, add commas if necessary.-Walk around the class to observe

-Call Ss to read aloud and explain their answers -Give the corrects answers and explain more if necessary

1. Professor Kim who teaches psychology is a strict teacher.

2. Japan which consists of four main islands suffers from a lot natural disasters every year.

3. Only students whose English does not meet the requirement should attend the course.

4. The bus which leaves at 5.30 doesn’t stop at Cornwall.

5. Hue bought a bar of chocolate which looked very delicious.

6. My dog which was lying in the sofa had long pointed ears.

7. The bike which he wanted to buy is too expensive.

8. These glasses which were made by a famous craftsman were sold out quickly.

9. His room which was small was filled with piles of old books

10.That road which leads to my village is lined with bamboo trees.

Work in pairsSuggested answers:1- N. Professor Kim, who teaches psychology, is a strict teacher.2- N. Japan, which consists of four main islands, suffers from a lot natural disasters every year.3- D. Only students whose English does not meet the requirement should attend the course.4- D. The bus which leaves at 5.30 doesn’t stop at Cornwall.5- D. Hue bought a bar of chocolate which looked very delicious.6- N. My dog, which was lying in the sofa, had long pointed ears.7- D. The bike which he wanted to buy is too expensive.8- N. These glasses, which were made by a famous craftsman, were sold out quickly.9- N. His room, which was small, was filled with piles of old books10- N. That road, which leads to my village, is lined with bamboo trees.



STEP 3: PRODUCTION.Exercise 3: Combine each pairs of sentences, using Relative clauses. Put commas where necessary.

bbbb. Call Ss to read aloud and explain their answers

cccc. Ask Ss to write sentence by sentence on the board

dddd. Ask the whole class to check and correct

1. Does the T-shirt fit you? I gave it to you yesterday.

2. Our teacher assigned us the homework. We had to finish it within a week.

3. Those students got very high marks in the final exams. They had studied enthusiastically for months.

4. Romeo and Juliet were lovers. Their parents hated each other.

5. Ngoc has just moved to a new school. It was built two years ago.

6. The man is selling lottery tickets. He used to be very rich.

7. Hai’s friend is a very interesting boy. He came from Da Nang.

8. Mekong Delta is located in the South of Viet Nam. It provides most of the rice for exporting.

9. Quang Trung Street is very wide. It leads to my school.

10.I know a place. Roses grow in abundance there.

Work individually, then exchange their results with a friendSuggested answers:1. Does the T-shirt which I gave to you yesterday fit you?2. Our teacher assigned us the homework which we had to finish within a week.3. Those students, who had studied enthusiastically for months, got very high marks in the final exams. 4. Romeo and Juliet, whose parents hated each other, were lovers. 5. Ngoc has just moved to a new school which was built two years ago.6. The man who used to be very rich is selling lottery tickets. 7. Hai’s friend, who came from Da Nang, is a very interesting boy. 8. Mekong Delta, which provides most of the rice for exporting, is located in the South of Viet Nam. 9. Quang Trung Street, which leads to my school, is very wide.10. I know a place where Roses grow in abundance.

IV/ Summary: Summarise the main poitsV/ Homework ; Prepare new lessonE/ Evaluation

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………





+ how to use defining relative clauses with prepositions properly. 2. Skills: writing 3. Political thought: Students revise defining relative clauses with prepositions.B.TEACHING AIDS: 1. Teacher: lesson plan ,textbook , pen,handouts, 2. Students: pens, notebooks, textbooks… C. METHODS: T/Wh class, groupwork, pairwork D. CONTENTS:I. Organisation:





Teacher’s activities Student’s activitiesSTEP 1:PRESENTATION- T. gives Ss some examples.- Then Ss draw out the rules.

Examples:1. The man was very helpful. I talked to him. a. The man whom / who I talked to was very helpful.

b. The man that I talked to was very helpful.c. The man ∅ I talked to was very

helpful.d. The man to whom I talked was very

helpful.

2. The chair is nearly collapsed. The child is sitting in it.

a. The chair which the child is sitting in is nearly collapsed.

b. The chair that the child is sitting in is nearly collapsed.

c. The chair ∅ the child is sitting in is nearly collapsed.

d. The chair in which the child is sitting is nearly collapsed.

* Notes: - whom / who, which và that có thể được

sử dụng như là tân ngữ của một giới từ trong mệnh đề quan hệ.

- whom / who, which và that có thể được lượt bỏ đi như ở câu ví dụ 1c và 2c.

- Trong cách dùng Tiếng Anh trang trọng, giới từ được đặt đầu mệnh đề quan hệ (hay đại từ quan hệ) như ở ví dụ 1d và 2d. Giới từ chỉ đứng trước whom hoặc which mà không đứng trước that hoặc who; đại từ whom, which lúc này không thể lượt bỏ.

STEP 2: PRACTICE- T presents the handouts- Teacher explains how to do this exercises.

- Listen and take note

* Exercise :Combine these sentences into one, using relative pronouns and relative clauses:1. The movie was very interesting. We went to it.--> ...............................................................2. The man is over there. I told you about him.--> ..................................3. The woman pays me a fair salary. I work for her.--> ..........................................4. Alice likes the family. She is living with them.--> ....................................5. The picture is beautiful. Tom is looking at it.--> .......................................................6. I enjoyed the music. We listened to it after dinner.--> ....................................7. The person was very friendly. I spoke to him. --> ...........................................8. The motel was very clean. We stayed at that motel.-->..............................9. The person never came. Sally was waiting for that person.--> ..........................................10. I never found the book. I was looking for it.-->............................................................11. One of my subjects is Literture. I have been interested in Literature for a long time.-->...........................................12. The interviewer wanted to know the name of the college. I had graduated from this college.



- Teacher goes around class and help sts if necessary.- Teacher corrects their tasks.- Teacher gives feedbackKeys:

1. The movie to which we went was very interesting.2. The man about whom I told you is overthere.3. The woman for whom I work pays me a fair salary.4. Alice likes the family with whom she is living.5. The picture at which Tom is looking is beautiful.6. I enjoy the music to which we listen after dinner.7. The person to whom I spoke was very friendly.8. The motel at which we stayed was very clean.9. The person for whom Sally was waiting never came.10. I never found the book for which I was looking.11. One of my subjects is literature in which I have been interested for a long time.12. The interviewer wanted to knw the name of the college from which I had graduated.13. Orgnic chemistry is a subject with which I am not familiar.14. The chair in which I am sitting is very hard

STEP 3:PRODUCTION.- T presents the handouts- Teacher explains how to do this exercises.

- Teacher goes around class and help sts if necessary.- Teacher corrects their tasks.- Teacher gives feedbackA 2. C 3.A 4.B 5.B

--> .....................................................13. Organic chemistry is a subject. I am not familiar with it.--> .........................................14. The chair is very hard. I am sitting in this chair.--> ...............................................

- Listen and take note

1. This is a town ________ many people live.

A. in which B. whichC. at which D. on which

2. Behind the farmhouse there was a large garden, ______ the farmer and his sons were working.

A. for which B. whichC. in which D. that

3. Did you see the men to whom I gave the money?

A. to whom B. whichC. from whom D. to that

4. I must thank the man from _____ I got the present.

A. who B. whomC. that D. which

5. That ’s the woman to _______ Jim used to be married.

A. who B. whomC. which D. that



IV/ Summary: Summarise the main poitsV/ Homework; Prepare new lessonE/ Evaluation………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………



+ use participles and to-infinitive to replace relative clauses. 2. Skills: writing 3. Political thought: Students revise relative clauses replaced by participles & to -infinitive B.TEACHING AIDS: 1. Teacher: lesson plan ,textbook , pen,handouts, 2. Students: pens, notebooks, textbooks… C. METHODS: T/Wh class, groupwork, pairwork D. CONTENTS:I. Organisation:



Teacher’s activities Student’s activitiesSTEP 1: PRESENTATION1. Active :

Examples:- The man who stands at the door is my uncle.- The man who is / was standing at the door is my uncle.- The man who stood at the door is my uncle. The man standing at the door is my uncle.* Notes: We can use a present participle to replace a relative clause which has an active meaning.

2.Passive: Examples: - The woman who is / was given a

-listen and copy - make example



flower looks / looked very happy. The woman given a flower looks / looked very happy. * Notes: We can use a past participle to replace a relative clause which has a passive meaning.3. Infinitive relative clause: (active / passive) Examples: a. Active: - The first student who comes to class has to clean the board. The first student to come to class has to clean the board. b. Passive: - The only room which was painted yesterday was Mary’s. The only room to be painted yesterday was Mary’s. * Notes: We can use an active or a passive to-infinitive after an ordinal number (first, second, ..), next, after, last, only, and an indefinite pronoun (something, anything, …)STEP 2: PRACTICE. Practice:- Ss work in pairs to do the exercise.

- After Ss finish their exercise, T calls on some Ss to write their answers on the board, and T corrects then.Keys:1. Maxicorp were the only company repling my letter. 2. Do you the man talking to my father ? 3. Applications sent after 23rd will not be

Considere4. We have a lot of exercises to do toninght.5. Studies of her son are the most important thing for her to care about. 6.The equipment belonging to the club is insured.7.George is the first person to interview.8.Meetings held every month are called monthly meetings.

* Exercise 1: Rewrite the following sentences using present participle, past participle or to-infinitive: 1. Maxicorp were the only company which replied my letter. …………………………………… 2. Do you the man who is talking to my father ? ………………………………… 3. Applications which were sent after 23rd will not be considered. ………………………………… 4. We have a lot of exercises which we hace to do toninght. ………………………… 5. Studies of her son are the most important thing that she cares about. ………………

6. The equipment which belongs to the club is insured.

………………7. George is the first person that we

will interview. …………………8. Meetings which are held every

month are called monthly meetings. ………………9. The most excellent students who

were rewarded the scholarship would have a two-week holiday in Vung Tau.

………………10.The trees which were planted last

week are growing well.* Exercise 2: Rewrite the following sentences using an appositive:1. We walked down Park Lane, which is the srteet alone Hyde Park. We walked down Park Lane, the



9.The most excellent students rewarded the scholarship would have a two-week holiday in Vung Tau.10.The trees planted last week are growing well.

STEP 3: PRODUCTION- Ss work in pairs to do exercise 2.- After Ss finish their exercise, T calls on some Ss to write their answers on the board, and T corrects then.Keys:1. The statue of Eros stands high above

Piccadilly Circus, the busiest crossroads in London.

2. We turned left into Regent Street , one of the best shopping street.

3. We passed Marble Arch, once a gate into Hyde Park.

4. Tom, my classmate, comes from England

srteet alone Hyde Park.1. The statue of Eros stands high

above Piccadilly Circus, which is the busiest crossroads in London.

…………………… 2. We turned left into Regent Street ,

which is one of the best shopping street.

………………… 3. We passed Marble Arch, which was

once a gate into Hyde Park. ………………… 4. Tom, who is my classmate, comes

from England. …………………



REVISIONA.OBJECTIVES: 1. Knowledge : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to: + know how to leave out relative pronouns. 2. Skills: writing 3. Political thought: Students revise omitted relative pronounsB.TEACHING AIDS: 1. Teacher: lesson plan ,textbook , pen,handouts, cassette 2. Students: pens, notebooks, textbooks… C. METHODS: T/Wh class, groupwork, pairwork D. CONTENTS:I. Organisation:





Teacher’s activities Student’s activitiesSTEP 1: PRESENTATIONOmission of relative pronouns* Examples:

- The manager was away on holiday. I wanted to see him. The manager (who / whom / that) I wanted to see was away on holiday.* Notes:- We can leave out the pronoun when it stands for an object pronoun of defining relative clauses, and there is no preposition in front of it.- Clauses without relative pronouns are very common in informal English.STEP 2:PRACTICESs work in pairs to do the exercise.

- After Ss finish their exercise, T calls on some Ss to write their answers on the board, and T corrects then. Keys:1. I like the dress Trang is wearing 2. The fish We had for dinner was really

delicious.3. We stayed at a hotel Peter

recommended

4. The film . I watched on TV last night was interesting

5. The flat My family used to live in was very old.

6. The birthday party We went to was too noisy.

7. Who was that boy You was with this morning.?

8. I don’t like tie John is wearing.9. The train We travelled on was full of

passengers and goods. 10.The church Our class visited is 200

years old. STEP 3: PRODUCTION- Ss do exercise 2.

* Exercise 1 Combine the two sentences into one, using the relative clauses. Leave out the relative pronouns if possible.Example: Have you found the keys? You lost them. Have you found the keys (which / that) you lost

1. I like the dress. Trang is wearing it.1. The fish was really delicious. We

had it for dinner.2. We stayed at a hotel. Peter

recommended it.3. The film was interesting. I watched

it on TV last night.4. The flat was very old. My family

used to live in it.5. The birthday party was too noisy.

We went to it.6. Who was that boy? You was with

him this morning.7. I don’t like tie. John is wearing it.8. The train was full of passengers and

goods. We travelled on it.9. The church is 200 years old. Our



- After Ss finish the exercise, T calls on some Ss read aloud their answers- T corrects Ss’ answers then.Keys:

___1. Everything that happened was my fault._√__2. Is there anything that I can do?___3. The window that was broken has now been repaired.___4. Where are the eggs that were in the fridge?__√_5. The play that we saw last week was boring._√__6. The young man who I sat next

to on the bus talked all the time.__√_7. Do you know the girl who

Tom is talking to?___8. Linda works for a company that

makes computers.___9. The book about the young girl

who runs away from home._√__10. He is getting on well with

Mary, who he met last month.___11. That’s the company for which

Lan is working.___12. The man who helped me to finish that work was my neighbour.

class visited it.* Exercise 2: Tick (√ ) the sentences in which the relative pronouns can be omitted.

Example: √ Is this the car that the police are looking for?

___1. Everything that happened was my fault.___2. Is there anything that I can do?___3. The window that was broken has now been repaired.___4. Where are the eggs that were in the fridge?___5. The play that we saw last week was boring.___6. The young man who I sat next to

on the bus talked all the time.___7. Do you know the girl who Tom

is talking to?___8. Linda works for a company that

makes computers.___9. The book about the young girl

who runs away from home.___10. He is getting on well with

Mary, who he met last month.___11. That’s the company for which

Lan is working.___12. The man who helped me to

finish that work was my neighbour.





REVISIONA.OBJECTIVES: 1. Knowledge : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to: + know how to use cleft sentences + tag question & could/be able to. 2. Skills: writing 3. Political thought: Students revise cleft sentences, tag question and could/ be able to B.TEACHING AIDS: 1. Teacher: lesson plan ,textbook , pen,handouts, 2. Students: pens, notebooks, textbooks… C. METHODS: T/Wh class, groupwork, pairwork D. CONTENTS:I. Organisation:



Teacher’s activities Student’s activities

STEP 1: PRESENTATION1. Cleft sentences

- T gives examples to explainThis boy visited his uncle last month S O Adv+ Subject focus: It was the boy who visited his uncle last month+ object focus: It was his uncle that the boy visited last month+ adverbial focus: It was last month that the boy visited his uncle- Form: It + be+ focus+ clause1. Subject focusIt is/was + S+ that/who +verb: chÝnh ai ®ã lµm c¸I g×2. Object focusIt is/was + O+ that/who(m)+ S +verb: chÝnh ai ®ã, mét c¸I g× ®ã mµ …3.Adverbial focusIt is/was + adverbial of place + that+ S+verb+…

ffff. Listen and make example



(chÝnh n¬I nµo ®ã ai ®ã/ mét c¸I g× ®ã lµm g×..)2. Could / be able to.Example:+ Did his hurt ?(Yes) + His leg hurt but he was able to run fast T explains + Could: exprees and ability +was/ were able to: express an effort to do st Form: Aux + Subject ?

3. Tag question.- Use the aux verb to ask

+ if the sentence is infinitive, the tag questionis Negative and opposite.

STEP 2: PRACTICEExercise 1: Put in could or was/ were able to. Sometimes either is possible. Use a negative if necessary.1. Suddenly all the lights went out. We

couldn't see a thing.2. The computer went wrong, but luckily

Emma was able to put it right again.3. There was a big party last night. You

could hear the music half a mile away.4. I learnt to read music as a child. I

could/ was able to read it when I was five.

5. People heard warnings about the flood, and they were able to move out in time.

6. The train was full. I couldn't / wasn't able to find a seat anywhere.

7. Mrs. Carter was able to put out the fire before the house burnt down.

8. I looked everywhere for the book, but I couldn't find it.

9. The plane was able to take off at eleven o'clock, after the fog had lifted.

10.It was foggy, so the plane couldn't / wasn't able to take off.

Exercise 2: Add question tags to the following statements.1. He hardly ever makes a mistake, does

he?2. Nobody liked the play, did they?

gggg. Copy down

hhhh. Work in pairs*key:

1. couldn’t2. was able to3.Could4. Could/ was able to5. Were able to6. Couldn’t/ wasn’t able to7. Was able to8. Couldn’t9. Was able to10.Couldn’t / wasn’t able to

iiii. Work in pairs*key:

1. does he?2. did they



3. She'd save money if she bought fresh food, wouldn't she?

4. She's very' funny. She's got a great sense of humour, hasn't she?

5. The area was evacuated at once, wasn't it?

6. Mr Smith usually remembered his wife's birthdays, didn't he?

7. It never works very well, does it?8. He ought to have made a note of it,

oughtn't he?9. Neither of them offered to help you,

did they?10.There'll be plenty for everyone, won't

there?STEP 3: PRODUCTIONExercise 3: Rewrite the sentences to focus attention on the underlined information. Start with it + be and an appropriate wh-word or that.1. She bought the car from Tom.2. My secretary sent the bill to Mr

Harding yesterday.3. He already plays for national side; he

only turned professional last year.4. The film was made in Bristol.5. We are coming to stay with Jane this

weekend.

3. wouldn’t she?4. hasn’t she5. wasn’t6. didn’t he7.does it8. oughtn’t he9. did they?10.Won’t there.

jjjj. Work in pairs*key:1. It was Tom who/ that she bought

the car from2. It was my secretary who/ that sent

the bill to Mr Harding yesterday.3. He already plays for the national

side, it was only last year when/that he turned professional

4. It was in Bristol where/ that the film was made.

5. It is Jane who/ that we are coming to stay with this weekend.





UNIT 16 : THE WONDERS OF THE WORLDLESSON 1: READING

A.OBJECTIVES: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to

- read about one wonder of the world ( The Pyramind ) - scan read for specific ideas - skim read for general ideas 2. Skills: reading 3. Political thought: Read about the great pyramid of Giza.B.TEACHING AIDS: 1. Teacher: lesson plan ,textbook , pen, 2. Students: pens, notebooks, textbooks… C. METHODS: T/Wh class, groupwork, pairwork D. CONTENTS:I. Organisation:

II. Warm up: Matching the picture with the right nameA B C



258


*KEY:1.C 2.A 3.B 4. D 5.G

D E1.Sydney Opera House 2. Statue of Liberty 3. Stonehenge 4. The Pyramids 5.. Golden Gate Bridge

III/ New lesson:Lead - in Can you tell me some wonders in the world ? ( The Pyramids, The Great Wall, The Lighthouse... ) Good, now today you are going to read about one of the wonders in the world

Teacher’sactivities Students’activitiesSTEP 1: PRE – READING.

*Vocabulary 1. tomb(v) (denfinition) 2. pyramind(n) ( picture) 3. contruction ( gap- fill) 4.Treasure (n) ( translation) + Belonging: example+proceed (v): = progress+ propose(v): make sugguestion

kkkk. Listen and repeatllll. Copy down.

Checking by R.O.RSTEP 2: WHILE- READING

Activity 1: Gap - fill Instructions: The words in the box all appaer in the passage. Read the text and work in pair to do the gap- fill test

Activity 2 : Questions- Answers T divides the class into groups of 4 T gives handouts of the questions to each

mmmm. listen to the Teachernnnn. copy downoooo. do exercise

pppp. skim the text qqqq. and do task1

Suggested answers: 1 .tomb, 2. wonder, 3. ramp 4. chamber 5. mysitrious, 6 .spiral

- work in groups rrrr. read the text again and

answer the questions given



group T asks each group to read the text again and answer the questions tgiven T asks the grouos to exchange the handouts for correction T calls on some groups to give the answers, asking each group to correct the answers on the handout T asks each group to take its handout back after correction

Activity 3 : Scanning for information T asks Ss to scan read the passage again and work in apirs to say what the following words refer to 1. who (line 4) 2. it ( line 8) 3. It (line) 4. each(line 12) T goes around to encourage Ss to readT calls on some pairs to give the answersT givens feedback STEP 3: POST – READING. Discussion Work in apairs to discuss this question: Which of the wonders of world do you like best? Why? T goes around to offer help T calls on some pairs to act out the conversation T gives feedback

Suggested answers 1. On the west bank of the river Nile 2. About 147 m high and on a base of 230m square 3. To sere as a tomb when the Egyptian the burial chamber from the weather and from the thieves who might try to steal the treasures and belongings there 4. It is thought that ancient Egyptians used straight or apiral ramps or huge weight arms to lift and place the block's of stone 5. The boat it's belived to have been used to carry the body of Khufu in his last journey on each before being buiried inside the Pyramind

ssss. work in pairs and read the text agian and find the following words refers to

Suggested feedkack 1. who(line 4)(the thieves) 2. it (line 8) ( the Great Pyramid )3. It ( line 9)(the Great Pyramid) 4. each(line 12) a block of stone

tttt. work in piars and discussuuuu. present the ideas base on the

questions in the book. P.178

IV. Summary: summarize the main pointsV. Home work : - learn by heart the new words - prepare next lessonE.EVALUATION:………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………Date of preparing:...../......./........ Period: 101

UNIT 16 : THE WONDERS OF THE WORLDLESSON 2: SPEAKING




- distinguish facts and opinions - use facts and opinions to talk about features of man- made places 2. Skills: reading 3. Political thought: Read about the great pyramid of Giza.B.TEACHING AIDS: 1. Teacher: lesson plan ,textbook , pen, 2. Students: pens, notebooks, textbooks… C. METHODS: T/Wh class, groupwork, pairwork D. CONTENTS:I. Organisation:

II. Revision: Home checkingvvvv. Ask Ss to write the new wordswwww. Call Ss to give commen and give marks

III/ New lesson:Teacher’s activities Students’activities

STEP 1: PRE – SPEAKING.xxxx. T sticks the picture of the

Pyramid on the BB and asks SS: What is this ? ( The Pyramid ). Good, now, tell me, is the pyramid high ? (yes)

yyyy. T writes on the BB+The Pyramid is high.+What do you think of this wonder ? ( I think it is great).

zzzz. T writes on the BBaaaaa. I think this wonder is great.

Now, look at the two sentences on the BB, which sentence describes fact and which one describes opinion ?=>Task 1: Distinguishing facts and opinionsInstructions: This time you have some statements about the Pyramid. Read them and work in pairs to decide if each one describes fact or opinion.

bbbbb. T goes around to offer help.

ccccc.T asks some pairs to give their answers.

ddddd. T gives feedback.

fffff. listen to the teacher and answerthe Pyramidggggg. i think itis great

Expected answer: The first describes fact and the second describes opinion..

hhhhh. read the statements and then decided which is facts or opinions

Suggested answers: - Facts: 2, 3, 4,

iiiii. Opinions: 1, 5, 6, 7



261


STEP 2: WHILE – SPEAKING. Task 2: Group-workLet's move to task 2. Before you do it, I am going to give you some useful language.Now when you express your opinions, what phrases or sentence patterns do you use ?T elicits and introduces ways to express ideas.- I think / I am sure ...- It is said / believed / thought that ....- They might / may / can have ....- Probably / May be they ....Examples:- I think the Pyramid was built by an enormous giant.- Probably an enormous giant built the Pyramid.- A giant might have built the pyramid.Instructions: Task 3 : Answering the questions.Work in pairs: This time you discuss possible answers to the following questions, using the suggested questions below1. Who built the Great Pyramid ?2. How long did it take to build it ? 3. Where did the builders find the stones?4. how did they transport them?5. How could they build the Pyramid so high ?T goes around to offer help T takes notes of Sis's mistakes for indirect correctionAfter 7 minutes, T ask them to stop and gives feedback on their workSTEP 3: POST – SPEAKING.Role- play

eeeee.Work in groups of four. Supposing that one of you were one of those who contributed to build the Pyramid in the old time and tell your friends what happened with the construction of the wonder.

-listen to the teacher and then use phrases to express ideas

Examples:- I think the Pyramid was built by an enormous giant.- Probably an enormous giant built the Pyramid.- A giant might have built the pyramid.............................................................

- work in groups and use task 2 to ask and answer



Your friends akss you questions and you answer. You can use the information in activity 2 as help

T goes around to offer help if need be T listens to Ss and collects their mistakes for indiretc correction T gives feedback



UNIT 16 : THE WONDERS OF THE WORLDLESSON 3: LISTENING


* listen to a listening text about The Great Wall * listen for specific information * listen for general ideas 2. Skills: listening 3. Political thought: listen about the Great Wall.B.TEACHING AIDS: 1. Teacher: lesson plan ,textbook , pen, 2. Students: pens, notebooks, textbooks… C. METHODS: T/Wh class, groupwork, pairwork D. CONTENTS:I. Organisation:

II/Warm up:T divides the class into two groups T tells them that there is a word in the T's mind. T will give them 4 pieces of information about the word, one by one, and menbers of each group can raise their hands at any time to guess what the word is. Each groups has only two chances to make a guess 1. This word is a noun and it is very well- known in the world2. You can see this from the moon 3. It was enlisted in The world Heritage by UNESCO 4. It is one of the wonders in the world and the syn\mbol of China



263


Key: The great Wall T declares the winner Lead- in Have you ever seen the Great Wall on TV? (yes) How old do you think it is ? (Ss make a guess) Would you like to visiy it some day ? (Yes) Now, you are going to listen to a passage about it. First, I am going to help you with some new wordsIII/ New lesson:

Teacher’sactivities Students’activitiesSTEP1: PRE-LISTENING*Vocabulary + ancient 9 adj) ~ very, very old + ming Dynasty (n) ( translation) + Magnificence (n) (synonym) + World Heritage+ wind(v) >< streight+ Visible(a) able to be seen

• Checking by R.O.RSTEP 2: WHILE – LISTENING.

Activity 1: Gap - fillingInstructions Now you are going listen about The Great Wall, one of the wonder. Listen and work in pairs to fill in the missing information. Remenber that the tape will be played twice T gives handouts of gap- fill testT plays the tape twice T calls on some Ss to give the answers T goes over the answers with the class

Activity 2 : Answering the questions: T gives Ss handouts of activity 2 Instructions: Now listen to the listening text again and answer the questions in the handout. You will listen to the tape twice T gives Ss 1 minute to read the questions T plays the tape twice T calls on some students to give the answers T goes over answes with the class

STEP 3: POST – LISTENINGInterviewWork in pairs: ask and answer base on

jjjjj. listen to the teacherkkkkk. copy downdo exercise

lllll. listen to the tapemmmmm. and fill in the gaps

Suggested answers (1) the moon (2) 1987 (3) the Ming Dynasty (4) 200 (5) 200 BC (6) 6000 km (7) 11 m (8) stone

nnnnn. listen again and answer the questions

Suggested answers 1. In 1368 2. Five provinces 3. Thanks to its magnificence and significance 4. The part in the northwest of Beijing is the best choice for visiy because it is still in its original state

-work in groups



these questions;

Questions Answer1. When it was built?2. How many years

Chinese people use to build it

3. How long it is?4. Why it is considered

one of the greatest man-made wonders in the world.

ooooo. ss talk about the Great Wall base on the table.

IV. Summary: summarize the main pointsV. Home work : - learn by heart the new words - prepare next lessonE.EVALUATION:………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………Date of teaching:......./......./........... Period: 103

UNIT 16 : THE WONDERS OF THE WORLDLESSON 4: WRITING

A.OBJECTIVES: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to:

- write a report on a man-made place - work in pairs / groups effectively - do the tasks set by T correctly

2. Skill: writing 3. Political thought: write a report to the Ponagar Cham Towers in NhaTrang.B.TEACHING AIDS: 1. Teacher: lesson plan ,textbook , pen, 2. Students: pens, notebooks, textbooks… C. METHODS: T/Wh class, groupwork, pairwork D. CONTENTS:I. Organisation:

II/ Warm up:

III/ New lesson:

Teacher’sactivities Students’activities



265


step1: pre-writingVocabulary+ consist of ( context)Water consists of two elements: hydrogen and oxygen+ in honor of (exp) (translation)They built the temple in honor of the national hero.+ statue (n) (context)There is a statue of uncle Ho in the middle of our school yard.What does statue mean ?+ Buddha ( n) ( picture)Checking:Rub out and remember

STEP 2: WHILE – WRITINGppppp. Open your books to

page 184 and have a careful look at the notes made by a visitor to the Panagar Cham Towers in Nha Trang.

qqqqq. Work in groups of 4 to use the notes to write a report on the visit.

rrrrr. T calls on five representatives of 5 groups ( chosen at random) to go to the BB to write down their reports.

sssss. T gives feedback

STEP 3: POST - WRITING

Role-play ( Speaking on the phone)ttttt. T asks Ss to read the tourist's

report again and work in pairs to play the role of the tourist's friend, who are talking about the tour to Ponagar Cham Towers.

yyyyy. Listen and copyzzzzz.Read again.

Suggested key : My visit to Nha Trang last year included a brief tour to Ponagar Cham Towers. This town complex is one of the most beautiful examples of Cham architecture in central Vietnam.The Ponagar Cham Towers consists of 4 towers. They are located on Cu Lao Marble Hill Two kilometers north of Nha Trang. They were built between the 8th and 13th centuries.Each town was decided to different god. The largest tower was built in honor of Lady Thien Y. The 22.5 m high tower contains her sandstone statue sitting on Buddha's throne. The 26 m high statue has 10 hands, holding specific objects illustrating the power of Buddha.The tour to Ponagar Cham Towers lasted 5 hours. I felt tired but the visit was enjoyable, memorable and informative

-work in pairs

A: Hello, may I speak to B please ?B: B here.Who's speaking ?A: It's me, A.B: Oh, A. Long time no see. Where have you been ?A: I have just come back from Ponagar



This time, the two friends talk on the phone. The conversation should be opened like this.

uuuuu. T goes around to offer help.

vvvvv. T takes notes of Ss' mistakes for indirect correction.

wwwww. T calls on 2 pairs to go to the front of the class to act out the conversation.

xxxxx. T gives feedback

Cham Towers in Nha Trang.B: Oh, how nice. Please tell me about it. Ss to go to the BB to writeA: ........B: ........


Date of teaching:......./......./........... Period: 104

UNIT 16 : THE WONDERS OF THE WORLDLESSON 5: LANGUAGE FOCUS

A.OBJECTIVES: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to:

- distinguish the 4 soumds: / ft /, / vd /, / fs /, / vz - know how to use the structures: It is said that ......: People say that . 2. Skill: writing+reading 3. Political thought: talk about the wonders of the worldB.TEACHING AIDS: 1. Teacher: lesson plan ,textbook , pen, 2. Students: pens, notebooks, textbooks… C. METHODS: T/Wh class, groupwork, pairwork D. CONTENTS:I. Organisation:

II/ Warm up: III/ New lesson:

Teacher’sactivities students’activitiesI./ PRONUNCIATION:1.Distinguish the sound:- T writes the pronunciation of the ending soulds of these 4 words on the board

/ft/ /vd/ /fs/ /vz/gift arrived coughs behaves



267


gift/ moved/ laughed/ knives /ft/ /vd/ /fs/ /vz/t hangs this chart on the BB /ft/ /vd/ /fs/ /vz/gift arrived coughs behaves lift loved laughs Loves soft moved Roofs knives

T reads the words aloud and asks Ss to repeat T calls on some Ss to say the words T corrects their mistakes 2. Practice:

T hangs this chart 1. They are not on the roof now. They've been moved to the ground Use the lift. I'll ring to say you've arrived2. I think he's improved. Still coughs but laughs a lot, of couse 3. We have plenty of laughs. We miss him when he leaves 4. he loves a nurse. Her name's Soft. He want me to bring her this gift 5. He brought me a gitf when he arrived T reads the sentences aloud, then asks Ss to listen and repeat after him T calls on some Ss to read the sentences aloud, correcting their mistakes if necessary II./ GRAMMAR

1. Presentation: aaaaaa. T draws a boy who is

praised by his teacher bbbbbb. T asks: Is the boy

good? (Yes) cccccc. T asks : Does the

teacher praise him every week ? (yes)

The teacher praises Tom every week Who can rewrite my sentence, beginning as shown?Peolpe say that ... / It is said that Tom is said ...

dddddd. T writes and explains *It is siad that ? People say that+ S + V

eeeeee. T draws another picture who was praised by the

lift loved laughs Loves soft moved Roofs knives

iiiiii. listen to the teacher nad repeat

jjjjjj. copy downkkkkkk. speak out

llllll. listen to the tape mmmmmm. and read again

- listen to the tapennnnnn. copy down

Expected answers:People say that / It is said Tom is praised by the teacher every week Tom is said to be praised by the teacher every week

-? People say that+ S + V

Form: S + is / was ( said...) + to have +pp

- do exercise EX1: Suggested answers 1. Many people are said to be homeless after the floods



teacher last week ffffff. T leads to this sentencegggggg. The teacher prased

Tom last week hhhhhh. T asks Ss to rewrite

this sentence, beginning as shown. Tom is said...

( Expected answer: Tom is said to have been prased by the teacher last week .)Form: S + is / was ( said...) + to have +pp

2. Practice:

Ex 1: T asks Ss to do execise 1/ page 185 - 186 in pairsT goes around to offer help T calls on some Ss to read their answers alound T corrects their mistakes if necessary

3. Production:

Ex 2 T asks Ss to do exercise 2/ page 186 in apairs T goes around to offer help T calls on some Ss to read their answers aloud T corrects their mistakes if necessary

2. The prisonee is thought to have escaped by climbing over the wall 3. He is believed to have driven throught the town at 90 km per hour 4. Two people are reported to have been seriously injured in the accident 5. Three men are said to have been arrested after the explosion 6. The strike is expected to begin tomorrow 7. He is said to speak English very well

oooooo. do exercise 2: Suggested answers 1. He is thought to be very clever 2. The wanted man is believed to be living in New York 3. He is known to be very rich 4. The film is supposed to be very good 5. Many people are thought to have been killed in the accident 6. About a million puppies are thought to be born each year 7. The factories are said to be much worse 8. those dogs are said to be dangerous



Giao an tieng anh lop 11 chuan

Documents

Transcript of Giao an tieng anh lop 11 chuan